lO 15 ) | 
a Lit & ae ! Bets 
% 


“LogicaL gen 


fel 
ri 


4 pis 


υ 
η 
ἵ 


᾿ ἣν 
i ἀ τα I 
ee ᾿ ὌΝ 


" 
y ft i ke 
ὺ ἡ} y int Ν Mi 


¢ ἮΝ MA >i, 
i 
nt i 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES 


(AIAAXH ΤΩΝ ATIOCTOAQN) 


CAMBRIDGE : 


PRINTED BY (Ὁ. J. CLAY, M.A. AND SONS, 
AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS. 


(AIAAXH ΤΩΝ ATIOCTOAQN) 


NEWLY EDITED, WITH FACSIMILE TEXT AND A COMMENTARY, 
FOR 


THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY, BALTIMORE, 


FROM THE MS. OF THE HOLY SEPULCHRE, 
(CONVENT OF THE GREEK CHURCH,) 
JERUSALEM, 


BY 


J. RENDEL HARRIS, 


FORMERLY FELLOW OF CLARE COLLEGE, CAMBRIDGE, 
PROFESSOR OF BIBLICAL LANGUAGES AND LITERATURE IN HAVERFORD COLLEGE, PENNSYLYANIA. 


BALTIMORE: 
PUBLICATION AGENCY OF THE JOHNS HOPKINS UNIVERSITY. 


LONDON: 
C. J. CLAY anp SONS, 
CAMBRIDGE UNIVERSITY PRESS WAREHOUSE, AVE MARIA LANE. 
1887 


PREFACK. 


WO years have elapsed since I had the opportunity of 
presenting to the notice of scholars a small tract con- 
taining three pages of photographs taken from the now famous 
MS. which contains the Teaching of the Apostles. Only one 
of these pages contained any part of the Teaching itself, and 
that was a fragment of the opening chapter: but the publica- 
tion answered its object, which was chiefly the demonstration 
that the hand which wrote the Teaching was the same that 
was found in the previously edited and unquestioned epistles of 
Clement which the Bryennios MS. presented for the first time 
in a complete form. The edition of these facsimiles was de- 
signedly limited in the hope that before long the enquiries made 
by Dr Charles R. Hale, through whom they were obtained, might 
result in the acquisition of a complete series of photographs of 
the Teaching. This hope has now been happily realised, partly 
through the negotiations initiated by Dr Hale with the Patriarch 
of Jerusalem, and partly through the enthusiastic co-operation and 
scholarly sympathy of Mr Henry Gillman, the United States Consul 
in that city. To these two gentlemen the Christian scholarship 
of the West owes a debt of gratitude for their efforts to 
secure in the completest form possible the publication of the 
recovered memorial from the early days of the Faith. 


Nor should it be forgotten that in the case of a unique 
document, the publication of an exact reproduction is a virtuous 
act on the part of the University that undertakes it. Photo- 
graphy is a literary fire-insurance of the first importance, and 


vi PREFACE. 


should be employed much more than it has been, where there 
is any risk of the disappearance of important historical monu- 
ments. This consideration is of itself sufficient to ensure the 
approval and support of scholars for the reproduction undertaken 
by the Johns Hopkins University. 


The rest of the book is an attempt on the part of the 
Editor to gather up the results of the criticism bestowed upon 
the text of the Teaching during the past four years. Much of 
what has been said on the subject is, of necessity, volatile; but 
the solidities of interpretative criticism are beginning to appear, 
and the time must be nearly come for their collection. No 
attempt, however, is made to repeat everything true that has 
been said on the subject; nor to trace every detail of exact 
statement to the first person who put it in print. To do so 
would be to make a mere study of origins out of a labour of 
love, 

A received text of the Teaching is happily almost ours, 
a received commentary does not enter into the dream of the 
most audacious of critics; and the Editor is so sensible of his 
own imperfect discipline in theological matters, that he only 
asks that the interpretations which he presents may meet with 
a continuance of the tolerant judgment which has been shewn 
to his previous efforts by those who are better scholars than 
he. ‘For if the readiness is there, it is acceptable according as 
a man hath, not according as he hath not.” 


J. RENDEL HARRIS. 


HaAverrorp COLLEGE, 
Pa. 


CORRIGENDA. 


Page 1, last line of text. Read ζωῆς ἐστὶν 

Page 2, line 15 of text. Read ἔχων: δώσει 

Page 7, line 9 of text. Read σοῦ ἐστὶν 

Page 74, line 2 of text. Read the Gnosis on Genesis, 


ACKNOWLEDGMENTS. 


In behalf of the Johns Hopkins University under whose auspices the 
following pages appear, a few words of acknowledgment are due to those 
who have contributed to the publication. 

In common with the world of scholars we owe our thanks first to Bishop 
BrYENNIOS, Metropolitan of Nicomedia, the discoverer of the manuscript, and 
the original editor of the printed text, which was published in 1883. 

In September, 1884, the Rev. C. R. Hale, D.D., then of Baltimore, and 
now Dean of the Cathedral at Davenport, Iowa, addressed a letter to the 
President of the University, proposing to visit Constantinople and to make 
an effort while there to secure for publication photographic copies of the 
pages of the Didache. An official letter was accordingly sent to him 
authorizing him thus to act as our representative. He also carried with 
him letters of introduction to the Patriarch of Jerusalem, from the Patriarch 
of Alexandria, and from the Secretary of the Holy Synod of Russia. Upon 
reaching Constantinople he was taken by the Librarian of the Hellenic 
Philological Syllogos to see the library of the Most Holy Sepulchre, attached 
to the residence of the Patriarch of Jerusalem, where the Didache was then 
kept, and after some hesitation, the Archimandrite in charge permitted him 
to take photographs of three pages of the so-called Bryennios manuscript. 
Reproductions of these pages were published in Baltimore in March, 1885, 
under the editorial supervision of Mr J. Rendel Harris, at that time holding 
among us the chair of New Testament Greek and Palewography. 

A little later Dr Hale wrote us from Jerusalem that he had seen the 
Patriarch, who consented that photographs of the entire work should be taken 
for publication in Baltimore. It had been already determined by His 
Blessedness to bring the manuscript from Constantinople to Jerusalem, and 
consequently it was evident that there would be some delay in the fulfilment 
of his promise. But early in 1887, after the manuscript had been received 
in Jerusalem, the United States Consul in that city, Henry Gillman, Esq., 
who had been hospitably received by the Patriarch, was authorized by him to 
proceed with the undertaking. The photographs were accordingly made, and 
as soon as they were received in Baltimore were placed in the hands of Professor 
Harris, the result of whose critical studies is now submitted to scholars. 

Grateful acknowledgments are therefore due to His Blessedness, N1copE- 
mus, Patriarch of Jerusalem, for the enlightened spirit which led him to 
grant our request and enable us to give to the world an exact reproduction 
of this valuable manuscript; to the Rev. Dr Hate for the original suggestion 
of this publication and for a personal presentation of our request to the 
Patriarch; to the United States Consul in Jerusalem, HENRY GILLMAN, ἔβα. 
for his careful supervision of the photographic work, and for the skill and 
courtesy with which he carried on all the later negotiations; and to the 
Editor, Professor Harris, of Haverford College, for his care in bringing out 
this volume. 

DANIEL C. GILMAN, 


President. 
Jouns Hopxixs University 
October 1, 1887. 


TABLE OF CONTENTS. 


TRANSCRIPTION OF TEXT . : : : : : : : : . pp. 1—10 
DerscrIPTION OF THE JERUSALEM CODEX AND SUGGESTED EMENDATIONS . 11—14 
SECONDARY AUTHORITIES FOR THE TEXT 5 : : : : 14—61 
OpscuRE PASSAGES OF THE TEACHING. : : : ξ : : 62—77 
Hersraisms oF THE TEACHING ν ' : : A ; ; : 78—90 


INTEGRITY OF THE TEACHING AND GENEALOGICAL RELATIONS OF THE 


AUTHORITIES FOR ITs TEXT : ὁ Σ : 4 ; : ; 90—94 
SupposeD MonTANISM OF THE TEACHING : . : ‘ A : 95—96 
AppItionaAL Noves : Σ : : : ς ‘ : : 97—107 


PLATES. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


TRANSCRIPTION OF TEXT. 


Note.—Obvious errors of transcription are recorded in the margin; editorial cor- 
rections of any weight are given at the foot of the page. 


Διδαχὴ τῶν δώδεκα ἀποστόλων. 


cil Διδαχὴ κυρίυ διὰ τῶν δώδεκα ἀποστόλων τοῖς ἔθνεσιν" ὁδοὶ δύο 
Deut. xxx.15 
Jerem, xxi. 8 


εἰσ μία τῆς ζωῆς. καὶ μία τοῦ θανάτου διαφορὰ δὲ πολλὴ μετα- 


x a , εῷ ε κ᾿ > ἐῶν a a ee. Sa a > , 
2 & τῶν δύο ὁδῶν: ἡ μὲν οὖν od0s τῆς ζωῆς ἐστιν αὕτη" πρῶτον: ἀγαπή- 


ἘΠ 1 


Fol. 


Cod. 
Cod. 


Cod, 
Cod. 


τὸ ἃ 


δυο 
ἔστιν 


Fol. 76 b 
Cod. 67 


For the form 
of μὴ in Cod. 


ef. ψυχῃ in fol. 


77 a, lin. 21 
Cod. ἔστιν 


Cod. οὐχ᾽ 
ἕξεται 


Cod. δυο 
Cod. τίς 


Cod. τίς 
Cod. αἰοῦτντι 


Cod. πηρ 


Cod. τίς 


Cod. χεῖρας 


τῷ 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


‘ ‘ A , , 4 ‘ tA “Ὁ / 4 
σεις τὸν θεὸν τὸν ποιήσαντά oe δεύτερον. τὸν πλησίον Gov ὡς σεαυτόν: πάντα 
τ δ᾽ Ν ’ 2 ‘ ’΄ μὰ 
δὲ ὅσα ἐὰν θελήσῃς μὴ γίνεσθαί σοι καὶ σὺ ἄλλῳῳ μὴ Tole τού- 
x a , ε ΄ > pte > - ν ΄ 
tov δὲ τῶν λόγων y διδαχή ἐστιν αὕτη: εὐλογεῖτε τοὺς καταρωμένους 
ἘΝ ᾿ , τον Aw es ee ae ᾿ ἧς εἶς Ξ 
ὑμῖν: καὶ προσεύχεσθε ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐχθρῶν ὑμῶν. νηστεύετε δὲ ὑπὲρ τῶν 
, ε lol 4 ‘ , 38 3 “ ‘ > a 
διωκόντων ὑμᾶς" ποία γὰρ χάρις ἐν ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας 
δ καὶ SSS Ν ‘ Ν Ν > Ν lal ε “ Ν > ~ Ν 
ὑμᾶς" οὐχὶ καὶ τὰ ἔθνη τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσιν, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς μι- 
a On ν᾿ 3 “ > ieee > + a a κ᾿ a > a 
σοῦντας ὑμᾶς: Kal οὐχ ἕξετε ἐχθρόν: ἀπέχου τῶν σαρκικῶν καὶ σωματικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν. 
eu δῷ ῥάπισμα εἰς τὴν δεξιὰν σιαγόνα στρέψον αὐτῷ καὶ τὴν 
ἐάν τις σοι δῷ ῥάπισμα εἰς τὴν ἃ my, p 5 ἢ 
ν ἌΝ ων , 5 2s > , ΄, , ἃ ¢ > Ou 
ἄλλην καὶ ἔσῃ τέλειος: ἐὰν ἀγγαρεύσῃ σέ τις μίλιον ἕν ὕπαγε μετ΄ αὐτοῦ 
ὃ Aer, 2s ὟΝ ‘ ε ΄ 2 ὃ ‘ 7 A Ν ‘ A "Δ δ (. 
jo’ ἐὰν ἄρῃ τις τὸ ἱμάτιόν cov δὸς αὐτῷ καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα' ἐὰν λάβῃ 
8: - ῖς a τ ν N > pia 204 \ , 5 \ a peers /J 
τις ἀπὸ σοῦ τὸ σὸν μὴ ἀπαίτει οὐδὲ yap δύνασαι: παντὶ τῷ αἰτοῦντί σε 
\ > ΄ A a 
δίδου καὶ μὴ ἀπαίτει πᾶσι γάρ θέλει δίδοσθαι ὃ πατὴρ ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων 
r . ΄ ε διδοὴ ν \ > ΄ 52“ 
χαρισμάτων μακάριος ὃ δοὺς κατὰ τὴν ἐντολήν" ἀθῶος 


> 


, > Ἢ 2 a nN Perens > nN \ ΄ " x ΄ 
γάρ ἐστιν oval TH αμβάνοντι' εἰ μὲν γὰρ χρείαν ἔχων λαμβάνει τις α- 


θῶος ἔστι 6 δὲ μὴ χρείαν ἔχων δώσει δίκην: ἱνατί ἔλαβε καὶ 
- ΄ 
εἰς τί ἐν συνοχῇ δὲ γενόμενος ἐξετασθήσεται περὶ ὧν ἔπραξε' καὶ οὐ- 
(2 ἐξ Ν , 3 70 x ΄ - > δῷ ν ” 5 ΄ 
ξελεύσεται ἐκεῖθεν μέχρις οὗ ἀποδῷ τὸν ἔσχατον κοδράντην. 


> Na \ \ , SP 5 ε ΄ ε 2 ΄ > 
ἀλλὰ καὶ περὶ τούτου ὲἐ εἴρηται ἱδρωτάτωω ἢ ἐλεημοσύνη σου εἰς 


τὰς χεῖράς σου μέχρις ἂν γνῷς τίνι δῷς" δευτέρα δὲ ἐντολὴ τῆς διδαχῆς" 


> , ἕξ > , - > 
οὐ φονεύσει" οὐ μοιχεύσεις: οὐ παιδοφθορήσεις: οὐ πορνεύσει: οὐ κλέ 
J > ete > jee > ͵ ; 5 τ 

ψεις οὐ μαγεύσεις οὐ φαρμακεύσεις οὐ φονεύσεις τέκνον ἐν φθορᾷ" 
> ͵ > a ἢ τς 

οὐδὲ γεννηθέντα ἀποκτενεῖ: οὐκ ἐπιθυμήσες τὰ τοῦ πλησίον: οὐκ ἐπιορ- 
was > ὃ ces : , : ἢ 

κήσεις οὐ ψευδομαρτυρήσεις οὐ κακολογήσεις" οὐ μνησικακήσεις" 


i. 4. lege cum Bry. κοσμικῶν (v. Const. Apost. vii.). 


6. lege cum Bry. δὴ. Br. idpwodrw. Hilg. idpucdrw. Harn. μὴ δραχθήτω ete. 
ii. 8. Bry. γεννηθέν. 


σι 


ii, 1 


Deut. vi. 5 
Lev. xix. 18 
Tob. iv. 15 


Matt. v. 44 


Luke vi. 32 


1 Pet. ii. 11 
Matt. v. 39 
Matt. v. 48 
Matt. v. 41 


Luke vi. 30 


Matt. v. 26 


Deut. v. 17 


4,5 

6 

Ley. xix. 17 7 
Deut. xxiii. 7 
Jude 22, 23 


oO 


Ps. xxxvii.11 7 


Is. Ixvi. 2 


Row. xii. 16 10 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 3 
οὐκ ἔσῃ διγνώμων: οὐδὲ δίγλωσσος: παγὶς γὰρ θανάτου κἡ διγλωσσία: οὐκ ἔ- 


ε ’, ‘ 
arat ὃ λόγος cov ψευδὴς οὐ κενός: ἀλλὰ μεμεστωμένος πράξει: οὐκ ἔσῃ 


᾿ πλεονέκτη οὐδὲ ἅρπαξ: οὐδὲ ὑποκριτής οὐδὲ κακοήθης" οὐδὲ ὑπερή- 


φανος" οὐ λήψῃ βουλὴν πονηρὰὼν κατὰ τοῦ πλησίον σου οὐ μισήσεις πάντα 
ἄνθρωπον: ἀλλὰ ots μὲν ἐλέγξεις: περὶ δὲ ὧν προσεύξῃ: ods δὲ ἀγαπήσεις ὑπὲρ 
᾿ ΄ a , - aN ν a, ioe ues Ny μα Sh: 3s δ δὶ 
τὴν ψυχήν σου τέκνον μου φεῦγε ἀπὸ παντὸς πονηροῦ" καὶ ἀπὸ παντὸς ὁμοίου αὐτοῦ" 
μὴ γίνου ὀργῖλος: ὁδηγεῖ γὰρ ἡ ὀργὴ πρὸς τὸν φόνον' μηδὲ ζηλωτής: μηδὲ ἐ- 
Pe δὲ ’ “ τ 5 Ν Ψ' ε ’, , “-“ ’ 
ριστικός" μηδὲ θυμικός ἐκ γὰρ τούτων ἁπάντων φόνοι γεννῶνται. τέκνον μου" 
N ΄ > 6 Ὡς τὸ a \ s 5 θ ΄ \ τ: 7 ee ν᾿ > 
μὴ γίνου ἐπιθυμητής: ὁδηγεῖ γὰρ ἢ ἐπιθυμία πρὸς τὴν πορνείαν: μηδὲ αἰσχρο- 
λόγος: μηδὲ ὑψηλόφθαλμος: ἐκ γὰρ τούτων ἁπάντων μοιχεῖαι γεννῶνται" 
΄ \ ΄ > ΄ 5 > \ © a > \ > ΄, 
τέκνον μου μὴ γίνου οἰωνοσκόπος: ἐπειδὴ ὁδηγεῖ εἰς τὴν εἰδωλολατρίαν' 
μηδὲ ἐπαοιδός" μηδὲ μαθηματικός" μηδὲ περικαθαίρων" μηδὲ θέλε 
> ‘ , > ‘ 4 ε , > ’ὔ΄ cal ys: 
αὐτὰ βλέπειν: ἐκ yap τούτων ἁπάντων εἰδωλολατρία γεννᾶται τέκνον 
μου μὴ γίνου ψεύστης: ἐπειδὴ ὁδηγεῖ τὸ ψεῦσμα εἰς τὴν κλοπήν᾽ μηδὲ 
΄ κ᾿ iN ας > \ , e207, \ a 
φιλάργυρο: μηδὲ κενόδοξος" ἐκ γὰρ τούτων ἁπάντων, κλοπαὶ γεννῶνται. 
,ὕ ‘ vd /, a > ‘A ε “ > ‘ "3 
τέκνν μὸ μὴ γίνου γόγγυσος: ἐπειδὴ ὁδηγεῖ εἰς τὴν βλασφημώαν. 
μηδὲ αὐθάδης" μηδὲ πονηρόφρων" ἐκ γὰρ τούτων ἁπάντων βλα- 
σφημίαι γεννῶνται" ἴσθι δὲ πραῦς" ἐπεὶ οἱ πραεῖς κληρονομή- 
AN ial , 56 ΝΣ ἐλ. ΄’΄ Ν ” ‘ 
σουσι τὴν γῆν γίνου μακρόθυμος: καὶ = eAepwy καὶ ἀκάκος καὶ 


” > Cire 
ἡσύχιος: καὶ ἀγαθός: Kal τρέμων τοὺς λόγους διαπαντὸς: οὖς ἤκουσας: οὐχ ὑψώσεις 


Ξ , > , ε , 

σεαυτόν: οὐδὲ δώσεις τῇ ψυχῇ σου θράσος: οὐ κολληθήσεται ἡ ψυχή σου 
“- “ ΄ ἣν 

μετὰ ὑψηλῶν: ἀλλὰ μετὰ δικαίων καὶ ταπεινῶν ἀναστραφήσῃ! τὰ συμ- 

\ ¢ ” a 

Baivovrd σοι ἐνεργήματα ὡς ἀγαθὰ προσδέξῃ. εἰδὼς ὅτι ἄτερ θεοῦ 


ii. 7. post οὖς μὲν ἐλέγξεις adde οὖς δὲ ἐλεήσεις cum Hilg., Funk. (Cf. Ap. Can. et ep. Jud. v. 23.) 
iii. 2. 1. ὀργίλος cum Bry. : 


1—2 


Fol. 77 a 


Cod. avoy 


Cod. μὴ δὲ 
passim 


Cod. γενῶνται 


Cod. μοιχειαι 
sup. ras, 


Cod. ἐπεὶ δὴ 
passim 


Cod. obx’ ὑψώ- 
σει σεαυτὸν 
Cod. here has 
iota ascript, 
τῆι 


Cod. 00 


4 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Fol. 77 b 
β = 2 . , τι 2 1 
Cod. 60 οὐδὲν γίνεται τέκνον pou, τοῦ λαλοῦντός σοι τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ" μνησθή- 
΄ ε μι ‘ ε ΄ A 
Cod. κν σῃ νυκτὸς Kal ἡμέρας" τιμήσεις δὲ αὐτὸν ὡς κύριον: ὅθεν yap 1 κυριότης λαλεῖται 
— > Lal ’ ΄ > 5» , Ν > ε ,ὔ Ν ΄ “- es = 
Cod. Ko ἐκεῖ κύριός ἐστιν’ ἐκζητήσες δὲ καθ᾿ ἡμέραν τὰ πρόσωπα τῶν ἀαγίων 
σ τ ros a , cas > , ΄ > , 
ἵνα ἐπαναπαῆς τοῖς λόγοις αὐτῶ: οὐ ποθήσες σχίσμα: εἰρηνεῦύσεις 
“ > id ’ / Ν 
δὲ μαχομένους: κρινεῖς δικαίως: οὐ λήψῃ πρόσωπον ἐλέγξαι ἐπὶ παρα- 
΄ Σ > , ΄ ” By ΓΝ ν ἢ ‘ nN 
πτώμασιν' od διψυχήσεις πότερον ἔσται ἢὮ οὐ μὴ γίνου πρὸς μέν 
‘ a“ 5 iA ‘ lal ‘ ἊΝ ‘ iol Ley Ps ΕΣ 43 
τὸ λαβεῖν ἐκτείνων τὰς χεῖρας πρὸς δὲ τὸ δοῦναι συσπῶν' ἐὰν ἐχῃς διὰ 
a a , , ε a ; > ΄ a 29) 
τῶν χειρῶν σου δώσεις λύτρωσιν ἁμαρτιῶν σου οὗ διστάσεις δοῦναι: οὐδὲ 
ε a 4 ε cal cal 
Cod. ἡ τοῦ μ. διδοὺς γογγύσει" γνώσῃ yap τίσ ἐστιν ὁ τοῦ μισθοῦ καλὸς ἀνταποδότης. 
> 3 ΄ Ν > ΄ + ΄ Ν ΄ aA > 
οὐκ ἀποστραφήσῃ τὸν ἐνδεόμενον συγκοινωνύσεις δ πάνα τῷ α- 
ὃ “ Ἂ; 3 > a 1. 7 ᾿ > ‘ > “ 3 ΄ 
ἐλφῷ σου: καὶ οὐκ ἐρεῖς ἴδια εἶναι εἰ γὰρ ἐν τῷ ἀθανάτῳ κοινω- 
, 9 ΄ SV > a. 6 Al > ees! \ ns cy a 
vol ἐστε, πόσῳ μᾶλλον ἐν τοῖς θνητοῖς" οὐκ ἀρεῖς τὴν χεῖρά σου απὸ τοῦ 
x . a ΄ > 
υἱοῦ cov ἢ ἀπὸ τῆς θυγατρός σου: ἀλλὰ sad νεότητος διδάξεις τὸν 
- an ? , , a “ 
Cod. θυ φόβον τοῦ θεοῦ: οὐκ ἐπιτάξεις δούλῳ σου ἢ παιδίσκῃ τοῖς ἐπὶ τὸν αὐτὸν 
= , > 
Cod. 67 θεὸν ἐλπίζουσιν ἐν πικρίᾳ σου" μήποτε οὐ μὴ φοβηθήσονται τὸν 
- > > fe , ‘ »” 
Cod. 67 ἐπ᾿ ἀμφοτέροις θεόν: οὐ γὰρ ἔρχεται κατὰ πρόσωπον καλέσαι: ἀλλ᾽ ἐφ᾽ ods 
, A oF 2 A 
Cod. δούλι τὸ πνεῦμα ἡτοίμασε᾽ ὑμεῖς δὲ of δοῦλοι ὑποταγήσεσθε τοῖς κυρίοις 
Clie con ε , A > > , . , a 
Cod. ἡμῶν ὑμῶν: ws τύπῳ θεοῦ ἐν αἰσχύνῃ καὶ φόβῳ: μισήσεις πᾶσαν ὑπόκρισιν 
Cod. θὺ 
- - Ἂν Lod a A > A aA ΄ 3 A / Ν 
Cod. ca, ῦ καὶ πᾶν ὃ μὴ ἀρεστὸν τῷ κυρίῳ: οὐ μὴ ἐγκαταλίπῃς ἐντολὰς κυρίου: φυλάξεις δὲ 
a LA ΄ ἃς id > A 
ἃ παρέλαβες: μήτε προστιθεὶς. μήτε ἀφαιρῶν' ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ ἐξο- 
x: ΄ ‘ , ΄ Ν 3 4 EN 
μολογήσῃ τὰ παραπτώματά σου: καὶ οὐ προσελεύσῃ ἐπὶ προ- 
΄ > ΄ “ LA a a - 
σευχήν σου ἐν συνειδήσει πονηρᾷ- αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ζωῆς ἡ δὲ τοῦ θα- 
ΓΝ ΄ ea7 > A >; “-“ 
Cod. ὁδὸς ἐστὶν νάτου ὁδός ἐστιν αὐτὴ πρωτον πάντων πονηρά ἐστι καὶ κατάρας 


iv. 2. ἐπαναπαύῃ Bry. 
3. 1. ποιήσεις. (Cf. Barnab,, Ap. Const., Ap. Can.) 


iv. 1 


4,5 


10 


11 


12 


13 


14 


Sir. iv. 31 


Jaci. 5 


Acts iv. 32 


Deut. iv. 2 


Deut. xii. 82 


Sir. i. 28 


Rom, i. 29 


Col. iii, 8 


Rom. xii. 9 


Is. i, 23 


1 Thess. i. 9 


Matt. xxviii. 
19 


John iv. 10 


vii. 1 


2 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 5 
μεστή: φόνοι: μοιχεῖαι: ἐπιθυμίαι: πορνεῖαι: κλοπαί: εἰδω- 
λολατρίαι: μαγεῖαι: φαρμακίαι: ἁρπαγαί: ψευδομαρτυρίαι: 
ὑποκρίσεις" διπλοκαρδία: δόλος" ὑπερηφανία" κακία" αὐθάδεια" 
πλεονεξία' αἰσχρολογία: ζηλοτυπία" θρασύτης: ὕψος" ἀλαζονεία" 


-“ » »“ fol > ’ Ἢ > - a > , ‘ 
διῶκται ἀγαθῶν. μισοῦντες ἀλήθειαν: ἀγαπῶντες ψεῦδος: οὐ γινώσκοντες μισθὸν 
ὃ , Ξ - » AX: , > 6 A. ὐδὲ ’ ὃ ,ὔ ᾿ . > -“ > 

ικαιοσύνης οὐ κολλώμενοι ἀγαθῷ οὐδὲ κρίσει ικαίᾳ ἀγρυπνοῦντες οὐ- 
> Ν > ΄ > > > Ν a τ ν τὰ Ν ε 

κ εἰς τὸ ἀγαθόν: ἀλλ᾽ εἰς τὸ πονηρόν" ὧν μακρὰν πραὕτης καὶ ὕπομο- 

΄ ΄ > a ΄ > ΄ Pp > > a Ls 

vy pata. ἀγαπωντες" διώκοντες ἀνταπόδομα οὐκ ἐλεοῦντες πτωχὸν 


κ οι > , \ 2 a 
ov TOVOUVTES ἐπὶ καταπονουμένῳ ov γινώσκοντες TOV ποιήσαντα αὐτούς" φονεῖς 


, a δ᾽ A, > , ‘ > ΄ 
τέκνων. φθορεῖς πλάσματος θεοῦ ἀποστρεφόμενοι τὸν ἐνδεόμενον" κατα- 
- Ἥ , ,’ὔ ΄ Ξ , ΜΝ 
πονοῦντες τὸν θλιβόμενον. πλουσίων παράκλητοι πενήτων ἄνομοι 
΄ ΄ = ε ΄, ΄, SIN ΄ cits 
κριταῖ" πανθαμάρτητοι ῥυσθείητε τέκνα απὸ τούτων ἁπάντων. 


σ , ΄, ὅδ ς , a ες α a a ΞΕ τς \ 
ὅρα μή τις σε πλανήσῃ ἀπὸ ταύτης τῆς ὁδοῦ τῆς διδαχῆς: ἐπεὶ παρεκτὸς 
“-“ , ἣν “ 
θεοῦ σε διδάσκει. εἰ μὲν γὰρ δύνασαι βαστάσαι ὅλον τὸν ζυγὸν τοῦ κυρίου τέλειος 
if 
A Lal n 
ἔση: εἰ δ᾽ οὐ δύνασαι ὃ δύ τοῦτο ποιεῖ: περὶ δὲ ς σεως" ὃ δύνασαι 
, , τῆς βρ 
ἄστασον' ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ εἰδωλοθύτου λίαν πρόσεχε: λατρεία γάρ ἐστιν θεῶν νεκρῶν' 
γάρ ρ 
Ἂς Ν cal 4 σ ,ὔ a ’ ’ὔ 7) 
περὶ δὲ τοῦ βαπτίσματος οὕτω βαπτίσατεε ταῦτά. πάντα προειπόντες βαπτί- 
ρ μ 
Υ 
> ν "» a \ \ a ean \ a Cen , 5 ¢ 
σατε' εἰς TO ὄνομα τοῦ πατρὸς Kal τοῦ υἱοῦ Kal τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος ἐν ὕδατι 
μ 7 μ 
»“ -“ ΝΜ 
OvTe ἐὰν δὲ ) ἔχης ὕδω͵ ὦν εἰς ἄλλο ὕδω ἅπτισον. εἰ δ᾽ οὐ 
ἢ ρ 
2 ΄“ a, ‘A Ν > , A ΕΣ = »” 
δύνασαι ἐν ψυχρῷ: ἐν θερμῷξὨἩ ἐὰν δὲ ἀμφότερα μι ἔχῃς" ἔκχεον εἰς τὴν 
‘ ‘ LA > ἊΜ s 4 cn ‘ ΓΑ ΄ 
κεφαλὴν τρὶς ὕδωρ εἰς ὄνομα πατρὸς καὶ υἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου πνεύματος: 
‘ Ν lol ,ὔ΄ , ε ’, QA ij , 
πρὸ δὲ τοῦ ἀπτίσματος προνηστευσάτω ὁ απτίζων καὶ ὁ βαπτιζόμενος" 
p be 


lol 4 -“ 
καὶ εἴ τινες ἄλλοι δύνανται: κελεύεις δὲ νηστεῦσαι τὸν βαπτιζόμενον πρὸ μιᾶς 


vil. 4, 1. κελεύσεις,. (Bry. et edd. omn.) 


Fol. 78 a 


Cod. θυ 


Cod. 60 
Cod. κῦ 


Cod. ps 
Cod. 7s 


Cod. πρς 
Cod. avs 


Fol. 78 b 
Cod. δυδ 


Cod. μὴ δὲ 
Cod. xs 


Cod. περ 
Cod. οὕνω 


Cod. γεννηθή- 


TW 


Cod. oww 


Cod. περ 


Cod. δαδ 
Cod, 'w 


Cod. evxapic- 
τοῦμεν 

Cod. περ 

Cod. *w 


Cod. ὦ 
Cod. 


Cod. 


Cod. 
Cod. 


κυ 
Ks 


Cod. εὐχαρισ- 
τοῦμεν 


Cod. περ 


Cod. μων 


6 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


a a ‘ lol ε a ¢ ‘ 

ἢ δύο: at δὲ νηστεῖαι ὑμῶν. py ἔστωσαν μετὰ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν, νηστεύουσι γὰρ 
a , , Ν 

Sevrépa σαββάτων καὶ πέμπτῃ ὑμεῖς δὲ νηστεύσατε τετράδα καὶ παρα- 

ε ’ > > ε ΓΙ ε , > 

σκευήν μηδὲ προσεύχεσθε ὡς οἱ ὑποκριταί". ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἐκέλευσεν ὁ κύριος -ἐν 


ῷ εὖ λί ὑτοῦ: οὔ ὕύχεσθε: ma. ἡμῶν ὃ ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ: ἁγιασθή- 
τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ αὐτοῦ" οὕτως προσεύχεσθε’ πάτερ ἡμῶν ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ἁγιασθή 


΄ A , , 
τω τὸ ὄνομά σου ἐλθέτω ἢ βασιλείά σου: γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημά σου' 
ε 5 > a NEIEN a ν », con \ > ΄ δὸ ἘΣ τες , Ξ . 
ὡς ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ γῆς: τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιούσιον δὸς ἡμῖν σήμερον" καὶ ἄφες 
A ϑ ἐν ᾿ ΞΕ, A 
ἡμῖν τὴν ὀφειλὴν ἡμῶν: ὡς Kal ἡμεῖς ἀφίεμεν τοῖς ὀφειλέταις yudv' Kal μὴ εἶσε- 
,ὔ ε na ΕἸ ΄ 5» ‘ en ε lal > A a a. 7 
véykys ἡμᾶς «is πειρασμόν" ἀλλὰ ῥῦσαι ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ πονηροῦ" ὅτι 
a > ε , Ν ε , ν > ‘ 2a Ξ Ν a ec ,ὔ a 
σοῦ ἐστιν ἡ δύναμις καὶ ἢ δόξα: εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας: τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας οὕτω 
΄ Ν Ν a 3 ,ὔ ῳ > / 4 - Q 
προσεύχεσθε περὶ δὲ τῆς εὐχαριστίας οὕτω εὐχαριστήσατε' πρῶτον περὶ 
a , > aA / , ε a GES ial Ae. > , 
τοῦ ποτηρίου. εὐχαριστοῦμέν σοι πάτερ ἡμῶν ὑπὲρ τῆς ἁγίας ἀμπέλου 
ci Ξ A 5 a a 
Aavid τοῦ παιδός σου ἧς eyvwpicas ἡμῖν διὰ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ παιδός σου" 


Nee ΄ > \ aA A ‘ x a ΄ 5 > af , ε 
σοι ἢ δόξα εἰς τοὺυς ALWVAS περι δὲ του κλάσματος ευχαριστουμεν σοι πάτερ ἡ- 


μῶν ὑπὲρ τῆς ζωῆς καὶ γνώσεως ἧς ἐγνώρισας ἡμῖν διὰ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ παιδός cov: σοὶ 


ε Le > ‘ 5“ σ Cs a x , ὃ Ῥ»» 
ἢ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰώνας" ὥσπερ ἦν τοῦτο κλάσμα ιεσκορπισμένον 
5. 2 a aay, \ ᾿ 3. ἢ abs “ ΄ ε 3 
ἐπάνω τῶν ὀρέων καὶ συναχθὲν ἐγένετο ἕν’ οὕτω συναχθήτω cov ἢ ἐκ- 
, Ἔν a , 2 2 2 . , ae ¢ 
κλησία ἀπὸ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς εἰς τὴν σὴν βασιλείαν ὅτι 
τ a ΩΣ ea. ΩΣ 6 5 τ 2 , τ 
σοῦ ἐστιν ἣ δόξα καὶ ἡἣ δύναμις διὰ ᾿Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας: μηδεὶς 
x ΄ ᾿Ν , 2 AN A > ΄ HOT Re > > - , 
δὲ φαγέτω μηδὲ πιέτω ἀπὸ τῆς εὐχαριστίας ὑμῶν: ἀλλ᾽ οἱ βαπτισθέντες 


XA Ν ΄ m4 c , ‘ - ‘ 7 aA 
εἰς ὄνομα κυρίου" Kal γὰρ περὶ τούτου εἴρηκεν ὁ κύριος" μὴ δῶτε TO ἅγιον τοῖς κυσί. 


μετὰ δὲ τὸ ἐμπλησθῆναι οὕτως 


> la ΕΣ a“ 
εὐχαριστήσατε" εὐχαριστοῦμέν 
, “ τς a ε. “ S50, , κεν , 
σοι πάτρ dye ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἁγίου ὀνόματός σοὺ οὗ κατεσκήνωσας 
3 a , δέ Cane. . εἰς a ΄ rs τ ΄ \ > , 
ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν καὶ ὑπὲρ τῆς γνώσεως: καὶ πίστεως καὶ ἀθανασίας: 
ἴχ. 4. 1. τοῦτο τὸ κλάσμα cum Gebhardt et Funk. 


viii. 1 


2 


ix.1,2 


Matt. vi. 16 


Matt. vi. 9 
-13 


Acts iv. 25, 
27 


Matt. vii. 6 


Matt. xxiv. 
31 


Matt. xxi.9, 
15 


1 Cor. xvi. 22 


Matt. x. 40 


Matt. xu. 31 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES, 7 


3 ἧς ἐγνώρισας ἡμῖν διὰ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ παιδός σου[ σοὶ » δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας" σὺ 


4,5 


: in 
δέσποτα παντόκρατορ ἔκτισας τὰ πάντα ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀνόματός σου" 
’ ‘ ‘ Ν - > , > > ΄ [2 
τροφήν τε καὶ ποτὸν ἔδωκας τοῖς ἀνθρώποις εἰς ἀπόλαυσι' ἵνα σοι 
> , om ea Ν 5 ’ » ‘ ‘ ‘ 
εὐχαριστήσωσιν ἡμῖν δὲ ἐχαρίζω πνευματιὴῆν τροφὴν καὶ ποτὸν καὶ 
Ν 27 ΕΥ -“ , . Ν , 5» ca zx μὲ 
ζωὴν αἰώνιον διὰ τοῦ παιδός σου πρὸ πάντων εὐχαριστοῦμένδ σοι ὅτι 
‘ > Ν Ν ε , aA a tol 
δυνατὸς εἶ σὺ [+ σοὶ] ἡ δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας: μνήσθητι κύριε τῆς ἐκκλησίας σου τοῦ 
er > Ν » ‘ ‘ -“ Ν - » ν > nf > , 
ῥύσασθαι αὐτὴν ἀπὸ παντὸς πονηροῦ" καὶ τελειῶσαι αὐτὴν ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ σου" 
‘ , é, > A > ‘ tal , > , = ‘4 ε Lal > x Ν 
καὶ σύναξον αὐτὴν ἀπὸ τῶν τεσσάρων ἀνέμων. τὴν ἁγιασθεῖσαν εἰς τὴν σὴν 


\ 
, ἃ nT Sings Ὁ A 5 ε , Ne τ ἢ 
βασιλεία" ἣν ἡτοίμασας αὐτῇ ὅτι σοῦ ἐστιν καὶ δύναμις καὶ ἢ δόξα 


> \ "κα a > ΄ , ᾿ς ν ΄ ε ΄ 2 ε > 
εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας" ᾿ ἐλθέτω χάρις καὶ παρελθέτω ὁ κόσμος οὗτος: ὡς ἀν- 


x 2 = 
va τῷ θεῷ Aaiid εἴ τις ἅγιός ἐστιν ἐρχέσθω: εἴ τις οὐκ ἔστι μετα- 


ΕΝ ΄ δ. 2 Ὁ a Ν ΄ > , > 

νοείτω μαραναθά ἀμήν τοῖς δὲ προφήταις ἐπιτρέπετε εὐχαρι- 
a x > ‘ εκ A 

στεν ὅσα θθέλουσιν' ὃ ἂν οὖν ἐλθὼν διδάξγ ὑμᾶς ταῦτα πάντα 


τὰ προειρημένα δέξασθε αὐτόν: ἐὰν δὲ αὐτὸς ὁ διδάσκων στραφεὶς de 
, » ‘ > ‘ a Ν > -“ > , > Ἀ 
δάσκῃηῃ ἄλλην διδαχὴν εἰς τὸ καταλῦσα: μὴ αὐτοῦ ἀκούσητει εἰς δὲ 
\ - ΄ ν a ΔΝ} , Sak ε , ἑ ‘ ms 
τὸ προσθεῖναι δικαιοσύνην καὶ γνῶσιν κυρίου" δέξασθε αὐτὸν ὡς κύριον: περὶ δὲ 
aA > ΄ ν᾿ a ν᾿ \ ΄ a > Ye 4“ ΄ 
τῶν ἀποστόλων καὶ προφητῶν κατὰ τὸ δόγμα τοῦ εὐαγγελίους οὕτως ποιή- 
i ΤΟΤΕ ἘΦ Sera , ε i - 
cate. πᾶς δὲ ἀπόστολος ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ὑμᾶς δεχθήτω ὡς κύριος. οὐ με- 
- Ν ε ΄ , 2% Ν > 4 Ν Ν Ν nn ἣν "Ν ΄ 
νεῖ δὲ ἡμέραν μίαν: ἐὰν δὲ 7 χρεία καὶ τὴν ἄλλην. τρεῖς δὲ ἐὰν μείνῃ 
ψευδοπροφήτης ἐστίν" ἐξερχόμενος δὲ ὁ ἀπόστολος μηδὲν λαμβα- 
΄ > . ¥ “ - > a, .Ν x > , " κα 
vero’ εἰ μὴ ἄρτον ἕως οὗ αὐλισθῇ: ἐὰν δὲ ἀργύριον αἰτῇ ψευδοπρο- 
,’ “ ΄' 4 fe. , aA 5 , > , 
φήτης ἐστί Kal πάντα προφήτην λαλοῦντα ἐν πνεύματι, ov  πειράσετε. 
γον a a \ e ΄ > ΄ A o δὲ ε ε ΄ 
οὐδὲ διακρινεῖτ πᾶσα γὰρ ἁμαρτία ἀφεθήσεται αὕτη δὲ ἢ ἁμαρτία 
χ. 4, adde σοὶ post σύ cum Harn. 


6. θεῷ. (Bry. υἱῷ.) stet lectio codicis. 


xi adde εἰ μὴ ante ἡμέραν cum Harn. 


Fol. 79 a 

Cod. Ww 

Cod. omitstwo 
dots which 


should accom- 
pany the τ in 


δέσπο 
Cod. ανοις 


Cod. πνικὴν 


Cod. εὐχαρισ- 
τοῦμεν 


Cod. κε 
7 
Cod. ἐκκὰ 


Cod. Aw dad 
Cod. ἅγιος 
ἐστὶν 


Cod. ku, kv 


Cod. ks 


Cod, μὴ δὲν 


Cod. mv 
Cod. πειράσε- 
ε 


ται 


Fol. 79 b 


Cod. wv 
Cod. ἐστιν" 


Cod. κῦ 


Cod. ὁ ῥίξζων 
Cod, mvt 


Cod. du 


Cod. mvt 
Cod. μὴ dels 
Cod. κῦ 
Cod. ἕξεται 


Cod. δυο 


Cod. γενήμα- 
των 


8 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 
ἃ π , δ 
οὐκ ἀφεθήσεται οὐ πᾶς δὲ ὁ λαλῶν ἐν πνεύματι προφήτης ἐστίν: ἀλλ᾽ ἐὰν ἔχῃ 
‘ ΄ ,ὔ 3 Ν > “Ὁ / 6 , ε ὃ ’ Ν ε 
τοὺς τρόπους κυρίου: ἀπὸ οὖν τῶν τρόπων γνωσθήσεται ὁ ψευδοπροφήτης καὶ ὁ προ- 
a ΄ ΄ ipa! ete) 
φήτης | καὶ πᾶς προφήτης ὁρίζων τράπεζαν ἐν πνεύματι, οὐ φάγεται ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς" 
a , ‘ ΄ 
εἰ δὲ μήγε ψευδοπροφήτης ἐστί: πᾶς δὲ προφήτης διδάσκων τὴν ἀλήθειαν 
= a , 
εἰ ἃ διδάσκει οὐ ποιεῖ ψευδοπροφήτης ἐστί: πᾶς δὲ προφήτης δεδοκι- 
Ε " . ͵ 
μασμένος ἀληθινὸ ποιῶν εἰς μυστήρινν κοσμικὸν ἐκκλησίας μὴ διδά- 
Ν a “ 2. rs > ΄ 415 eon \ A Ν " 
σκων δὲ ποιεῖν ὅσα αὐτὸς ποιεῖ, οὐ κριθήσεται ἐφ᾽ ὑμῶν: μετὰ θεοῦ yap ἔχει 
Ἂν ΄ ε ΄ ‘ > ,ὔ Ἂν ε > a a a > A ” > 
τὴν κρίσιν. ὡσαύτως γὰρ ἐποίησαν καὶ of ἀρχαῖοι προφῆται: ὃς 6 ἂν εἴπῃ ἐν 
, , 5» , ΠῚ ia νι, > > ΄ > a ry Ks ΔΝ ΝΜ 
πνεύματι δός μοι ἀργύρια ἢ ἕτερά τινα οὐκ ἀκούσεσθε αὐτοῦ: ἐὰν δὲ περὶ ἄλλων 
: , 7 308 δεὶ 24 , ΠΡ ον τ προ safe ake 
ὑστερούντων εἴπῃ δοῦναι μηδεὶς αὐτὸν κρινέτω: πᾶς δὲ ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνό- 
, ΄ » Ν ΄ ΠΡ ΄ , 
ματι κυρίου: δεχθήτω: ἔπειτα δὲ δοκιμάσαντες αὐτόν. γνώσεσθε: σύνεσιν 
͵ ε , 
yap ἕξετε δεξιὰν καὶ ἀριστεράν: εἰ μὲν παρόδιός ἐστιν ὁ ἐρχόμενος βο- 
a“ WEY “ , 3 “ ἊΝ Ν ε “-“ > ἊΝ 4 x» a ε 
ηθεῖτε αὐτῷ ὅσον δύνασθε: οὐ μενεῖ δὲ πρὸς ὑμᾶς εἰ μὴ δύο ἢ τρεῖς ἡ- 
μέρας: ἐὰν ἢ ἀνάγκη: εἰ δὲ θέλει πρὸς ὑμᾶς καθῆσθαι τεχνίτης ὧν ἐργα- 
ζέσθω καὶ φαγέτω, εἰ δὲ οὐκ ἔχει τέχνην: κατὰ τὴν σύνεσιν ὑμῶν προνοή- 
ETON X xv] 0] i ῬΟΥ͂Ν 
“ Ἂν 3 ‘ > ε tl , ida > > > / Ψ 
σατε πῶς μὴ ἀργὸς μεθ ὑμῶν ζήσεται χριστιανός: εἰ 8 οὐ θέλει οὕτω 
a ἡ fot FA 2 58 A , A 3 
ποιεῖν ἱστέμπορός ἐστι. προσέχετε ἀπὸ τῶν τοιούτων": πᾶς δὲ προ- 
ριστέμπορ ροσέχ 
Ξ δ , > 2 Ξ 
φήτης ἀληθινὸὲξ θέλων καθῆσθαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς. ἀξιός ἐστιν τῆς τροφῆς αὐτοῦ 
ε ΄ ΄ 5» ΄ > Ν Ν ΕΑΝ “ ε ΕἸ ,’ a 
ὡσαύτως διδάσκαλος ἀληθινός ἐστιν agios καὶ αὐτὸς ὥσπερ ὁ ἐργάτης τῆς τρο- 


a > A a > > \ ΄ a \ 7 A a \ 
φῆς αὐτοῦ. πᾶσαν οὖν ἀπαρχὴν γεννημάτων ληνοῦ καὶ ἅλωνος: βοῶν τε καὶ 


, , A 
προβάτων λαβών: δώσεις τὴν ἀπαρχὴν τοῖς προφήταις: αὐτο γάρ εἰσιν 
ε > a Cine 2\ δὲ \ " ΄ ΄ a a 
οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς ὑμῶν ἐὰν € μὴ ἔχητε προφήτην δότε τοῖς πτωχοῖς. 

3. / lal } 
ἐὰν σιτίν Tous τὴν ἀπαρχν λαβὼν, dos κατὰ τὴν ἐντολήν" w- 


xii. 8. Bry. καθῆσαι. id. xiii. 1. 
xiii. 3. Bry. om. τὴν ἀπαρχὴν. 


10 


ΤῈ 


12 


xii. 1 


xiii. 1 


Heb. xiii. 10 


Ps. exviii. 26 


Matt. x. 10 


Mal. i. 11 


Luke xii. 35 


Matt. xxiv. 
42 


xiv. 


XV. 


xvi. 


τῷ 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 9 


, ΄ ν Sy 2), , me ‘ > ‘ "ἶ ‘ δὺ a 
OavTwsS κεραμίον οἰνου Ἢ ἐλαίου ανοιίξας τὴν απαρχὴν αβὼν OS τοις σρο- 


, e > ’ Ν ‘ ε a A A , 4 
φήταις ἀργυρίου δὲ καὶ ἱματισμοῦ καὶ παντὸς κτήματος λαβὼν 
4 > Pe ε Ν ὃ , é. δ 4 ‘ ‘4 > 4 . 
τὴν ἀπαρχὴν ως ἂν σοι ofn os κατα τὴν ἐντολήν 
‘ ‘ Ν , , , v Ν » , 
κατὰ κυριακὴν δὲ κυρίου συναχθέντες κλάσατε ἄρτον: καὶ εὐχαριστῆσα- 
€ , ‘ , « Ale 9 
TE προσεξομολογησάμενοι τα παραπτώματα πυμὼν OT WS κα- 


ΕΥ ε , ε - «ἢ call . » ‘ > , ‘ -“Ἢ ε 7) 
θαρὰ ἢ θυσίά ἡμῶν ἢ πᾶς δὲ ἔχων τὴν ἀμφιβολίαν μετὰ τοῦ ἑταίρου 
αὐτοῦ, μὴ συνελθέτω ὑμῖν ἕως οὗ διαλλαγῶσιν' ἵνα μὴ κοι- 

-“ ε , ε -“ σ , 5 ε ε Cal ε Ν , ‘ > ‘ , 
νωθῇ τ θυσία ὑμῶν: αὕτη yap ἐστιν ἡ ῥηθεῖσα ὑπὸ κυρίου[ ἐν παντὶ τό- 
πῳ καὶ ὄνῳ προσφέρειν οι θυσίαν καθαράν" ὅτι βασι- 

χρόνῳ ροσφέρ μ ρ 
λεὺς μέγας εἰμὲ λέγει κύριος καὶ τὸ ὄνομά μου θαυμαστὸν ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσι. 
΄ φ ε a > , Ν ὃ , »ὲ" ~ , 
χειροτονήσατε οὖν ἑαυτοῖς ἐπισκόπους καὶ ἰακόνους ἀξίους τοῦ κυρίου 
ἄνδρας πραεῖς καὶ ἀφιλαργύρος καὶ ἀληθεῖς καὶ δεδοκιμασμένους" 
ἘΣ \ = 1 en , , - Ξ , 
ὑμῖν yap λειτουργοῦσι καὶ αὐτοὺ τὴν λειτουργίαν τῶν προφητῶν καὶ 
, N > ε , ay Tee SEN , > ε , 
διδασκάλων: μὴ οὖν ὑπερίδητε αὐτούς: αὐτο γάρ εἰσιν οἱ τετιμημένοι 
ὑμῶν: μετὰ τῶν προφητῶν καὶ διδασκάλων: ἐλέγχετε δὲ ἀλλήλους. 
‘ > > “ > > > ᾿ ’ e Μ ΕἸ »“Ἤ > , QA ‘ > 
μὴ ἐν Οοργῃ᾽ ἀλλ᾽ ἐν εἰρηνῃ ως ἔχετε ἐν TH εὐαγγελίῳ" και παντι α- 
A ‘ aA (ey 4 , τι Ν > ε “ 
στοχοῦντι κατὰ τοῦ ἑτέρου μηδεὶς λαλείτω μηδὲ παρ ὑμῶν 
> , “ - ΄ Ys \ nN ae εκ ν ‘ > 
ἀκουτω ἕως οὗ μετανοήσῃ τὰξ δὲ eas «= ὑμῶν καὶ τὰς ἐλεη- 

΄ ‘ U ‘ ea " σ Ld ε » > ol 

μοσύνας καὶ πάσας τὰς πράξει: οὕτως ποιήσατε ws ἔχετε ἐν τῷ 
> , Lol , ες a a C4 4 “ “ ε (ee ε , ε ~ 
εὐαγγελίῳ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν: γρηγορεῖτε ὑπὲρ τῆς ζωῆς ὑμῶν: οἱ λύχνοι ὑμῶν 
μὴ σβεσθήτωσαν᾽" καὶ αἱ ὀσφύες ὑμῶν μὴ ἐκλυέσθωσαν᾽ ἀλλὰ 
’ a * » Ν ἴδ ‘ σ΄ > - ε ͵ ε ΄“ Ν 
γίνεσθε ἕτοιμο: οὐ γὰρ οἴδατε τὴν ὧραν ἐν ἣἧ ὁ κύριος ἡμῶν ἔρχεται" 
~ ‘ , A Ν 3 , a Lal ε -“ 
πυκνῶς δὲ συναχθήσεσθε ζητοῦντες τὰ ἀνήκοντα ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν' 
xiv. 1. 1. προεξομολογησάμενοι cum Harn. et Funk. 
ἡμῶν. ὑμῶν Bry. et edd. 
τὴν. 1. τινὰ cum Gebh. 


2. 
xv. 3. 1, ἑταίρου. 
ἀκουέσθω Funk, 


Fol. 80a 


Cod. κυ 


Cod. xi 


Cod. ks 


Cod. κῦ 


Cod. μὴ deis 
Cod. μὴ δὲ 


Cod. xi 
Cod. ἡμῶν 


Cod. ks 


Fol. 80 b 


Cod. 00 


Cod. avav 


Cod. ἀλήθείας 


Cod. ovva 


Cod. xs 


Cod. κν 


Cod. ovvou 


10 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 
> ἢ eee eae ee ΟΣ τὰ , > , ce aS ese 
οὐ yap ὠφελήσει ὑμᾶς ὃ πᾶς χρόνος τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν ἐὰν μὴ ἐν TO 
> , a ieee > \ a > ΄ clay 
ἐσχάτῳ καιρῷ τελειωθῆτε ἐν γὰρ ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις πλη- 
θυνθήσονται οἱ ψευδοπροφῆται καὶ οἱ φθορεῖς" ᾿ καὶ στρα- 
, νι , > , Se er ' ; τ 
φήσονται τὰ πρόβατα εἰς λύκου: καὶ ἡ ἀγάπη: στραφήσεται εἰς μῖσος" 
see \ Ξ τόκον , De Ἷ δ: 
αὐξανούσης γὰρ τῆς ἀνομίας, μισήσουσιν ἀλλήλους καὶ διωξου- 
‘ ‘} ‘ , ΄ ε AY τὶ 
σιν καὶ παραδώσουσι" καὶ τότε φανήσεται ὃ κοσμοπλανὴς ὡς 
ἐν Ξ , , ΠΩΣ \ , ΠΤ ΞΕΥΣ , ἢ 
υἱὸς θεοῦ. καὶ ποιήσει σημεῖα᾽' καὶ τέρατα' καὶ ἢ γῆ παραδοθήσεται εἰς 
τ ἘΞ \ , "22 ἃ ayy , BY. ἊΞ ; 
χεῖρας αὐτοῦ. καὶ ποίησει ἀθέμιτα ἃ οὐδέποτε γέγονεν ἐξ αἰῶνος." τό- 


Η͂ : ᾿ ᾿ , a , 
τε ἥξει ἡ κτίσις τῶν ἀνθρώπων εἰς τὴν πύρωσιν τῆς δοκιμασίας: καὶ σκαν- 


A 3 ἢ A d : ᾿ ᾿ 
δαλισθήσονται πολλοὶ καὶ ἀπολοῦνται οἱ δὲ ὑπομείναντες 
: Ξ ᾿ τς Or 08 Avs A θέ ᾿ ΣΕ ; 
ἐν τῇ πίστει αἰτῶν σωθήσονται ὑπ᾿ αὐτοῦ τοῦ καταθέματος καὶ τότε 
᾿ δ Ξ Ἔ ay tine mat Ξ : D 

φανήσεται τὰ σημεῖα τῆς ἀληθείας πρῶτον σημεῖον ἐκπετάσεως 
ἐ jpave’ t μεῖο φωνῆς σάλπιγγος: καὶ δ τρίτο ἱνά 
ἐν οὐρανῷ εἶτα σημεῖον ἢ ἰγγος α τὸ ρίτον ανά.- 


> 


A , Ae ENE coe pss | Se ao, ιν ᾿ 

στασις νεκρῶν' οὐ πάντων δέ ἀλλ᾽ ὡς ἐρρέθη" ἥξει ὁ κύριος καὶ πάντες 

= ¢ : ὭΣ ὦ ᾿" ε , δ 2 eek 

ot aylon μετ αὐτοῦ τότε ὄψεται ὁ κόσμος TOV κύριον ἐρχόμενον 
= = Pe 4 

ἐπάνω τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. 


4, κοσμοπλανὴς᾽ sic Cod. κοσμόπλανος Bry. 
5. ὑπ᾽. am Hilg., Zahn, Funk. 


Matt. xxiv. 
10, 12 


Apoe. xil. 9 


Matt. xxiv. 
24 


Matt. xxiv. 
10, 13 


Matt. xxiv. 
30 


Zech. xiv. 5 


Matt. xxiv. 
80, Xxvi. 64 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


COMMENTARY ON TEXT. 


THE only direct authority for the Greek text of the Teaching of the 
Apostles is the Jerusalem Codex. This is a book of 74 inches by 6, 
written, as a subscription in it testifies, in 1056 A.D. by the hand of Leo 
or Leon a notary: it contains the following treatises: 

a. Fol. 1—32b. The Synopsis of Holy Scripture of St John Chry- 
sostom: the variants from the current text as printed in Migne’s Patrologia, 
and an unedited fragment, are given by Bryennios in his edition of the 
Teaching, pp. ρθ΄---ρομδ΄. 

B. Fol. 33—51b. The epistle of Barnabas. The readings of the 
MS. have been used by Gebhardt and Harnack under the sign C and by 
Hilgenfeld as I. Corrections to Hilgenfeld’s text will be found in Bryennios, 
pp. ρδ΄---ρη΄. 

y. Fol. 51 b—70 and 70—76. The two epistles of Clement which 
were edited from this text by Bryennios in 1875. Corrections and additions 


will be found on pp. py’—pd’ and also in a Ilapaprnua at the close of 


Bryennios’ edition of the Teaching. 

ὃ. Fol. 76: a list of books of the Canonical Old Testament, derived 
apparently from an uncial Greek source, and this again from an Aramaic 
table: printed in Bryennios’ Teaching and given in facsimile in my Three 
Pages of the Bryennios MS. 

e. Fol. 76—80b. The Teaching of the Apostles, from which the 
text of the editio princeps and all succeeding editions is taken. 

s. Fol. 81—120. The Ignatian and semi-Ignatian epistles, thirteen 
in number; the text furnishes readings for Dr Lightfoot’s Ignatius. 

The two last pages of the book are occupied after the subscription by an 
explanation of our Lord’s genealogy. Part of this is also given in the 
Three Pages, and it is not necessary to describe it further in this place. 

A glance at the above list will shew how much has been gathered from 
the pages of the Jerusalem Codex. For our purpose there is no need to 
make any further reference to the other matter contained therein, beyond the 
Teaching of the Apostles. 


The Codex which was originally in the Library of the Greek Convent of 


the Holy Sepulchre at Constantinople is now removed to the head-quarters 
9__9 


Description of 
Jerusalem 
Codex. 


12 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


of that fraternity at Jerusalem, and nothing in its previous history calls for 
further mention here. 


Handwriting The Jerusalem Codex is not destitute of paleographic importance, in- 

couuselem asmuch as its text is full of tachygraphic signs, for many of which an 
early date is thus furnished. The transcription of the facsimile pages would 
furnish an excellent exercise to a beginner who wished to render himself 
familiar with the leading short-hand abbreviations of a Greek MS. We do 
not however spend time in drawing attention to them in detail, inasmuch as 
they have no authority beyond the custom of the time, and throw no light 
upon the original state of the document. It is a matter of no importance 
for the criticism of the Teaching whether the text shews an iota ascript or 
not; such a feature is of interest only to the paleographer who may wish 
to date the phenomenon. 

The text is carefully written; very few cases of apparent itacism present 
themselves in the Teaching: one of these occurs in xi. 4, where the scribe 
has given πειράσεται but corrected it himself by writing e over the line: 
but in fact it is not necessary to regard this as an itacism, for it may be 
only an eye error from the neighbourmg word ἀφεθήσεται. Another case is 
ἕξεται for ἕξετε, inc. 1. 3 and c. xii, 1: add δὲ for 67) in ο. 1. 6, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
περὶ τούτου δὲ εἴρηται, and perhaps we must with Hilgenfeld note the 
same error in ¢. xi. πᾶς δὴ ἀπόστολος where Cod. has δὲ. 

In 6. x. 2, where the text gives od ἡ δόξα, we may avoid the supposi- 
tion of itacism by reading with Harnack δυνατὸς εἶ ov: coi ἡ ξοξα. Confusion 
between ἡμεῖς and ὑμεῖς is frequent: also in such words as εἰδωλολατρεία, 
φαρμακεία, the MS. always writes εἰδωλολατρία, &c. It is probably to itacism 
that we must refer c. xi. 5 where in οὐ μενεῖ δὲ ἡμέραν μίαν the words εἰ 
μὴ must certainly be restored before the similar syllables of ἡμέραν. For 
ef. c, xil. οὐ μενεῖ δὲ πρὸς ὑμᾶς εἰ μὴ δύο ἢ τρεῖς ἡμέρας. 

Again, by comparing the two passages xiv. 2, πᾶς δὲ ἔχων τὴν ἀμφιβολίαν 
μετὰ τοῦ ἑταίρου αὐτοῦ, and xv. 3, παντὶ ἀστοχοῦντι κατὰ τοῦ ἑτέρου, it 15 
difficult to resist the conclusion that the ἑτέρου in the second passage has 
suffered from itacism. The same thing is true with regard to the first of 
the two passages which may almost with certainty be restored to ἔχων τινὰ 


ἀμφιβολίαν. 


Accuracy of This brings us to examine, which is indeed the first point for which 
Ss scholars will use our reproduction, the accuracy of the transcription made 
ennios. by Bryennios. The following are the only errors that I have noted: in ὁ. il. 
2 the MS. reads γενῶνται ex errore: in ΠῚ. 8 ὑψώσει σεαυτὸν for ὑψώσεις 
σεαυτόν: in xii. 3 and xiii. 1 Bryennios twice reads καθῆσαι, for which 
Hilgenfeld proposes καθίσαι. A reference to the facsimile, and a comparison 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 13 


with the forms δύνασαι, βαστάσαι in ¢. Vi. or ῥῦσαι in ὁ. viii, will shew that 
the tachygraphic abbreviation is not meant for the letters av; it can hardly 
then be anything but θαι, the @ being almost lost and only indicated by 
the loop in the writing. Compare ῥύσασθαι in f. 79a, 1. 7. Hence we 
read καθῆσθαι in both places; and ef. for the tense θέλει οὕτω ποιεῖν in 
ce. xii. 5. In ec. xiii. 2 the Cod. reads γενημάτων, which must be corrected 
as printed by Bryennios. In ec. xvi. 1 the MS. has ἡμῶν. In ec. xvi. 4 the 
MS. has certainly κοσμοπλανὴς, and however much we may regard the other 
form as more natural, this form is in any case to be retained’, 

It will be noticed that, as is common with MSS. of this age, such words 
as μὴδεὶς, μὴδὲ have a double accent, ἐστιν has its accent on the first syllable 
after a circumflex, &e., &e. 

We come now to the positive changes made by Bryennios in the text. 

Inc. 1. + he replaces σαρκικῶν καὶ σωματικῶν ἐπιθυμιῶν by cap. καὶ 
κοσμικῶν ἐπι. This he does on the ground that “fleshly and bodily lusts” is 
a tautology and that the seventh book of the Apostolical Constitutions in work- 
ing up the passage gives the word κοσμικῶν. It is not easy to decide whether 
‘this change is necessary, but I am inclined to think that Bryennios is right. 

In i. 6 we have the crucial passage ἱδρωτάτω κτέ. which B. changes to 
ispwcatw. Of this more anon. 

In iy. 2 he corrects ἐπαναπαῇς of the Cod. to ἐπαναπαύῃ in which he 
is certainly wrong, the form given in the MS. being closely paralleled in 
Hermas and elsewhere, and even in the N. Τὶ 

In x. 4 he corrects ὡσαννὰ τῷ θεῷ δαβίδ into ὡσαννὰ τῷ vid δαβίδ; 
wrongly as I think, the change being probably intentional on the part of 
the writer of the Teaching, and an early Christian gloss on the words “If 
David call him Lord, how is he his Son?” At any rate the text should 
stand provisionally as in the MS. 

These are the principal changes introduced by Bryennios. 


This brings us to the question of conjectural emendations at large. 
It is well known that a number of suggestions have been made for the im- 
provement of the text of the Teaching. One or two trifling corrections have 
been already noted which are hardly more than the removal of clerical errors ; 
but there are others which are of a different character and involve serious 
alterations. Let us take for example Hilgenfeld’s edition; in 1, 6 he proposes 
to read ἱδρυσάτω for ἱδρωτάτω of the Codex; it must be admitted that this 
is almost as unintelligible as the Codex itself. 

Then in 11. 7 he proposes to add after ods μὲν ἐλέγξεις from the correspond- 
ing passage in the Apostolical Canons the words ovs δὲ ἐλεήσεις. Here there 


1 Sophocles in his Lexicon notes a similar variation of λαοπλανὴς for λαύπλανος in Ecclesiastical 
writers, but I have not been able to verify the statement. 


Conjectural 

emendations 
to the text of 
the Teaching. 


Secondary 
authorities 
for the text of 
the Teaching. 


14 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


is some reason for the introduction, since the similarity of the expressions 
leaves us no choice between an omission by homeoteleuton on the part of 
the MS. and a corruption with subsequent conflation on the part of the 
ancestors of our text of the Canons. If we adopt the latter alternative, it is 
still an open question whether ἐλεήσεις should not be replaced for ἐλέγξεις. 
But then since ἐλέγχετε ἀλλήλους Occurs in 6. xv. 2, we ought to regard 
ἐλέγξεις as at least a part of the genuine reading, and in fact we shall shew 
from a reference to Jude 22, 23 that the text must contain both elements. 

Another very curious emendation of Hilgenfeld’s is to read μυῶν for ποιῶν 
in the difficult passage xi. 11 ποιῶν εἰς μυστήριον κοσμικὸν ἐκκλησίας. This is 
based upon the fact that ~ and 7 are interchangeable in uncial script and that 
οἱ and y are itacistic variants. This is ingenious but it adds nothing to the 
interpretation, nor was anything necessary, as the whole passage is perfectly 
clear in the light of the explanation given by Dr Taylor. 

Finally Hilgenfeld proposes to read in xvi. 5 (for τότε ἥξει ἡ κτίσις τῶν 
ἀνθρώπων εἰς τὴν πύρωσιν τῆς δοκιμασίας) τότε ἥξει ἡ κρίσις KTE. 

Neither does this seem to be happy: it must be admitted that the passage 
is harsh as it stands; perhaps it would be better to read mictic for κτίσις. 
This would agree well with what follows, of δὲ ὑπομείναντες ἐν τῇ πίστει, 
and would not be without corroboration from the passages 1 Pet. 1. 7, 
τὸ δοκίμιον ὑμῶν τῆς πίστεως... διὰ πυρὸς δὲ δοκιμαζομένου and 1 Pet. 
iv. 12, τῇ πυρώσει πρὸς πειρασμὸν ὑμῖν γινομένῃ. But perhaps it is safer 
for the present to let the MS. have its own way’. And indeed it must 
be admitted that with slight exceptions the attempts to emend the text 
have not been very successful. The most difficult passages have yielded 
to interpretative skill, where they have failed under other treatment, and 
this should assure us that any alterations in the text must not be more than 
moderate if they are to be in any degree acceptable. 

We note that Harnack in his latest tract on the Teaching’ says on this 
point that there are only three passages in which the suspicion of a funda- 
mental error in the text finds any support, viz. L 6 (ἱδοωτάτω ἡ ἐλεημοσύνη), 
xi. 11 (ποιῶν εἰς μυστήριον κοσμικὸν ἐκκλησίας), XVI. 5 (ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ KaTa- 
θέματος). These passages we shall presently discuss at length, and shall shew 
that in two of them the text is almost certainly right as it stands, while in the 
third it is so nearly right that it is difficult to tell where to begin to correct it. 


The determination of the text of the Teaching of the Apostles, as well 
as its place in the history of Christian literature, depends largely upon a 


1 Especially since κτίσις -- ΓΝ ἽἼΖ, which Hebrew term is used freely for men. Thus Lightfoot, 
Hor. Heb., notes from Talm. Kethuv f. 17 a, ‘The wise men say, Let the mind of man be 
always mingled with the creatures.’ The gloss there is “To do with every man according 
to complacency.” Cf. Matt. xxviii. ad fin. 

2 Die Apostellehre und die Jiidischen beiden Wege, p. 6. Leipzig, 1886. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 15 


comparative study of the Teaching itself and other documents which have 
much in common with it. When we determine the text of a passage in the 
New Testament, we are obliged to resort to the combined evidence of such 
‘copies and versions as contain the passage and such fathers as quote it. A 
similar process being applied in the present case we find that our copies reduce 
to unity, while our versions amount to no more than a fragment of Latin’, 
and the burden of corroborative testimony is thus thrown on the testimony 
of the patristic literature, which has the advantage in the present case of 
being peculiarly early and rich. From these quotations we shall derive a 
very clear idea of the geographical distribution of the Teaching and of 
the period of time during which it continued in use in the Church. 

The following table contains a conspectus of the authorities referred to: 


a. Jerusalem Codex. 

8. Fragment of Latin Version. 

Epistle of Barnabas. 

The Ecclesiastical Canons, 

=the Epitome of Catholic Tradition, 

=the Two Ways, or the Judgment of Peter. 


These three works [γ- 
are all restate- 
ments of a primi- 
tive Teaching. 


| e. The seventh book of the Apostolical Constitutions. 
Z” ¢. The Ascension of Isaiah. 
2 ¢€. The Epistle of Jude. 
2 y. The author of the second Clementine epistle. 
2.6. Justin Martyr. 
. Hermas. 
2 wa. Theophilus of Antioch. 
ιβ. Clement of Alexandria. 
2 oy. Tertullian. 
v6. Dionysius of Alexandria. 
te. The Sibylline books and Ps.-Phocylides. 
@ «ws. Origen. ἢ Dif, γος Broa amp gw. sist 


.€ The Apostolical Constitutions. 
7 om. Ps.-Ign, ad Antioch. 

ιθ. Athanasius and Ps.-Athanasius. 

«.  Lactantius. 

κα. Ps.-Cyprian. 

«8. Dorotheus of Palestine. 

xy. The Clementine Homilies. 

«5. Joannes Climacus. 

xe. A corrector of the Sinaitie Codex. 

«s. Severinus of Cologne. 

«¢. Boniface of Mainz. 


1 It is, however, probable that the Teaching existed both in Syriae and in Coptic. 


The Latin 
Vragmeut. 


16 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Other writers will be given who recognize the existence of the book: 
those to whom reference is made actually quote it or shew traces of acquaint- 
ance with it. We shall now give these authorities in detail. 


A Latin fragment. 


We owe our knowledge of this fragment to Prof. von Gebhardt. He 
noticed in Martin Kropft’s Bibliotheca Mellicensis published at Vienna in 
1747, and containing an account of the cloister-library of Mélk in Austria, 
a description of a parchment codex of at least the tenth century containing 
a lectionary of patristic extracts followed by a treatise of Boniface De Abre- 
nuntiatione in baptismate. After which Kropff goes on as follows: “pag. 
ultima habetur Doctrina Apostolorum, sed manca. Inc. Viae duae sunt in 
saeculo, vitae et mortis, lucis et tenebrarum, ete.” Here was evidently a 
portion of a Latin translation of the Teaching. Kropff gave the class- 
mark of the book as Q. 52, but enquiry made from the librarian at Mélk 
brought a correction to this, making it R. 52, and also the unpleasant news 
that the MS. had disappeared from the library’, No further trace of it could 
be found at the time of the production of the Gebhardt-Harnack edition of 
the Teaching. Foiled in this direction, Gebhardt turned to the printed 
editions of Boniface and ascertained that the sermon of Boniface to which 
allusion was made above was supplied to Martene the editor of Boniface from 
this very manuscript by Bernhard Pez, who was formerly librarian of the abbey 
of Mélk. A reference to the fourth volume of the Thesaurus Anecdotorum® 
of Pez disclosed the precious fragment of the Teaching already in print. 
The following is the transcription of Pez, to which we add such corrections 
as result from Funk’s examination of the MS. which has since been found 
by the librarian at Molk :— 

“Tum in Codice post perbrevia quaedam §. Augustini dicta comparet 
Doctrina Apostolorum, eadem, qua sermo ὃ. Bonifacii, manu exarata, quae 
sic habet. 

Doctrina Apostolorum. 

Viae duae sunt in seculo, vitae et mortis, lucis et tenebrarum. 

In his constituti sunt Angeli duo, unus aequitatis, alter iniquitatis. 

Distantia autem magna est duarum viarum. Via ergo vitae haec est: 
Primo diliges Deum aeternum, qui te fecit. Secundo proximum tuum, ut 
te ipsum. Omne autem, quod tibi non vis fieri, alii ne feceris. 

Interpretatio autem horum verborum haee est: non moechaberis, non 
homicidium facies, non falsum testimonium dices, non puerum violaveris, non 


1 Funk says “‘numero 914, olim Q 52 signatus.” 
3 Tom. iv. pars ii. col, 5. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 17 


fornicaveris, non malefacies', non medicamenta mala facies; non occides 
filium in abortum, nec natum succides. Non concupisces quidquam de re 
proximi tui. Non perjurabis. Non male loqueris. Non eris memor malorum 
factorum. Non eris duplex in consilium dandum, neque bilinguis: tendi- 
culum enim mortis est lingua. Non erit verbum tuum vacuum nee mendax. 
Non eris cupidus nec avarus, nee rapax, nec adolator*® nec’...... (caetera in 
Codice desiderantur).” 

The importance of this fragment will be evident if we consider the varia- 
tions of its text from the Teaching and from other authorities which present 
the doctrine of the Two Ways. The principal feature is the omission of the 
whole of the portion of the Teaching from i. 3 (εὐλογεῖτε) to 1]. 1 (τῆς διδαχῆς). 
That is to say it omits the portion of the first chapter which contains the 
most pronounced Christian sentiments and passes on in perfect sequence to 
those sentiments which are nearest to the Decalogue. This is very striking, 
and it is no wonder that the suspicion has arisen in many minds that the 
Teaching of the Apostles is in part a Jewish document which has been 
rehandled by early Christians. Another peculiarity is the expansion of the 
opening sentences; the two ways are described as ways of Life and Death, 
of Light and Darkness. And over the two ways there preside two angels, 
one of righteousness the other of iniquity. We shall presently see something 
similar to this in the quotations made by Barnabas: for he substitutes 
Light and Darkness for Life and Death, and affirms that over one way pre- 
side illuminating angels of God, and over the other angels of Satan. While 
there is no reason to suppose any direct connexion between the Latin version 
and the text of Barnabas, there is enough similarity of expression to make 
it likely that the original doctrine of the Two Ways was current in forms 
more or less glossed and that Barnabas and the Latin Version have some 
such glossed edition in common. It breaks the sequence, however, of our 
Διδαχή if we insert any angelology before the words “and there is a great 
difference between the two ways.” 


The Epistle of Barnabas. 


We come now to the passages from the Teaching which are worked up 
in the Epistle of Barnabas. No subject was on the publication of Bryennios’ 
treatise more debated than the question of the relative priority of the Teaching 
and of Barnabas. And no doubt there was something to be said in favour 
of the opinion ‘that the Teaching was in part a rechauffé of the last four 


1 For these two words Pez left a blank, evidently not knowing what to make of the non 
maofacies of the Codex which appears to correspond to οὐ μαγεύσεις of the Greek. 
2 Pez: adulator. 
3 The last word in copy illegible. 
H. 3 


Barnabas and 
the Teaching. 


18 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


chapters of Barnabas, so long as an exaggerated idea of the antiquity of 
the epistle prevailed and an inadequate idea of the antiquity of the Teaching. 
This ground is now almost entirely abandoned and we have instead a theory 
of a primitive Jewish doctrine of the Two Ways which serves as a base for 
both the Teaching and Barnabas and all succeeding developments. Whether 
such a primitive form existed or not (and I have already expressed myself in 
the tract The Teaching of the Apostles and the Sibylline Books* in favour of 
such an opinion), I am none the less satisfied that the coincidences between 
Barnabas and the Teaching are not confined to the material which such a 
primitive book would furnish. It must have been a longer work. The 
quotations that follow will make this sufficiently clear. 

Barn. ο. iv. 5. Πάντας ἀγὰπῶν ὑπὲρ THN yyyYHN Moy. 

An exaggeration of Barnabas for Aud. i. 7, ods δὲ ἀγαπήσεις ὑπὲρ τὴν 
ψυχήν σου. 

iv. 9. Διὸ προσέχωμεν ἐν ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις. οὐλὲν γὰρ ὠφελήσει ὑμᾶς 
6 πᾶς χρόνος τῆς ζωῆς ὑμῶν καὶ τῆς πίοτεως, ἐὰν μὴ ἐν τῷ ἀνόμῳ καίρῳ... 
ἀντιστῶμεν. 

Cf. Διῶ.. xvi. 2. 

iv. 10. Μὴ καθ᾽ ἑαυτοὺς ἐνδύνοντες μονάξζετε ὡς ἤδη δεδικαιωμένοι, ἀλλ᾽ 
ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ συνερχόμενοι συζητεῖτε περὶ τοῦ κοινῇ συμφέροντος. 

Cf. Διδ, xvi. 2, πυκνῶς δὲ συναχθήσεσθε, ζητοῦντες τὰ ἀνήκοντα ταῖς ψυχαῖς 
ὑμῶν. 

v. 4. Τοῦτο λέγει ὅτι δικαίως ἀπολεῖται ἄνθρωπος, ὃς ἔχων ὁλοΥ͂ Δικδιο- 
CYNHC γνῶσιν ἑαυτὸν εἰς OAON CKOTOYC ἀποσυνέχει. 

Here Barnabas introduces a new definition of the Two Ways: the Way 
of Righteousness and of Unrighteousness (which is the description that we 
found in the Latin fragment); while he also has the old one (the Way of 
Light and the Way of Darkness) in his mind. 

vi. 15. Nads γὰρ ἅγιος, ἀδελφοί μου, τῷ κυρίῳ TO κατοικητήριον ἡμῶν 
τῆς καρδίας. Cf. Ard. x. 2. 

xi 11. Ἴδε πῶς Δαυὶδ λέγει αὐτὸν κύριον, καὶ υἱὸν οὐ λέγει. Cf. Διδ. 
τ Ὁ. 

xvi. 1. Note the expression τὸν θεὸν αὐτῶν τὸν TOIHCANTA αὐτούς, and 
cf. ΑΝ 1. 1 and y. 2. 

xvi. 9. Observe the expression δὶ éntoAal τῆς AidayAc, and οἵ Avéd. 1. 1. 


The foregoing coincidences are sufficient taken cumulatively and shew an 
acquaintance with the Teaching which is not limited to the first five chapters. 
We come now to those chapters of the Epistle which especially deal with 


the Two Ways (a few rejected readings of the Simaitic Codex are noted 
in the margin). 


1 Cambridge, Wallis, 1886. 


“τον: εν .--- 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 19 


xviii, Μεταβῶμεν δὲ καὶ ἐπὶ ἑτέραν γνῶσιν καὶ διδαχήν. ὁδοὶ Ayo eici 
διδαχῆς καὶ ἐξουσίας" ἥ τε τοῦ φῶτος καὶ ἡ τοῦ σκότους. διαφορὰ δὲ πολλὴ 
τῶν AYO ὁλῶν: ἐφ᾽ ἧς μὲν γάρ εἰσι τεταγμένοι φωταγωγοὶ ἄγγελοι τοῦ θεοῦ, 
ἐφ᾽ ἧς δὲ ἄγγελοι τοῦ σατανᾶ. καὶ ὁ μέν ἐστι κύριὸς ἀπ᾽ αἰωνῶν καὶ εἰς 
τοὺς αἰῶνας, 6 δὲ ἄρχων καιροῦ τοῦ νῦν τῆς ἀνομίας. 

xix. Ἢ οὗν ὁλὸς τοῦ φωτός EcTIN αὕτη" ἐάν Tis θέλων ὁδὸν ὁδεύειν ἐπὶ 
τὸν ὡρισμένον τόπον σπεύσῃ τοῖς ἔργοις αὐτοῦ" ἔστιν οὖν ἡ δοθεῖσα ἡμῖν γνῶσις 
τοῦ περιπατεῖν ἐν αὐτῇ τοιαύτη: ᾿ΑΓὰπήσεις TON Ce TOIHCANTA, φοβηθήσῃ τόν 
σε πλάσαντα, δοξάσεις τόν σε λυτρωσάμενον ex θανάτου. ἔσῃ ἁπλοῦς τῇ 
καρδίᾳ καὶ πλούσιος τῷ πνεύματι, OY KOAAHOHCH μετὰ τῶν πορευομένων 
EN ὁδῷ θλνᾶτου. μιοήςεις TAN ὃ οὐκ ECTIN ἀρεοτὸν τῷ θεῷ, MICHCEIC πᾶσαν 
ὑπόκρισιν OY μὴ ἐγκἀάτάλίπης ἐντολὰς κυρίου. ΟΥ̓Χ ὑψώσεις ςελγτόν, ἔσῃ δὲ 
ταπεινόφρων κατὰ πάντα. οὐκ ἀρεῖς ἐπὶ σεαυτὸν δόξαν. οΥ̓́λήψη Βογλὴν 
πονηρὰν KATA τοῦ πλησίον Coy. Oy δώσεις TH ΨΥΧΗ͂ Coy θράςος᾽ oY πορνεΐζτεις, 
OY Μοιχεήςειο, OY πἀιδοφθορήςειο. οὐ μή σου ὁ λόγος τοῦ θεοῦ ἐξέλθῃ ἐν 
ἀκαθαρσίᾳ τινῶν. oy λήψῃ πρόσωπον ἐλέγξαι τινὰ ἐπὶ πὰράπτώμλατι. ἔσῃ 
Tpayc, ἔσῃ Heyyioc, ἔσῃ τρέμων τοὺς λύγογο, OYC HKOYCAC. OY MNHCIKAKHCEIC 
τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου. oY AlyyyHceic, πότερον EcTal H OY. οὐ μὴ λάβῃς ἐπὶ ματαίῳ 
τὸ ὄνομα κυρίου. ἀγὰπήτςεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὑπὲρ τὴν YYYHN COY. OY oney- 
CEIC τέκνον COY ἐν φθορά OYAE πάλιν γεννηθὲν ἀποκτενεῖο. OY MH APHC THN 
χεῖρά coy ἀπὸ TOY yloY coy ἢ ἀπὸ τῆς Oyratpdc coy, ἀλλὰ ἀπὸ THC NEOTHTOC 
διδάξεις φόβον Kyploy. OY μὴ γένῃ ἐπιθγμῶν TA TOY πλησίον coy, OY μὴ γένῃ 
πλεονέκτης, οὐδὲ KOAAHOHCH ἐκ Ψυχῆς οοὺ μετὰ ὑψηλῶν, ἀλλὰ μετὰ τἀπεινῶν 
κἀὶ δικδίων ANACTPAPHCH. τὰ CYMBAINONTA col ἐνεργηματὰ ὡς ἀγαθὰ προσδέξηῃ, 
εἰλὼς ὅτι ἄνευ θεοῦ OYAEN γίνεται. οὐκ ECH διγνώμων οὐδὲ AirA@ccoc. παγὶς 
γὰρ θἀνᾶτου ἐστὶν H διγλωςοίδ. Υὑποτάγήοῃ κυρίοις ὧς τύπῳ θεοῦ ἐν AicyyNH 
KAl φόβῳ. OY MH ἐπιτάξης AOYAW COY H TIAIAICKH ἐν πικρία τοῖς ἐπὶ τὸν δὐτὸν 
θεὸν ἐλπίζογει, μήποτε OY φοβηθῶοι τὸν ἐπ᾽ ἀμφοτέροις θεόν. ὅτι οὐκ εἶλθεν 
KATA πρόοωπον KAAECAI, ἀλλ᾽ ἐφ᾽ OYC τὸ TINEYMA HTOIMACEN. KOING@)NHCEIC ἐν 
Tact τῷ πλησίον σου καὶ οὐκ ἐρεῖς TAA EINAL εἰ γὰρ EN τῷ ἀφθάρτῳ κοινωνοί 
ἔστε, πόσῳ μᾶλλον ἐν τοῖς φθαρτοῖς. οὐκ ἔσῃ πρόγλωσσος" παγὶς γὰρ στόμα 
θανάτου. ὅσον δύνασαι ὑπὲρ τῆς ψυχῆς σου ἁγνεύσεις. μὴ ΓίνοΥ πρὸς μὲν 
τὸ AABEIN ἐκτείνων τὰς χεῖρδλο, πρός δὲ τὸ AOFNAI CYCTON. ἀγαπήσεις ὡς κόρην 
τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ σου πάντα TON AdAO{NTA coi τὸν λύγον TOY KyploY. MNHCOHCH 
ἡμέραν κρίσεως ἡμέρας κἀὶ NYKTOC, καὶ EKZHTHCEIC καθ᾽ ἑκάστην HMEPAN τὰ 
TPUCWITA τῶν ἁγίων ἢ διὰ λόγου κοπιῶν καὶ πορευόμενος εἰς τὸ παρακαλέσαι 
καὶ μελετῶν εἰς τὸ σῶσαι ψυχὴν τῷ λόγῳ, ἢ AIA τῶν χειρῶν σου ἐργάσῃ 
εἰς λύτρωοιν AMAPTION COY. οὐ AICTACEIC ΔΟΥ͂ΝΔΙ, οὐδὲ διδοὺς rorryceic. γνώςῃ 
λέ, TIC ὁ τοῦ MICBOY καλὸς ἀντάποδότηο. φυλάξεις A TApEAABEC, MHTE προοτιθεὶς 
μήτε ἀφδιρῶν. εἰς τέλος MICHCEIC τὸ πονηρόν. κρινεῖς δικδίως. OY ποιήςεις 
CXICMA’ εἰρηνεύεις δὲ MAYOMENOYC συναγαγών. ἐξομολογήοη ἐπὶ AMAPTIAIC δου. 

1 Cf. Teaching 6, vi. 1 τῆς ὁδοῦ τῆς διδαχῆς. 
3—2 


δὲ deov 


δὲ γλωσσώδης 
δὲ om. παγις... 
διγλωσσια 


N τὸ στόμα 


δὲ νυκτὸς καὶ 


ἡμέρας 


δὲ λύτρον 


Nom. τὸ 


δὲ ψεύδη 


30 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


OY TpocHZelc ἐπὶ προσευχὴν ἐν CYNEIAHCEl πονηρᾷ, δὕτη ἐοτὶν H ὅλος τοῦ 
φωτός. 

xx. Ἢ δὲ τοῦ μέλανος ὁλὺὸς σκολιά ἐστι KAI KATAPAC MECTH. ὁδὸς γάρ 
ἐστι θανάτου αἰωνίου μετὰ τιμωρίας, ἐν ἡ ἐστὶ τὰ ἀπολλύντα τὴν ψυχὴν 
αὐτῶν. εἰδλωλολάτρεία, OPACYTHC, ὕψος δυνάμεως, ὑπόκριειο, AITTAOKAPAIA, Μοιχείδ, 
φόνος, APTIATH, YTEPHDANiA, παράβασις, δόλος, KAKid, AYOAAEIA, PAPMAKEIA, μδγείδ, 
πλεονεξία, ἀφοβία θεοῦ. διῶκται τῶν ἀγαθῶν, MICOYNTEC AAHBEIAN, APATINTEC 
ψεῦδος, OY Γινώοσκοντεο MICOON AIKAIOCYNHC, οὐ κολλώμενοι ἀγαθῷ, οὐ κρίσει 
λικδίὰ, χηρᾷ καὶ ὀρφανῷ οὐ προσέχοντες, ArpyTINOYNTEC OYK εἰς φόβον θεοῦ, 
ἀλλ ἐπὶ τὸ πονηρόν, ὧν MAKPAN καὶ πόρρω πρδΐτης Kal ὑπομονή, ἀγὰπῶντες 
MATAIA, διώκοντεο ANTATIOAOMA, οὐκ ἐλεοῦντες πτωχόν, OY πονοΐντεο ἐπὶ κἀτὰ- 
πονογμένῳ, εὐχερεῖς ἐν καταλαλίᾳ, OY γινώσκοντες τὸν TIOIHCANTA AaYTOYC, 
ONEIC τεκνῶν, φθορεῖς πλάσματος θεοῦ, ἀποοτρεφόμενοι τὸν ἐνδεόμενον, KATA- 
TIONOYNTEC τὸν θλιβόμενον, πλογοίων πάρἄκλητοι, πενήτων ἄνομοι κριταί, TIANOA- 
MAPTHTOI, 

xxi. Καλὸν οὖν ἐστὶ μαθόντα τὰ δικαιώματα τοῦ κυρίου, ὅσα γέγραπται, 
ἐνὶ ἐπτούποιϊςτὐπερίητα ΠΕΣ Σεῖς τε - ἀδον elvsteidtzsicln ae teltejeliesre dele ἐπ αἰ ἘΣ esos ἐν ΠΡ 
εἰ δέ τις ἐστιν ἀγαθοῦ μνεία, μνημονεύετέ μου, μελετῶντες ταῦτα, ἵνα καὶ 
ἡ ἐπιθυμία καὶ ἡ ArpyTINia εἴς τι ἄγαθὸν χωρήσῃ. 


The study of the discordances between these extracts and the Teaching 
is very interesting. For instance in 6. xx. Barnabas has altered the Teaching 
from ἀγρυπνοῦντες οὐκ ἐπὶ TO ἀγαθὸν to ayp. οὐκ eis φόβον θεοῦ, but in 
the closing words of the epistle he shews his acquaintance with the other 
form by desiring that the care of his hearers for him may be ἀγρυπνία 
els TL ἀγαθόν. 

He shews his acquaintance with the form ὁδὸς θανάτου by inserting it 
in the beginning of 6. xx. as an explanation of the black way. 

In c. xix. the act of memory (“thou shalt remember day and night”) is 
transferred from the teacher who speaks the word to the day of judgment, 
and that the change is due to Barnabas is clear from the fact that the 
Hebraistic term “night and day” has been replaced by “day and night.” 

The curious injunction as to clean and unclean meats in the Teaching, 
c. vi. 8, περὶ δὲ τῆς βρώσεως ὃ δύνασαι βάστασον, was out of harmony with 
Barnabas’ ideas, for he interprets the abstinence from pork and hare symbolically 
and hence we find the sentence changed to ὅσον δύνασαι ὑπὲρ τῆς ψυχῆς 
σου ὡγνεύσεις. 

Probably these brief notes are sufficient to shew the acquaintance of 
Barnabas with a Διδαχή very little different from our own, which he seems 
to quote from memory. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 21 


Apostolical Canons. 


We come in the next place to the so-called Apostolic or Ecclesiastical 
Canons, a tract of great importance in the problems connected with the 
Teaching. It was edited by J, W. Bickell in 1843 from a Vienna MS! under 
the title Αἱ Ssatayal ai διὰ Κλήμεντος καὶ κανόνες ἐκκλησαστικοὶ τῶν 
ἁγίων ἀποστόλων. 

Cardinal Pitra repeated the text in his Juris eccl. Gr. Monumenta, using 
also a MS. in the Ottobonian library? which bears the title ᾿πιτομὴ ὅρων 
τῶν ἁγίων ἀποστόλων καθολικῆς παραδόσεως, Whence the book sometimes 
passes under the name of the Epitome. A third Codex* from the library 
of the Holy Synod at Moscow was employed by von Gebhardt with the 
title ἐκ τῶν διατάξεων τῶν ἁγίων ἀποστόλων. It exists also in Syriac, 
Coptic, Thebaic and Ethiopic’, This is the book which Hilgenfeld with 
some reason identifies with the lost book mentioned by Rufinus under the 
title Duae Viae vel Judicium Petri, the latter part of the title being derived 
by analogy from the story of the Judgment of Hercules in Xenophon. The 
order of this book is as follows: it opens with a salutation from the twelve 
apostles, among whom Peter appears twice, once as Peter and once as Cephas; 
the second James is wanting as also Matthias, and Nathanael is added to 
make up the number. The Apostles speak in turn, John being the prologizer ; 


and their successive speeches are the fragments of the first six chapters of 


the Teaching of the Apostles, the very same omission being made from e. 1. 3 
to 1. 1 which we noted in Barnabas and in the Latin Version. The Vienna 
MS. has an additional portion evidently of later date which contains regulations 
for the ordination of bishops, presbyters, readers ὅσο. 

It will save time and prevent confusion of ideas, if we demonstrate at 


once the dependence of the first portion of these Canons upon the text of 


Barnabas. 

First of all the preface is taken directly with a slight change from the 
epistle: χαίρετε, viol καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 

Second, he follows Barnabas in one of his most adventurous emendations 
(viz. that in which he substitutes ὡς κόρην ὀφθαλμοῦ σου for ὡς κύριον) 
but conflates it with the original reading. 

Further, the first portion of the Canons closes with words which are 
taken from Barnabas, as the following extracts will shew: 


Canon. Eccl. xiv. μὴ ἐκλείπητε ἐν μηδενί, ἐξουσίαν ἐὰν ἔχητε. erryc yap 
H ἡμέρὰ κυρίου ἐν ιἷ CYNATIOAEITAL πᾶντὰ CYN τῷ πονηρῷ. ἥξει γὰρ ὁ κύριος 
KAl ὁ μιοθὺς AYTOY μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ. ἑλγτῶν γίνεοθε NOMOODETAI, ἑλγτῶν γίνεοθε CYMBOYAOI 
ἄγδθοι, θεοδίδακτοι. 


1 Cod. Vind. 45. 3 §. Synodi 125 Cod. gr. 
* Cod. Ottobon. 408. 4 See Lagarde, Reliq. jur. eccl. 


Keclesiastical 
Canons. 


Cf. Barnab. 
Hi aks 


bo 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


bo 


Barnab. xxi. ἔχετε μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν εἰς οὺς ἐργάζεσθε τὸ Kadov’ μὴ ἐλλίπητε᾽ 
ἐγγὺς ἡ ἡμέρα, ἐν H ογνάπολεῖται τὰ πᾶντὰ τῷ πονηρῷ. ἐγγὺς ὁ κύριος καὶ 
6 μιοθὸς aytoy. ἔτη καὶ ἔτει ἐρωτῶ ὑμᾶς: ἕδλγτῶν γίνεοθε νομοθέτδι ἀγάθοι, 
ἑλγτῶν μένετε οὐμβουλοι πίιοτοί...γίνεοθε θεοδιίδάκτοι. , 


Observe also the expression in the Canons, xii. 2, τιμήσεις αὐτὸν ἐκ τοῦ 
Ἱλρῶτός Gov κἀὶ ἐκ TOD πόνου τῶν χειρῶν σου and cf. Barnab. x. οὐ μή; 
“ (4 » \ c , ’ ͵ , “ 3, ΕΣ 
φησί, κολληθήσῃ οὐδὲ ὁμοιωθήσῃ ἀνθρώποις τοιούτοις, οἵτινες οὐκ οἴδασι 

διὰ κόπογ KAI ἱδρῶτος πορίζειν ἑαυτοῖς τὴν τροφήν. 


He seems to have been aware of the curious passage in Barnabas 
μνησθήσῃ ἡμέραν κρίσεως ἡμέρας Kal νυκτός, since he furnishes the key to 
the change made by Barnabas from remembering the teacher to remembering 
the judgment, in the words λόγον ὑφέξουσιν ἐν τῇ μεγάλῃ ἡμέρᾳ τῆς 
κρίσεως περὶ ὧν ἀκούσαντες οὐκ ἐφύλαξαν (Canon. 1.). We are to remember 
day and night what has been taught us because the day of judgment 
comes. 

Notice further, that, although it may be taken for granted from the 
previous instances that the Canons depend on Barnabas, yet here also an 
acquaintance is shewn with the Teaching outside the limits of the epistle; 
for we find the following expression, εἰ yap ὁ κύριος δι’ αὐτοῦ ἠξίωσέ σοι 
δοθῆναι πνευματικὴν τροφὴν καὶ ποτὸν καὶ ζωὴν αἰώνιον, σὺ ὀφείλεις πολὺ 
μᾶλλον τὴν φθαρτὴν καὶ πρόσκαιρον προσφέρειν τροφήν. 

The writer of this must have been aware of the following sentences of 
the Teaching, 

Aw. x. 3. ἡμῖν δὲ ἐχαρίσω πνευματικὴν τροφὴν καὶ ποτὸν καὶ ζωὴν 
αἰώνιον διὰ τοῦ παιδός σου (only the παῖς is now, not Jesus Christ, but 
some Church teacher). 

Ais. iv. 8. εἰ yap ἐν τῷ ἀθανάτῳ κοινωνοί ἐστε, ποσῷ μᾶλλον ἐν τοῖς 
θνητοῖς. 

There is also a trace of the “cosmic mystery of the church” (Avé. xi. 11) 
in the words of Canon ¢. 1. πρὸς θεμελίωσιν ἐκκλησίας ἵνα τύπον τῶν 
ἐπουρανίων εἰδότες φυλάσσωνται κτέ. 

Any argument therefore which is based upon the supposed restriction of 
the sources of the Ecclesiastical Canons to the first five chapters of the 
Teaching, or which assumes their independence of Barnabas in matters 
where they agree, falls to the ground. 

The following is the text of that portion of the Canons which runs 
parallel with the Teaching :— 


Al AlATArAl Al διὰ KAHMENTOC KAI KANONEC €KKAHCIACTIKO! τῶν API@N ATTOCTOAWN. 
1. Χαίρετε, υἱοὶ καὶ θυγατέρες, ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ. 


\ 


᾿Ιωάννης καὶ Ματθαῖος καὶ Πέτρος καὶ ᾿Ανδρέας καὶ Φίλιππος καὶ Σίμων 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 23 


καὶ ᾿Ιάκωβος καὶ Ναθαναὴλ καὶ Θωμᾶς καὶ Κηφᾶς καὶ Βαρθολομαῖος καὶ 
Ἰούδας ᾿Ιακώβου. 

Κατὰ κέλευσιν τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος συναθροι- 
᾿ σθέντων ἡμῶν, καθὼς διέταξε πρὸ τοῦ Μέλλετε κληροῦσθαι τὰς ἐπαρχίας, 
καταλογίσασθαι τόπων ἀριθμούς, ἐπισκόπων ἀξίας, πρεσβυτέρων ἕδρας, 
διακόνων παρεδρείας, ἀναγνωστῶν νουνεχίας, χηρῶν ἀνεγκλησίας, καὶ ὅσα 
δέοι πρὸς θεμελίωσιν ἐκκλησίας ἵνα τύπον τῶν ἐπουρανίων εἰδότες φυλάσ- 
σωνται ἀπὸ παντὸς ἀστοχήματος, εἰδότες, ὅτε λόγον ὑφέξουσιν ἐν τῇ μεγάλῃ 
ἡμέρᾳ τῆς κρίσεως περὶ ὧν ἀκούσαντες οὐκ ἐφύλαξαν καὶ ἐκέλευσεν ἡμᾶς 
ἐκπέμψασθαι τοὺς λόγους εἰς ὅχην τὴν οἰκουμένην. 

2. ᾿Εδοξεν οὖν ἡμῖν πρὸς ὑπόμνησιν τῆς ἀδελφότητος καὶ νουθεσίαν 
ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ κύριος ἀπεκάλυψε κατὰ τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ διὰ πνεύματος 
ἁγίου μνησθεῖσι λόγου ἐντείλασθαι ὑμῖν. 

᾿Ιωάννης εἶπεν "Ανδρες ἀδελφοί, εἰδότες ὅτε λόγον ὑφέξομεν περὶ τῶν 
διατεταγμένων ἡμῖν, εἷς ἑνὸς πρόσωπον μὴ λαμβάνωμεν, ἀλλ᾽ ἐάν τις δοκῇ 
τι συμφέρον ἀντιλέγειν, ἀντιλέγεσθω αὐτῷ. ἔδοξε δὲ πᾶσι πρῶτον ᾿Ιωάννην 
εἰπεῖν. 

Ἰωάννης εἶπεν “Odoi Ayo εἰοι, μίὰ τῆς ζωῆς Kal μίδ τοῦ θανάτου. διαφορὰ 
λὲ πολλὴ METAZY τῶν AYO ὁλῶν. ἢ μὲν γὰρ ὁδός τῆς ζωῆς écTIN AYTH. πρῶτον 
ἀγὰπήςεις τὸν θεὸν τὸν ποιηςὰντᾶ ce ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας σου καὶ δοξάσεις 
τὸν λυτρωσάμενόν σε ἐκ θανάτου, ἥτις ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ πρώτη. δεύτερον: ἀγα- 
πήσεις τὸν πληοίον COY ὧς CEAdYTON, ἥτις ἐστὶν ἐντολὴ δευτέρα ἐν οἷς ὅλος 
ὁ νόμος κρέμαται καὶ οἱ προφῆται. 

Ματθαῖος εἶπε Πᾶντὰ ὅτὰ μὴ θέλεις col γενέοθδλι, MHAE οὐ ἄλλῳ TIOIHCEIC. 
TOYT@N δὲ τῶν λόγων τὴν AIAAYHN εἰπέ, ἀδελφὲ ἹΠέτρε. 

Πέτρος εἶπεν ΟΥ̓ cponeyceic, oy Μοιχεύοειο, OY TOpNeyceic, ΟΥ̓ πδιλοφθορήδσεις, 
ΟΥ̓ κλέψεις, OY Mareyceic’, ΟΥ̓ dapmakeycelc, OY Φονεύςεις τέκνον ἐν φθορᾷ ογλὲ 
γεννηθέν ἀποκτενεῖς, οὐκ ἐπιθγμήρεις τὰ τοῦ πλησίον, οὐκ ἐπιορκηςειο", OY 
YeYAOMAPTYPHCEIC, OY κἀκολογήςειο, οὐδὲ MNHCIKAKHCEIC, οὐκ ECH δίγνωμοο, οὐδὲ 
δίγλωσοος. πάγὶς γὰρ θὰάνάτου ἐστὶν ἢ διγλωσοίδ. οὐκ EcTal ὁ λόγος COY κενύς, 
OYAE YEYAHC, OYK ECH πλεονέκτης, οὐδὲ ἅρπαξ, OYAE ὑποκριτής, οὐδὲ KAKOHOHC, οὐδὲ 
ὑπερήφάνος, οὐδὲ λήψη Βουλὴν TIONHPAN KATA τοῦ πλησίον COY. ΟΥ̓́ MICHCEIC 
TIANTA ἄνθρωπον, ἀλλ᾽ OYC MEN ἐλέγξεις, OYC δὲ ἐλεήςεις *, περὶ ὧν δὲ TIPOCEYzZH, 
oyc δὲ ἀγάπήςεις ὑπὲρ τὴν ΨΥΧΉΝ Coy. 

᾿Ανδρέας εἶπε Τέκνον moy, φεῖγε ἀπὸ TANTOC πονηροῦ κἀὶ ἀπὸ TIANTOC 
ὁμοίου AYTOY. μὴ γίνου ὀργίλος. ὁδηγεῖ γὰρ H ὀργὴ πρὸς φόνον. ἔστε γὰρ 
δαιμόνιον ἀρρένικον 6 θυμός. MH .ΓίΝοΥ ZHAWTHC μηδὲ EPICTIKOC μηδὲ BYMAN- 
τικός. ἐκ γὰρ TOYTWN φόνος γεννᾶτδι. 

Φίλιππος εἶπε Τέκνον μὴ γίνου ἐπιθγμητής" ὁδηγεῖ γὰρ ἡ ἐπιθγμίὰ πρὸς 

1 Cod. Vind. omits these three clauses. 


3 Cod. Vind. omits these two clauses. 
3 Cod. Ottob. omits. this clause. 


Cf. Barnab. 
xix. 2. 


24 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


\ ' Nimes: \ > a A ε fie Maes, \ ἢ 
THN πορνείδν καὶ ἕλκει τοὺς ἀνθρώπους πρὸς ἑαυτήν. ἔστι γὰρ θηλυκὸν 

͵ A > θ f \ a \ > > lal “ὁ δὲ θ᾽ ἡὃ a . , 
δαιμόνιον τῆς ἐπιθυμίας, Kal ὃ μὲν μετ᾽ ὀργῆς ὃ δὲ pel ἡδονῆς ἀπόλλυσι 
τοὺς εἰσδεχομένους αὐτά: ὁδὸς δὲ πονηροῦ πνεύματος ἁμαρτία ψυχῆς" καὶ 
ὅταν βραχείαν εἴσδυσιν σχῇ ἐν αὐτῷ, πλατύνει αὐτὴν καὶ ἄγει ἐπὶ πάντα 

i κακὰ τὴν ψυχὴν ἐκείνην καὶ οὐκ ἐᾷ διαβλέψαι τὸν ἄνθρωπον καὶ ἰδεῖν 

Ta κα n x” U] ¢ ρ 

> ¢ ‘ Ὁ lal » / \ b] lal y . \ 
τὴν ἀλήθειαν: 6 θυμὸς ὑμῶν μέτρον ἐχέτω Kal ἐν βραχεῖ διαστήματι αὐτὸν 
ἡνιοχεῖτε καὶ ἀνακρούετε, ἵνα μὴ ἐμβάλλῃ ὑμᾶς εἰς ἔργον πονηρόν. θυμὸς 
yap καὶ ἡδονὴ πονηρὰ ἐπὶ πολὺ παραμένοντα Kata ἐπίτασιν δαιμόνια γίνεται. 
καὶ ὅταν ἐπιτρέψῃ αὐτοῖς ὁ ἄνθρωπος, οἰδαίνουσιν ἐν τῇ ψυχῇ αὐτοῦ καὶ 
γίνονται μείζονες καὶ ἀπάγουσιν αὐτὸν εἰς ἔργα ἄδικα καὶ ἐπιγελῶσιν αὐτῷ, 
καὶ ἥδονται ἐπὶ τῇ ἀπωλείᾳ τῶν ἀνθρώπων. 

Σίμων εἶπε Τέκνον MH ΓΙΝΟΥ aicypoAdroc μηλὲ ὑψηλόφθδλμοο" ἐκ γὰρ 
τούτων μοιχεῖδι γίνονται. (1. γεννῶνται.) 

? , a , ‘ ' > , > \ e a εἶ , 

Ἰάκωβος εἶπε Τέκνον μὴ ΓΙΝΟΥ οἰωνόοκοπος, ἐπειδὴ ὁδηγεῖ πρὸς τὴν 
> , εἰ , \ ' ͵ 
εἰλωλολάτρείάν, MHAE ἐπδοιδὸς μηδὲ μαθηματικὸς μηλὲ περικδθδίρων, μηλὲ θέλε 
αὐτὰ ἰδεῖν μηδὲ ἀκούειν" ἐκ γὰρ τούτων ἁπάντων εἰδωλολδτρεῖδι γεννῶντδι. 

Ναθανὰηλ εἶπε Τέκνον μὴ γίνου ψεύοτης, ἐπειδὴ ὁδηγεῖ τὸ ψεῦζομὰ ἐπὶ THN 
κλοπῆν, MHAE φιλᾶργγρος MHAE κενόδοξος: ἐκ γὰρ TOYTWN ἁπάντων κλοπὸὶ 
γεννῶντδι. 

[Ἰούδας εἶπε] Τέκνον μὴ γίνου γόγγγοος, ἐπειδὴ ἄγει πρὸς τὴν Βλλοφημίδν, 
μηδὲ AYOAAHC μηδὲ πονηρόφρων. ἐκ γὰρ τούτων ἁπάντων Βλὰσφημίδι γεννῶντδι. 
ἴεθι A€ πρᾶΐο, ἐπειδὴ TIPAEIC KAHPONOMHCOYCIN τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. ΓίΝΟΥ 
makpO@ymoc, ἐλεήμων, εἰρηνοποιός, καθαρὸς τῇ καρδίᾳ ἀπὸ παντὸς κακοῦ, 
AKAKOC καὶ Hcyyloc, Aravoc καὶ φυλάσσων KAl τρέμων τοὺς λόγογο OYC ἠκογοδο' 
ΟΥ̓Χ ὑψώςειο ceayTON οὐδὲ Awceic TH ΨΥχηῆ coy θρᾶζοο, οὐδὲ KOAAHOHCH TH 
(1. κολληθήσεται ἡ) yyy (1. ψυχή) coy μετὰ ὑψηλῶν ἀλλὰ μετὰ δικδίων Kal 
τἀπεινῶν ANACTPAPHCH’ τὰ δὲ CYMBAINONTA COI ἐνεργημάτὰ GC ἀγαθὰ προολδέξῃ, 
εἰδὼς ὅτι ἄτερ θεοῦ οὐδὲν γίνετδι. 

Θωμᾶς εἶπε Τέκνον TON λάλοῦντά COI τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ καὶ παραίτιόν σοι 
γινόμενον τῆς ζωῆς καὶ δόντα σοι τὴν ἐν κυρίῳ σφραγῖδα ἀγαπήσεις ὡς κόρην 
ὀφθαλμοῦ σου, MNHCOHCH δὲ αὐτοῦ NYKTA KAl ἡμέραν, τιμήσεις AYTON ὧς τὸν 
κύριον. ὅθεν γὰρ ἡ KYPIOTHC λὰλεῖται ἐκεῖ κύριός ἐστιν. EKZHTHCEIC δὲ τὸ TIPOCODTION 
αὐτοῦ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν καὶ TOYC λουποὺς ἅγίογο, INA ETIANATIAYCH τοῖο λόγοις ἀὐτῶν᾽ 
κολλώ Ν ι / e 6 , ~ [2 > \ θ᾽ Oy ὃ \ 3 > 

μενος yap ἁγίοις ἁγιασθήσῃ" τιμήσεις αὐτὸν καθ᾽ ὃ δυνατὸς εἶ, ἐκ 
τοῦ ἱδρῶτός σου καὶ ἐκ τοῦ πόνου τῶν χειρῶν σου. εἰ γὰρ ὁ κύριος δι’ αὐτοῦ 
ἠξίωσέ σοι δοθῆναι TINEYMATIKHN τροφὴν κἀὶ ποτὸν KAl ZWHN ἀϊώνιον, σὺ ὀφείλεις 
πολὺ μᾶλλον τὴν φθαρτὴν καὶ πρόσκαιρον προσφέρειν τροφήν. “AEvos γὰρ ὁ 
> / r lal A ἴω > lal ΕἸ , \ 5 ‘ , . tal 
ἐργάτης τοῦ μισθοῦ καὶ Body ἀλοῶντα οὐ φιμώσεις, καὶ Οὐδεὶς φυτεύει ἀμπελῶνα 
καὶ ἐκ τοῦ καρποῦ αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἐσθίει. ὶ 

Κηφᾶς εἶπεν ΟΥ̓ ποιήςεις cyicmata, εἰρηνεύςεις δὲ μάχομένους᾽ κρινεῖς δικδίως. 
oy λήψῃ πρόσωπόν Tuva ἐλέγξδι ἐπὶ πὰραπτώματι. οὐ γὰρ ἰσχύει πλοῦτος παρὰ 

/ fe. > \ ΕΣ / 5» Ν , τὸ tal % \ > ΄ > \ Ul 
κυρίῳ᾽ οὐ yap ἄξια προκρίνει οὐδὲ κάλλος ὠφελεῖ ἀλλὰ ἰσότης ἐστὶ πάντων 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 25 


παρ᾽ αὐτῷ. ἐν προσευχῇ σου μὴ λιψγχήομο, πότερον ἔσται HOY. MH γίνου πρὸς 
MEN τὸ AABEIN ἐκτείνων TAC YEipac, πρὸς δὲ τὸ δοῦῖνδι ογοπῶν᾽ ἐὰν ἔχης, AIA 
τῶν χειρῶν COY δώσεις λήτρωοιν τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν Coy’ OY AICTACEIC δοῦνδι, οὐδὲ 
“διδοὺς γογγύσειο᾽ γνώσῃ γὰρ Tic ἐοτιν ὁ τοῦ μιοθοῦ καλὸς ANTATIOAGTHC. οὐκ ἀποοτρὰ- 
HCH ἐνδεόμενον, κοινωνήςεις δὲ ἁπάντων τῷ ἀδελφῷ COY KAl οὐκ ἐρεῖς Tia 
εἶναι" εἰ γὰρ ἐν τῷ ἀθλνάτῳ κοινωνοί ἐοτε πόσῳ μᾶλλον ἐν τοῖς φθαρτοῖς. 

Βαρθολομαῖος εἶπεν ᾿Ιϊρωτῶμεν ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, ὡς ἔτι καιρός ἐστι καὶ ἔχετε, 
εἰς ods ἐργάξεσθε μεθ᾽ ἑαυτῶν, μὴ ἐκλείπητε ἐν μηδενί, ἐξουσίαν ἐὰν ἔχητε: 
ἐγγὺς γὰρ ἡ ἡμέρα κυρίου ἐν ἣ συναπολεῖται πάντα σὺν τῷ πονηρῷ" ἥξει γὰρ 
ὁ κύριος, καὶ ὁ μισθὸς αὐτοῦ μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ. ἑαυτῶν γίνεσθε σύμβουλοι ἀγαθοί, 
θεοδίδακτοι. φγλᾶξεις ἃ TrapéAaBec μήτε προοθεὶς μήτε ὑφδιρῶν. 

The writer of the Canons has thus purposely divided the first part of the 
Teaching into twelve segments so as to give one to each of bis imagined 
duodecad of Apostles; he knew the remainder of the book but it did not suit 
him ; what has been added in some MSS. of the Canons is perhaps of another 
workmanship, and from the same hand proceeded the two introductory 
chapters which point out the importance of the several offices to which 
attention is drawn at the close of the book. Observe that the Canonist 
draws nothing from the fifth and sixth chapters of the Teaching, although 


>) 
Barnabas with whom he is acquainted uses the fifth chapter freely. 


The Seventh book of the Apostolical Constitutions’. 


1. Tod νομοθέτου Μωσέως εἰρηκότος τοῖς ᾿Ισραηλίταις" ᾿Ιδοὺ δέδωκα πρὸ 
προσώπου ὑμῶν τὴν ὁδὸν τῆς ζωῆς καὶ τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ θανάτου, καὶ ἐπιφέ- 
ροντος “ExreEar τὴν ζωὴν ἵνα ζήσῃς" καὶ τοῦ προφήτου ᾿Ἡλία λέγοντος 
τῷ λαῷ Ἕως πότε χωλανεῖτε ἐπ᾽ ἀμφοτέραις ταῖς ἐἰγνύαις ὑμῶν; εἰ θεός 
ἐστι κύριος, πορεύεσθε ὀπίσω αὐτοῦ: εἰκότως ἔλεγε καὶ ὁ κύριος ᾿Ιησοῦς 
Οὐδεὶς δύναται δυσὶ κυρίοις δουλεύειν: ἢ γὰρ τὸν ἕνα μισήσει καὶ τὸν ἕτερον 
ἀγαπήσει, ἢ ἑνὸς ἀνθέξεται καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει" ἀναγκαίως καὶ 
ἡμεῖς ἑπόμενοι τῷ διδασκάλῳ Χριστῷ, ὅς ἐστι σωτὴρ πάντων ἀνθρώπων 
μάλιστα πιστῶν, φαμὲν ὡς AYO ὁδοί Eicl, MIA TAC Ζωῆς KAl MIA TOY OANATOY. 
οὐδεμίαν δὲ σύγκρισιν ἔχουσι πρὸς ἑαυτὰς (πολν γὰρ TO διάφορον), μᾶλλον δὲ 
πάντῃ κεχωρισμέναι τυγχάνουσι: καὶ φυσικὴ μὲν ἔστιν ἡ τῆς ζωῆς ὁδός, 
ἐπείσακτος δὲ ἡ τοῦ θανάτου, οὐ τοῦ κατὰ γνώμην θεοῦ ὑπάρξαντος, ἀλλὰ 
τοῦ ἐξ ἐπιβουλῆς τοῦ ἀλλοτρίου. 

2. Πρώτη οὖν τυγχάνει ἡ ὁλὸς τῆς Ζωῆς Kal ECTIN δὕτη, ἣν καὶ ὁ νόμος 
διαγορεύει, ἀγὰπάν KYPION τὸν θεὸν ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς, 


1 The text is that of Lagarde, with emendations in such places as seemed necessary, It 
will be found that in not a few cases the editio princeps of Turrianus is closer to the 
text of the Teaching than Lagarde’s. 


H. 4 


Cf. Barnab. 
0. XX. 


Lag. om, 

καὶ σὺ and 
adds a gloss 
after ποιήσεις 


Lag. κακῶν 
Lag. om. eis 
τὴν δεξιὰν 
σιαγόνα 
Lag. om, ὃν 


26 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


τὸν ἕνα καὶ μόνον, Tap’ ὃν ἄλλος οὐκ ἔστι, KAI TON πλησίον ὡς EAyTON. Kai TAN 
ὃ MH θέλεις γενέεςθδι Col, Kal οὐ τοῦτο ἀλλῷ oY TroIHcelc. EyAoreite τοὺς κατδρω- 
ménoyc ὑμᾶς, TIpoceyyecbe ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐπηρεαζόντων ὑμᾶς, ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἐχθροὺς 
ὑμῶν. Ποία γὰρ ὑμῖν χάρις, ἐὰν φιλῆτε τοὺς φιλοῦντδο yMAC; KAl γὰρ οἵ ἐθνικοὶ 
τοῦτο ποιοΐοιν᾽ ὑμεῖς δὲ φιλεῖτε τοῦς MICOYNTAC YMAC KAI ἐχθρὸν OY ἕξετε. OF 
μιςήςεις γάρ, φησί, TANTA ἄνθρωπον, οὐκ Αἰγύπτιον, οὐκ ᾿Ιδουμαῖον, ἅπαντες 

U > “ lal Μ , \ ? \ / 4 \ ‘ , fal 
yap εἰσι τοῦ θεοῦ ἔργα. φεύγετε δὲ οὐ τὰς φύσεις, ἀλλὰ τὰς γνώμας τῶν 
πονηρῶν. ᾿Απέχογ τῶν CAPKIK@N καὶ κοομικῶν ἐπιθγμιῶν. "EAN Tic col A@ 
ῥάπιομὰ εἶς THN AEZIAN οιδγόνὰ, CTPEYON ἀὐτῷ KAI τὴν ἄλλην" οὐ φαύλης οὔσης τῆς 
ἀμύνης, ἀλλὰ τιμιωτέρας τῆς ἀνεξικακίας" λέγει γὰρ ὁ Δαβὶδ Εἰ ἀνταπέδωκα 
τοῖς ἀνταποδιδοῦσί μοι κακά. ᾿Ἐὰν ArrapeycH cé TIC μίλιον ἕν, ὕπδγε μετ᾽ 
ayToy AYO, κἀὶ τῷ θέλοντί COI κριθῆνδι κὸὶ τὸν YIT@NA coy AdBEIN, ἄφες 

DONS: ‘oe ine ‘ ἃ Nell 
Αὐτῷ KAl TO IMATION, KAl ἀπὸ TOY alpontoc TA CA MH ἀπδίτει. Τῷ δἰτοῦντι ce 

' \ cy τ an ῃ ,ὕ \ n \ > ,ὔ \ 
Aidoy, Kab ἀπὸ τοῦ θέλοντος δανείσασθαι παρὰ σοῦ μὴ ἀποκλείσῃς τὴν 
χεῖρα: δίκαιος γὰρ ἀνὴρ οἰκτείρει καὶ κιχρᾷ' πᾶσι γὰρ θέλει δίλοοθλι ὁ TATHP 
ὁ τὸν ἥλιον αὐτοῦ ἀνατέλλων ἐπὶ πονηροὺς καὶ ἀγαθούς, καὶ τὸν ὑετὸν 

, fal , > \ / ἣν 3 LA A 53 , / > > u 
αὐτοῦ βρέχων ἐπὶ δικαίους Kal ἀδίκους. πᾶσιν οὖν δίκαιον διδόναι ἐξ οἰκείων 
πόνων Τίμα γάρ, φησί, τὸν κύριον ἀπὸ σῶν δικαίων πόνων" προτιμητέον 
δὲ τοὺς ἁγίους. ΟΥ̓ φονεύσεις, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστιν οὐ φθερεῖς τὸν ὅμοιόν σοι ἄνθρωπον' 
διαλύεις γὰρ τὰ καλῶς γινόμενα: οὐχ ὡς παντὸς φόνου φαύλου τυγχάνοντος, 
> \ / aA 3 / an > > / v / ’ / 2 
ἀλλὰ μόνου τοῦ ἀθώου, τοῦ δ᾽ ἐνδίκου ἄρχουσι μόνοις apwpicpévov. ΟΥ̓ 
molyeyceic’ διαιρεῖς γὰρ τὴν μίαν σάρκα εἰς δύο' "ἔσονται γάρ, φησίν, οἱ 
δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν: ἕν γάρ εἰσιν ἀνὴρ καὶ γυνὴ τῇ φύσει, τῇ συμπνοίᾳ, 
τῇ ἑνώσει, τῇ διαθέσει, τῷ βίῳ, τῷ τρόπῳ, κεχωρισμένοι δέ εἰσι τῷ σχήματι 

NN tal τ θ “ Oy iN 0 ' A Ν , Ν \ \ > S; 60 
καὶ τῷ ἀριθμῷ. Oy mTaidoddopHceic’ παρὰ φύσιν yap τὸ κακὸν ἐκ Σοδόμων 
φυέν, ἥτις πυρὸς θεηλάτου παρανάλωμα γέγονεν' ἐπικατάρατος δὲ ὁ τοιοῦτος 

ΩΣ ὑπ a ε \ , , > , > " , , 
καὶ ἐρεῖ πᾶς ὁ λαὸς Γένοιτο γένοιτο. Oy topneyceic’ Οὐκ ἔσται yap, φησί, 
πορνεύων ἐν υἱοῖς ᾿Ισραήλ. ΟΥ̓ κλέψεις: "Αχαρ γὰρ κλέψας ἐν τῴ ᾿Ισραὴλ 
ἐν Ἱεριχὼ λίθοις βληθεὶς τοῦ ζῆν ὑπεξῆλθε, καὶ Τιεζεῖ κλέψας καὶ ψευ- 

“ 5 , a ‘ \ , νὰ 5» , 7 \ - 
σάμενος ἐκληρονόμησε τοῦ Νεεμὰν τὴν λέπραν, Kai ᾿Ιούδας κλέπτων τὰ τῶν 
πενήτων, τὸν κύριον τῆς δόξης παρέδωκεν ᾿Ιουδαίοις καὶ μεταμεληθεὶς 
ἀπήγξατο καὶ ἐλάκησε μέσος καὶ ἐξεχύθη πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ, καὶ 
"A i? ἊΣ / ¢ , ΄ , \ 18 \ , 

vavias καὶ Σαπφείρα ἡ τούτου γυνή, κλέψαντες τὰ ἴδια καὶ πειράσαντες 
τὸ πνεῦμα κυρίου, παραχρῆμα ἀποφάσει ἸἹ]έτρου τοῦ συναποστόλου ἡμῶν 
ἐθανατώθησαν. 

3. ΟΥ̓ mareyceic, oY capmakeyceic’ Φαρμακοὺς γάρ, φησίν, οὐ περιβιώσετε. 
ΟΥ̓ φονεύσεις τέκνον coy ἐν φθορᾷ οὐδὲ τὸ γεννηθέν ἀποκτενεῖο" πᾶν γὰρ 
τὸ ἐξεικονισμένον, ψυχὴν λαβὸν παρὰ θεοῦ, φονευθέν, ἐκδικηθήσεται, ἀδίκως 
ἀναιρεθέν. ΟΥ̓κ ἐπιθγμήςεις τὰ τοῦ TAHCION Coy, οἷον τὴν γυναῖκα ἢ τὸν παῖδα 
ΩΝ Ἂν le} » A 5 , ΕΣ > ' > , Ν AY > vp “ 

ἢ τὸν βοῦν ἢ τὸν ἀγρόν. Οὐκ ἐπιορκήςειο' ἐρρέθη γὰρ μὴ ὀμόσαι ὅλως" 
εἰδὲ μήγε, κἂν εὐορκήσῃς, ὅτι ἐπαινεθήσεται πᾶς ὁ ὀμνύων ἐν αὐτῷ. ΟΥ̓ 
yeyomaptypticeic, OTe ὁ συκοφαντῶν πένητα παροξύνει τὸν ποιήσαντα αὐτόν. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 27 


: Σ ᾿ = 
4, Oy κἀκολογήςειο: Μὴ ἀγάπα yap, φησί, κακολογεῖν, ἵνα μὴ ἐξαρθῆς" 
ΟΥ̓ΔΕ Μμνηοικἀκήςειο' ὁδοὶ γὰρ μνησικάκων εἰς θάνατον. ΟΥ̓Κ ἔσῃ δλίγνωμος οὐδὲ 
AirAw@ccoc’ Maric γὰρ ἐσχυρὰ ἀνδρὶ τὰ ἴδια χείλη, καὶ ἀνὴρ γλωσσώδης οὐ κατευ- 
; iy oe ᾿ : ; 
θυνθήσεται ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς" οὐκ ἔοτλι ὁ λόγος coy κενός: περὶ παντὸς yap λόγου 
egret? : Gah 4 Ἔ 
ἀργοῦ δώσετε λόγον" ΟΥ̓ yeycu’ ᾿Απολεῖς γάρ, φησί, πάντας τοὺς λαλοῦντας 
τὸ ψεῦδος. Οὐκ ἔτη πλεονέκτης οὐδὲ ἅρπαξ Οὐαὶ γάρ, φησίν, ὁ πλεονεκτῶν 
τὸν πλησίον πλεονεξίαν κακήν. OyK ἔσῃ ὑποκριτής, ἵνα μὴ τὸ μέρος σου 
μετ᾽ αὐτῶν θὴῆς. 

ὅ. Οὐκ ἔσῃ κακοήθης, οὐδὲ ὑπερηφάνοο ὑπερηφάνοις γὰρ ὁ θεὸς ἀντι- 
τάσσεται. OY λήψη πρόσωπον δυνάστου ἐν κρίσει, ὅτι τοῦ κυρίου ἡ κρίσις. 
Oy micticeic πάντὰ ἄνθρωπον" ἐλεγμῷ ἐλέγξεις τὸν ἀδελφόν σου καὶ οὐ λήψῃ 
δι αὐτὸν ἁμαρτίαν, καὶ "ἔλεγχε σοφὸν καὶ ἀγαπήσει oe. Φεῦγε ἀπὸ TANTOC 
κακοῦ καὶ ἀπὸ παντὸς ὁμοίου δὐτῷ: "Ἄπεχε γάρ, φησίν, ἀπὸ ἀδίκου καὶ τρόμος 
οὐκ ἐγγιεῖ σοι. MH γίνου ὀργίλος, μηδὲ βάσκανος, μηλὲ Ζηλωτήο, μηδὲ MANIKOC, 

ῃ θ , “ \ {θ \ an <i Ta \ < ~ > \ \ \ rn 
μηδὲ θρασύς, ἵνα μὴ πάθῃς τὰ τοῦ Kadiv καὶ τὰ τοῦ Σαοὺλ Kai τὰ τοῦ 
᾿Ιωάβ' ὅτι 6 μὲν ἀπέκτεινε τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐτοῦ τὸν "Αβελ διὰ τὸ πρόκριτον 
αὐτὸν εὑρεθῆναι παρὰ θεῷ καὶ διὰ τὸ προσδεχθῆναι τὴν θυσίαν αὐτοῦ: ὃς 
δὲ τὸν ὅσιον Δαβὶδ ἐδίωκε νικήσαντα τὸν Γολιὰθ τὸν Φυλισταῖον, καὶ ζηλώσας 
ἐπὶ τῇ τῶν χορευτριῶν εὐφημίᾳ: ὃς δὲ τοὺς δύο στρατάρχας ἀνεῖλε, τὸν 
> A A an? \ \ A > \ A a Yoo 5 , 

Αβεννὴρ τὸν τοῦ ᾿Ισραὴνλ καὶ τὸν ᾿Αμεσσὰ τὸν τοῦ ᾿Ἰούδα. 
ip ) μ 
, ᾿ , o n 2 ’ ,7 ΄ 

0. Mu γίνου οἰωνοοκόπος, ὅτι ὁδηγεῖ πρὸς EiAWAOAaTPEIAN’ Οἰώνισμα δέ, 

\ cy I € , > ΄ \ ’ ” » \ > Ἶ \ iY: 
φησὶν ὁ Σαμουήλ, ἁμαρτία ἐστί, καὶ Οὐκ ἔσται οἰωνισμὸς ἐν ᾿Ιακὼβ οὐδὲ 
μαντεία ἐν ᾿Ισραήλ: οὐκ ἔοῃ ἐπᾶλων ἢ περικλθδίρων τὸν υἱόν σου, οὐ 

"“" » \ > , ’ Ν » , > ‘ , , 
κλυδωνιεῖς, οὐδὲ οἰωνισθήσῃ, οὐδὲ ὀρνεοσκοπήσεις, OYAE MABHCH MAODHMATA 
TONHpA ταῦτα γὰρ ἅπαντα καὶ ὁ νόμος ἀπεῖπεν. MM γίνογ ἐπιθγμητὴς κακῶν, 
ὁδηγηθήσῃ yap εἰς ἀμετρίαν ἁμαρτημάτων. ΟΥ̓Κ ἔσῃ δἰοχρολόγος, οὐδὲ ῥιψό- 
φθάλμος, οὐδὲ μέθυσος" ἐκ γὰρ τοΐτων πορνεῖδι κἀὶ μοιχεῖδι γίνονται. MH γίνου 
φιλάργυρος, ἵνα μὴ ἀντὶ θεοῦ δουλεύσῃς τῷ μαμωνᾷ. Mu γίνου κενόδοξος, 

\ , ΤῸ , ae \ 1 ΓΆΡ, > , a 2 
μηδὲ μετέωρος, μηδὲ dryrAOppov' ἐκ γὰρ τούτων ἁπάντων ἀλαζονίαι TENNONTAI 

ul cal > , , 9 ec 0 € él Ἰδὲ > , θ 
μνήσθητι τοῦ εἰπόντος, Κύριε, οὐχ ὑψώθη ἡ καρδία μου, οὐδὲ ἐμετεωρισθησαν 

, ,ὔ € \ 5, , 
οἱ ὀφθαλμοί μου, οὐδὲ ἐπορεύθην ἐν μεγάλοις οὐδὲ ἐν θαυμασίοις ὑπὲρ ἐμέ, 
εἰ μὴ ἐταπεινοφρόνουν. 

1 ' ’ a , ᾿ Cheer ΄ 

7. Mu γίνου rérrycoc, μνησθεὶς τῆς τιμωρίας, ἧς ὑπέστησαν οἱ κατα- 

™” , A 
γογγύσαντες Μωσέως. Mi ἔσο ayOddHc, μηδὲ TIONHPOPON, μηδὲ σκληρο- 
κάρδιος, μηδὲ θυμώδης, μηδὲ μικρόψυχος: πᾶντὰ γὰρ TAYTA ὁδληγε! πρὸς BAac- 
Φημίαν: ict δὲ πρᾶος ὡς Μωσῆς καὶ Δαβίδ, ἐπεὶ οἱ πρδεῖς KAHPONOMHCOYC! 
τὴν γῆν. 

ἔ ! e \ a \ > ' > , e 

8. Tinoy makpddymoc* 6 γὰρ τοιοῦτος πολὺς ἐν φρονήσει, ἐπείπερ ὁ 
4. , ᾿ β ͵ \ Cs , “ 
ὀλιγόψυχος ἰσχυρὸς ἄφρων. Tinoy ἐλεήμων" μακάριοι yap οἱ ἐλεήμονες, ὅτι 

΄ , ᾿ , , nr 
αὐτοὶ ἐλεηθήσονται. “Eco ἄκδκος, Hicyyoc, ἀγαθός, τρέμων TOYC λόγογο TOY 

a , -“ “ ε if lel . A 
θεοῦ. Oxy ὑψώςεις ceayTON ὡς ὁ Φαρισαῖος: ὅτι πᾶς ὁ ὑψῶν εαυτὸν ταπεινω- 

μ »" A a - ’ ’ 
θήσεται, καὶ τὸ ὑψηλὸν ἐν ἀνθρώποις βδέλυγμα παρὰ τῷ θεῷ. Oy δώσεις 
4—2 


Lag. om, φησί 


Lag. om. ἵνα 


Lag. om. rov 
before Γολιὰθ 
Lag. στρατη- 
λάτας 


Lag. κληδο- 
νιεῖς 

Lag. μάθημα 
πονηρόν 


Lag. γογγύ- 
σαντες κατὰ 


Lag. om. 6 
συμ... «γνωσθή- 
σεται 

Lag. σοι 

παρὰ θεοῦ 


Lag. καταλ- 
λάσσων 


Lag. ἐνδεού- 
μενον 

Lag. ἀκοῦσαι 
Lag. om. τοῦ 


Lag. ve. αὐτῶν 


Lag. om. τῷ 


Lag. κυρίῳ 
ἀρεστὸν 


28 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


TH yyy coy @pdcoc, ὅτι ἀνὴρ θρασὺς ἐμπεσεῖται εἰς κακά. ΟΥ̓ cymmopeycH 
μετὰ ἀφρόνων, ἀλλὰ μετὰ οοφῶν Kal δικδίων: Ὃ συμπορευόμενος γὰρ σοφοῖς 
σοφὸς ἔσται, ὁ δὲ συμπορευόμενος ἄφροσι γνωσθήσεται. Τὰ CYMBAINONTA (οι 
πάθη εὐμενῶς δέχου καὶ τὰς περιστάσεις ἀλύπως, εἰλὼς ὅτι μισθὸς παρὰ 

lal lA id a ’ \ \ a , 
θεοῦ σοι δοθήσεται ὡς τῷ ᾿Ιὼβ καὶ τῷ Aalapo. 

9, Τὸν Add0YNTA col τὸν λόγον τοῦ θεοῦ δοξάςειο, MNHCOHCH δὲ ayTOY 
HMEPAC KAI νυκτός, TIMHCEIC δὲ ἀΐτὸν οὐχ ὡς γενέσεως αἴτιον, ἀλλ᾽ ὡς τοῦ 
εὖ εἶναί σοι πρόξενον γινόμενον: ὅποΥ γὰρ ἢ περὶ θεοῦ λιλδοκάλίδ, ἐκεῖ ὁ 
θεός πᾶρεοτιν. “EkZHTHCEIC καθ᾽ HMEPAN τὸ πρόοωπον τῶν ἁγίων, ἵν᾽ ἐπλνδπδύῃ 
τοῖς λύγοις AYTON. 

10. ΟΥ̓ ποιήσεις cyicmata πρὸς τοὺς ἁγίους, μνησθεὶς τῶν Kopetav. 
EipHneyceic μάχομένογς ὡς Μωσῆς συναλλάσσων εἰς φιλίαν. Kpineic λικδίως' 
τοῦ γὰρ κυρίου ἡ κρίσις. ΟΥ̓ λήψῃ πρόσωπον ἐλέγξαι ἐπὶ πὰράπτώμδτι, ὡς 
᾿ἩἩλίας καὶ Μιχαίας τὸν ᾿Αχαάβ, καὶ ᾿Αβδεμέλεκ ὁ Αἰθίοψ τὸν Σεδεκίαν 
καὶ Νάθαν τὸν Δαβὶδ καὶ ᾿Ιωάννης τὸν “Ἡρώδην. 

11. Md γίνου Alyyyoc ἐν προσευχῇ σου, εἰ EcTal H OY" λέγει γὰρ ὁ κύριος 
> \ / > \ n / 5 la > / > ‘ , , , 
ἐμοὶ Ἰ]έτρῳ ἐπὶ τῆς θωλάσσης ᾿Ολιγόπιστε, εἰς τί ἐδίστασας; MH γίνοΥ πρὸς 
μὲν τὸ λαβεῖν ἐκτείνων τὴν χεῖρα, πρὸς δὲ τὸ δοῦνδι ογοτέλλων. 

12. ᾽Εὰν ἐχῃο, διὰ τῶν χειρῶν coy Adc, ἵνὰ EprdcH εἰς λύτρωσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 
coy’ ἐλεημοσύναις γὰρ καὶ πίστεσιν ἀποκαθαίρονται ἁμαρτίαι. ΟΥ̓ AicTAceic 
λοῖνδι πτωχῷ, οὐδὲ διδοὺς forrycelc’ γνώσῃ γὰρ Tic ECTIN ὁ TOY μιοθοῦ ANTA- 

' € > aA , \ ΄ὔ /, AY \ \ , 3. ἴω 
πολότηο: ὋὉ ἐλεῶν γάρ, φησί, πτωχὸν κυρίῳ δανείζει, κατὰ δὲ τὸ δόμα αὐτοῦ 
, > , Ὁ tal 2 > , > ' a , 
οὕτως ἀνταποδοθήσεται αὐτῷς, ΟΥκ ATocTpadHcH EendcdmMenon’ “Os φράσσει 

᾿ 9 in ἢ ἮΝ - \ 
yap, φησί, τὰ ὦτα αὐτοῦ μὴ εἰσακοῦσαι τοῦ δεομένου, Kal αὐτὸς ἐπικα- 
λέσεται καὶ οὐκ ἔσται ὁ εἰσακούων αὐτοῦ. KOoIN@NHcElc εἰς πᾶντὰ τῷ ἀλελφῷ 
ΠΟΥ καὶ οὐκ ἐρεῖς ἴδιο. εἶναι. κοινὴ γὰρ ἡ μετάληψις παρὰ θεοῦ πᾶσιν ἀνθρώ- 
mous παρεσκευάσθη. ΟΥ̓Κ dpeic τὴν χεῖρά coy ἀπὸ τοῦ Υἱοῦ coy H ἀπὸ τῆς 
θγγάτρός coy, ἀλλὰ ἀπὸ νεότητος διδάξεις AYTOYC τὸν φόβον τοῦ θεοῦ: Llaideve 
γάρ, φησί, τὸν υἱόν σου, οὕτω γὰρ ἔσται σοι εὔελπις. 

13. Οὐκ ἐπιτάξεις δούλῳ coy H πδιδίοκη τοῖς ἐπὶ TON ἀὐτὸν θεὸν πεποι- 
θύοιν ἐν πικρίᾳ ψυχῆς, MH ποτε στενάξωσιν ἐπὶ σοὶ καὶ ἔσται σοι ὀργὴ παρὰ 
θεοῦ" Kai ὑμεῖς οἱ λοῖΐῖλοι, ὑποτάγητε τοῖς κυρίοις ὑμῶν ὡς τύπῳ θεοῦ EN aicyyNH 

‘ ' c a ἐφ \ > οἱ ’ 
καὶ φόβῳ ὡς τῷ κυρίῳ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώποις. 

14. MicHceic πᾶσαν Ὑπόκριειν, KAl πάν, ὃ ἂν H APECTON κγρίῳ, ποιήςειο" OY 
μὴ €[KATAAITIHC ἐντολὰς Kyploy, φυλάξεις δὲ ἃ TrApeAABec παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, μήτε προς- 
τιθεὶς ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς μήτε ἀφδιρῶν ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν. Οὐ προσθήσεις γὰρ τοῖς λόγοις 

> an ἘΡ’ NES \ \ ΄ ore , ,ὔ n a 
αὐτοῦ, wa μὴ ἐλέγξῃ σε καὶ ψευδὴς γένῃ. “EzZomoAorHcH κυρίῳ τῷ θεῷ cov 
τὰ AMapTHMATA coy καὶ οὐκ ἔτι προσθήσεις ἐπ᾽ αὐτοῖς, ἵνα εὖ σοι γένηται 

\ / n a “Ὁ » A A , Qn e lol γ. A 
παρὰ κυρίῳ τῷ θεῷ σου, ὃς οὐ βούλεται τὸν θάνατον τοῦ ἁμαρτωλοῦ, ἀλλὰ 
τὴν μετάνοιαν. 

15. Τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μητέρα θεραπεύσεις ὡς αἰτίους σοι γενέσεως, 
ἵνα γένῃ μακροχρόνιος ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἧς κύριος ὁ θεός σου δίδωσί σοι τοὺς 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 29 


ἀδελφούς σου καὶ τοὺς συγγενεῖς cou μὴ ὑπερίδῃς: τοὺς yap οἰκείους τοῦ 
σπέρματός σου οὐχ ὑπερόψει. 

10. Τὸν βασιλέα φοβηθήσῃ, εἰδὼς ὅτι τοῦ κυρίου ἐστὶν ἡ χειροτονία" τοὺς 
ἄρχοντας αὐτοῦ τιμήσεις ὡς λειτουργοὺς θεοῦ, ἔκδικοι γάρ εἰσι πάσης ἀδικίας" 
οἷς ἀποτίσατε τέλος, φόρον καὶ πᾶσαν εἰσφορὰν εὐγνωμόνως. 

17. ΟΥ̓ mpoceAeycu ἐπὶ προσευχήν coy ἐν ἡμέρᾳ πονηρίδο coy, πρὶν ἂν λύσῃς 
τὴν πικρίαν σου. Αὐτὴ ἐςτὶν H ὁδὸς τῆς Ζωῆς, ἧς γένοιτο ἐντὸς ὑμᾶς εὑρεθῆναι 
διὰ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν. 

18, Ἡ λὲ ὁδὸς τοῦ Oandtoy ἐςτὶν ἐν πράξεσι TONHpAic θεωρουμένη" ἐν αὐτῇ 
yap ἄγνοια θεοῦ καὶ πολλῶν θεῶν ἐπεισαγωγή, δι’ ὧν φόνοι, μοιχεῖδι, πορνεῖδι, 
ἐπιορκίαι, ἐπιθγμίδι ππαράνομοι, KAOTIAI, εἰλωλολατρεῖδι, MATEIAI, φαρμὰκεῖδι, ἁρπδγδι, 
yeyAomapTypial, ὑποκρίςεις, διπλοκάρδίδι, δόλος, ὑπερηφανία, κακία, AYOAAEIA, πλεο- 
νεξία, δἰοχρολογία, ζηλοτυπία, OpAcyTHC, ὑψηλοφροούνη, ἀλάζονεία, ἀφοβία, διωγμὸς 
ἀγαθῶν, AAHBEIAC ἐχθρὰ, ψεύδογο ἀγάπη, ἄγνοιὰ AIKAIOCYNHC. οἱ yap τούτων 
ποιηταὶ OY κολλῶντλι ἀγαθῷ, οὐδὲ κρίσει δικδίλ' ἀγρυπνοῦοιν οὐκ εἰς τὸ ἀγαθόν, 
ἀλλ᾽ εἰς τὸ πονηρόν: ὧν μακρὰν TIPAGTHC καὶ YTIOMONH, MATAIA ἀγαπῶντες, διώκοντες 
ANTATIOAOMA, οὐκ ἐλεοΐντες πτωχόν, OY πονοῦντες ἐπὶ KATATTONOYMENG, οὐ γινώ- 
CKONTEC τὸν TIOIHCANTA AYTOYC, φονεῖς τέκνων, φθορεῖς πλάσματος θεοῦ, ATTOCTPE- 
φόμενοι ἐνδεόμενον, KATATTONOYNTEC θλιβόμενον, πλογοίων TIAPAKAHTOI, πενήτων 
ὑπερόπται, TANGAMAPTHTOL ἱΡγοθείητε, τέκνὰ, ἀπὸ τοΐτων ἁπάντων. 

19. “Opa mH τίς ce TAANHcH ἀπὸ τῆς εὐςεβείλο Οὐκ ἐκκλινεῖς γάρ, φησίν, 
ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς δεξιὰ ἢ ἀριστερά, iva συνῆς ἐν πᾶσιν οἷς ἐὰν πράσσῃς" οὐ γάρ, 
ἐὰν μὴ ἐκτραπῆς ἔξω τῆς εὐθείας ὁδοῦ, δυσσεβήσεις. 

20. Περὶ λὲ Βρωμάτων λέγει σοι ὁ κύριος Ta ἀγαθὰ τῆς γῆς φάγεσθε, καὶ 
Πᾶν κρέας ἔδεσθε ὡς λάχανα χλόης, τὸ δὲ αἷμα ἐκχεεῖς: Οὐ γὰρ τὰ εἰσερχόμενα 
εἰς τὸ στόμα κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνθρωπον, ἀλλὰ τὰ ἐκπορευόμενα, λέγω δὴ βλασφημίαι, 
καταλαλιαὶ καὶ εἴ τι τοιοῦτον. σὺ δὲ φάγῃ τὸν μυελὸν τῆς γῆς μετὰ δικαιο- 
σύνης" ὅτι εἴ τι καλόν, αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἴ TL ἀγαθόν, αὐτοῦ: σῖτος νεανίσκοις καὶ 
οἶνος εὐωδιάζων παρθένοις" τίς γὰρ φάγεται ἢ τίς πίεται παρὲξ αὐτοῦ; παραινεῖ 
δέ σοι καὶ ὁ σοφὸς "Εσδρας λέγων Πορεύεσθε καὶ φάγετε λιπάσματα καὶ πίετε 
γλυκάσματα καὶ μὴ λυπεῖσθε. 

21. ᾿Απὸ δὲ τῶν εἰδωλοθύτων φεύγετε, ἐπὶ TIM γὰρ δδιμόνων OYoyct ταῦτὰ, 
ἐφ᾽ ὕβρει δηλαδὴ τοῦ μόνου θεοῦ, ὅπως μὴ γένησθε κοινωνοὶ δαιμόνων. 

22. Περὶ λὲ Barticmatoc, ὦ ἐπίσκοπε ἢ πρεσβύτερε, ἤδη μὲν καὶ πρότερον 
διεταξάμεθα, καὶ νῦν δέ φαμεν ὅτι οὕτω Banticeic, ὡς ὁ κύριος διετάξατο 
ἡμῖν λέγων ἸΠορευθέντες μαθητεύσατε πάντα τὰ ἔθνη, βαπτίζοντες ayTOYC εἰς 
τὸ ὀνομὰ τοῦ Πατρὸς Kal τοῦ Υἱοῦ Kal τοῦ Arloy Πνεύματος, διδάσκοντες αὐτοὺς 
τηρεῖν πάντα ὅσα ἐνετειλάμην ὑμῖν: τοῦ ἀποστείλαντος Ilatpos, τοῦ ἐλθόντος 
Χριστοῦ, τοῦ μαρτυρήσαντος Ἰ]αρακλήτου. χρίσεις δὲ πρῶτον ἐλαίῳ ἁγίῳ, 
ἔπειτα Banticelc ὕδατι καὶ τελευταῖον σφραγίσεις μύρῳ ἵνα τὸ μὲν χρίσμα 
μετοχὴ ἢ τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύματος, τὸ δὲ ὕδωρ σύμβολον τοῦ θανάτου, τὸ δὲ μύρον 
σφραγὶς τῶν συνθηκῶν. εἰ δὲ μήτε ἔλαιον ἢ μήτε μύρον, ἀρκεῖ ὕδωρ καὶ 


Lag. τοῦ 0. 


Lag. om. 
κατ. OB. 


Lag. σὺ yap, 
ἐὰν ἐκ. 
Lag. om. ἔξω 


Lag. xpéa 


Lag. om. παρ. 
...Aumreia Ge 


Lag. τὸ ὕδωρ 


Lag. ὑπὸ “Iw. 
mp. Bat. 


Lag. βαπτι- 
σθῆναι 


Lag. πέμπτην 


Lag. ὥσπερ 


Lag. com- 
pletes the 
doxology 


Lag. om. φησί 


30 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


\ , \ Υ τὸ Ν \ ΄ / r πὶ θ ul wv 
πρὸς xplow καὶ πρὸς σφραγῖδα καὶ πρὸς ὁμολογίαν Tod ἀποθανόντος ἤτοι 
συναποθνήσκοντος. Πρὺ δὲ τοῦ BATITICMATOC νηςτεγοάτω ὁ βαπτιζόμενος" καὶ 
\ « 2 lal \ € ‘ 5 2 \ > A yy 3. ,ὔ 
yap ὁ κύριος, πρῶτον βαπτισθεὶς ὑπὸ ᾿Ιωάννου καὶ εἰς τὴν ἔρημον αὐλισθείς, 
t , , 
μετέπειτα ἐνήστευσε τεσσαράκοντα ἡμέρας καὶ τεσσαράκοντα νύκτας. ἐβαπ- 
τίσθη δὲ καὶ ἐνήστευσεν οὐκ αὐτὸς ἀπορυπώσεως ἢ νηστείας χρείαν ἔχων ἢ 
ΕἸ [4 ἂν > , 
καθάρσεως 6 τῇ φύσει καθαρὸς καὶ ἅγιος, GAN ἵνα καὶ ᾿Ιωάννῃ ἀλήθειαν 
- τὰ lal c 
προσμαρτυρήσῃ καὶ ἡμῖν ὑπογραμμὸν παράσχηται. οὐκοῦν ὁ μὲν κύριος οὐκ 
lal a , , 
εἰς ἑαυτοῦ πάθος ἐβαπτίσατο ἢ θάνατον ἢ ἀνάστασιν (οὐδέπω γὰρ οὐδὲν 
, ΕῚ , > 5 τ , id , \ \ ’ 3 > / LY A 
τούτων ἐγεγόνει), ἀλλ᾽ εἰς διάταξιν ἑτέραν, διὸ καὶ ἀπ᾽ ἐξουσίας μετὰ TO 
\ 3. nr 
βάπτισμα νηστεύει ὡς κύριος ᾿Ιωάννου" ὁ δὲ εἰς τὸν αὐτοῦ θάνατον μυούμενος 
πρότερον ὀφείλει νηστεῦσαι καὶ τότε βαπτίσασθαι (οὐ γὰρ δίκαιον τὸν συν- 
Ν 5 , rn 
ταφέντα καὶ συναναστάντα παρ᾽ αὐτὴν τὴν ἀνάστασιν κατηφεῖν), οὐ γὰρ 
- - lol lal ,ὔ id 
κύριος ὁ ἄνθρωπος τῆς διατάξεως τῆς τοῦ σωτῆρος" ἐπείπερ ὁ μὲν δεσπότης, 
ὁ δὲ ὑπήκοος. 
23. Αἱ δὲ νηοτεῖδι ὑμῶν μὴ ECTWCAN μετὰ τῶν ὑποκριτῶν, NHCTeyoycl γὰρ 
ἢ ἢ ν᾿ ͵ “ 1, 3 \ , , ᾽ν 
AeyTépa ολβϑάτων καὶ πέμπτη. Ὑμεῖς δὲ ἢ τὰς πέντε NHCTEYCATE ἡμέρας, εἰ 
, ‘ , a \ / c ,ὔ an nr 
TETPAAA KAl TIAPACKEYHN: ὅτε TH μὲν τετράδι ἡ κρίσις ἐξῆλθεν ἡ κατὰ τοῦ 
\ - lol 
κυρίου, Ἰούδα χρήμασιν ἐπαγγειλαμένου τὴν προδοσίαν: τῇ δὲ παρασκευῇ, 
a ΕΣ c ͵ > ee / \ \ rn « \ , , 
ὅτι ἔπαθεν ὁ κύριος ἐν αὐτῇ πάθος τὸ διὰ σταυροῦ ὑπὸ ἸΠ]οντίου ἸΠιλάτου. 
Ν , 
τὸ σάββατον μέντοι καὶ τὴν κυριακὴν ἑορτάζετε, ὅτι τὸ μὲν δημιουργίας 
> \ «ς / \ \ > , a \ / , c fal ͵ 
ἐστὶν ὑπόμνημα, τὸ δὲ ἀναστάσεως. ἕν δὲ μόνον σάββατον ὑμῖν φυλακτέον 
> “ tal 5 n \ “ r lA Ὁ ad , “-“ 5 Ε 
ἐν ὕλῳ τῷ ἐνιαυτῷ, τὸ τῆς τοῦ κυρίου ταφῆς, ὅπερ νηστεύειν προσῆκεν, ἀλλ 
= \ id A a 
οὐχ ἑορτάζειν. ἐν ὕσῳ yap ὁ δημιουργὸς ὑπὸ γῆν τυγχάνει, ἰσχυρότερον τὸ 
fal lal \ \ - [ἡ a 
περὶ αὐτοῦ πένθος τῆς κατὰ τὴν δημιουργίαν χαρᾶς, ὅτι ὁ δημιουργὸς τῶν 
« rn , , Ἂν 3 , / 
ἑαυτοῦ δημιουργημάτων φύσει τε Kal ἀξίᾳ τιμιώτερος. 
a ' c c ε , rn 
24. Ὅταν δὲ TpoceyyHcOe, MH γίνεοθε ὡς οἱ ὑποκριταί, ἀλλ᾽ ὧς ὁ κύριος ἡμῖν 
ἐν τῷ eyarreAiw διετάξατο, οὕτω προςεύχεοθε: Πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς OYPANOIC, 
ATIACOHT@ τὸ ὀνομᾶ coy’ ἐλθέτω ἢ βδειλείὰ COY’ γενηθήτω τὸ θέλημᾶ COY ὧς 
ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιούειον δὸς ἡμῖν Ἵημερον᾽ 
kal ἄφεο ἡμῖν τὰ ὀφειλήματα ἡμῶν, ὡς καὶ ἡμεῖς ἀφίεμεν τοῖος ὀφειλέτδις 
ἡμῶν" κἀὶ μὴ εἰςενέγκης HMAC εἰς πειρδομόν, ἀλλὰ ῥῦοδι HMAC ἀπὸ τοῦ πονηροῦ" 
ὅτι cof¥ ἐοτιν ἡ βασιλεία εἶς τοὺς δἰῶνδο: ἀμήν. Τρὶς τῆς ἡμέρας οὕτω 
προςεΐχεοθε, προπαρασκευάζοντες ἑαυτοὺς ἀξίους τῆς υἱοθεσίας τοῦ πατρός, 
ἵνα μή, ἀναξίως ὑμῶν αὐτὸν πατέρα καλούντων, ὀνειδισθῆτε ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, ὡς 
καὶ ὁ Ἰσραὴλ 6 ποτε πρωτότοκος υἱὸς ἤκουσεν ὅτι Ei πατήρ εἰμι ἐγώ, 
fol > ε / A > , , 5» lel > ε / , 
ποῦ ἐστιν ἡ δόξα μου; καὶ εἰ κύριός εἰμι, ποῦ ἐστιν ὁ φόβος μου; δόξα 
\ c ‘ an a 
yap πατέρων ὁσιότης παίδων καὶ τιμὴ δεσποτῶν οἰκετῶν φόβος, ὥσπερ οὖν 
τὸ ἐ ’ὔ 10 / \ 5 / “) A » id na , / WN lal \ 
ναντίον ἀδοξία καὶ ἀναρχία ἰ ὑμᾶς γάρ, φησί, βλασφημεῖται τὸ 
ὄνομά μου ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσι. 
25. Τίνεσθε δὲ πάντοτε εὐχάριστοι, ὡς πιστοὶ καὶ εὐγνώμονες δοῦλοι" 
περὶ μὲν τῆς eyyapictiac οὕτω λέγοντες: Εὐὐχὰριοτοῦμέν col, TATEP ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ 
τῆς Ζωῆς, εἷς érNapicac ἡμῖν διὰ Ἰηοοῦ τοῦ παιδός coy, δ οὗ καὶ τὰ πάντα 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 31 


ἐποίησας καὶ τῶν ὅλων Tpovoeis, ὃν Kal ἀπέστειλας ἐπὶ σωτηρίᾳ τῇ ἡμε- 
τέρᾳ γενέσθαι ἄνθρωπον, ὃν καὶ συνεχώρησας παθεῖν καὶ ἀποθανεῖν, ὃν καὶ 
ἀναστήσας εὐδόκησας δοξάσαι καὶ ἐκάθισας ἐκ δεξιῶν σου, δι’ οὗ καὶ ἐπηγγείλω 
ἡμῖν τὴν ἀνάστασιν τῶν νεκρῶν. ΣΥ, δλέσποτὰ πὰντοκρᾶτορ, θεὲ αἰώνιε, ὥςπερ 
HN τοῦτο AIECKOPTIICMENON καὶ CYNAYOEN ἐγένετο εἷς ἄρτος, οὕτω εγνάγαγέ COY THN 
EKKAHCIAN ἀπὸ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς εἰς CHN βδοιλείαν. Ἔτι εὐχδριοτοῦμεν, 
πᾶτερ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τοῦ τιμίου αἵματος ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ ἐκχυθέντος ὑπὲρ 
ἡμῶν καὶ τοῦ τιμίου σώματος, οὗ καὶ ἀντίτυπα ταῦτα ἐπιτελοῦμεν, αὐτοῦ 
διαταξαμένου ἡμῖν καταγγέλλειν τὸν αὐτοῦ θάνατον" Ai αὐτοῦ rap cor [7 ἢ 
ΔΥνδμι.] Kal ἢ AdZA εἰς τοὺς δἰῶνδο" ἀμήν. Mnadeic δὲ ἐσθιέτω ἐξ αὐτῶν 
τῶν ἀμυήτων, ἀλλὰ μόνοι οἱ Βεβάπτιομένοι εἰς τὸν τοῦ Χριοτοῦ θάνατον. εἰ 
δέ τις ἀμύητος κρύψας ἑαυτὸν μεταλάβῃ, κρίμα αἰώνιον φάγεται, ὅτι μὴ 
ὧν τῆς εἰς Χριστὸν πίστεως μετέλαβεν ὧν οὐ θέμις, εἰς τιμωρίαν ἑαυτοῦ: 
εἰ δέ τις κατὰ ἄγνοιαν μεταλάβοι, τοῦτον τάχιον στοιχειώσαντες μυήσατε, 
ὅπως μὴ καταφρονητὴς ἐξέλθοι. 

26. Λλετὰ δὲ τὴν μετάληψιν οὕτως eyyapictHcate’ Eyyapictofmen col, ὁ θεὺς 
καὶ TATHP Ἰησοῦ τοῦ σωτῆρος ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τοῦ Arioy ὀνόματός coy, οὐ KATE- 
CKHN@CAC ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ὑπὲρ τῆς γνώσεως κἀὶ πίοτεως καὶ ἀγάπης καὶ ABANA- 
ciac, ἧς ἔδωκας ἡμῖν διὰ “lHcoY τοῦ πδιδός coy. Σύ, δέσποτα TANTOKPATOP, ὁ 
θεὸς τῶν ὅλων, EKTICAC τὸν KOCMON κἀὶ τὰ ἐν ἀγτῷ δι αὐτοῦ, καὶ νόμον 
κατεφύτευσας ἐν ταῖς ψυχαῖς ἡμῶν, καὶ τὰ πρὸς μετάληψιν προεγτρέπιολς 
ἀνθρώποις: ὁ θεὸς τῶν ἁγίων καὶ ἀμέμπτων πατέρων ἡμῶν, ᾿Αβραὰμ καὶ 
Ἰσαὰκ καὶ Ἰακώβ, τῶν πιστῶν δούλων cov: ὁ λγνάτὸς θεύς, 6 πιστὸς καὶ 
ἀληθινὸς καὶ ἀψευδὴς ἐν ταῖς ἐπαγγελίαις: ὁ ἀποστείλας ἐπὶ γῆς Ἰησοῦν 
τὸν Χριστόν σου ἀνθρώποις συναναστραφῆναι ὡς ἄνθρωπον, θεὸν ὄντα λόγον 
καὶ ἄνθρωπον, καὶ τὴν πλάνην πρόρριζον ἀνελεῖν: αὐτὸς καὶ νῦν δι’ αὐτοῦ 
Μνήσθητι τῆς AriAC COY EKKAHCIAC ταύτης, ἣν περιεποιήσω τῷ τιμίῳ αἵματι 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ σου, καὶ ῥδῦολι AYTHN ἀπὸ πάντός πονηροῦ Kal τελείωςον ayTHN 
ἐν TH ἀγάπη Coy καὶ τῇ ἀληθείᾳ σου, KAI ογνάᾶγαγε TIANTAC HMAC εἰς τὴν CHN 
Βδοιλείαν, HN ἡτοίμδοδλς ayTH. Mapanadar docannd τῷ γίῷ AaBid, εὐλογημένος 
ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου, θεὸς κύριος ὁ ἐπιφανεὶς ἡμῖν ἐν σαρκί. 
Er tic ἅγιος, προςερχέοθω: εἰ δέ TIC οὐκ ἔστι, γινέσθω διὰ μετάνοίδς, ᾿Επιτρέ- 
πετε δὲ καὶ τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις ὑμῶν εΥχλριετεῖν. 

27. Περὶ δὲ τοῦ μύρου οὕτως εὐχαριστήσατε' Εὐχαριστοῦμέν σοι, θεὲ 
δημιουργὲ τῶν ὅλων, καὶ ὑπὲρ τῆς εὐωδίας τοῦ μύρου, καὶ ὑπὲρ τοῦ 
ἀθανάτου αἰῶνος οὗ ἐγνώριολς ἡμῖν διὰ “lHcof τοῦ πλιλός coy’ ὅτι cof ἐστιν 
H δόξὰ κἀὶ H AYNAMIC EIC τοὺς δἰῶνδο" ἀμήν. 

“Oc ἐᾶν ἐλθὼν οὕτως εὐχαριστῇ, προοσλέξλεθε aYTON WC Χριστοῦ μαθητήν" 
ἐὰν δὲ ἄλλην AIAAYHN KHPYCCH παρ᾽ ἣν ὑμῖν παρέδωκεν ὁ Χριστὸς δι’ ἡμῶν, 
τῷ τοιοήτῳ μὴ συγχωρεῖτε εὐχαριστεῖν. ὑβρίζει γὰρ ὁ τοιοῦτος τὸν θεόν, 
ἤπερ δοξάζει. 

28. Πᾶς δὲ ὁ ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ὑμᾶς, AOKIMACBEIC, οὕτω δεχέσθω" CYNECIN γὰρ 


Lag. μετα- 
λάβοι 


Lag. om. σου 


Lag. ὁ κτίσας 
Lag. om. ἐν 
Lag. εὐτρέ- 
πισας 


Lag. Bac. σου 
Lag. αὐτήν 


Lag. δια- 
γνῶναι 


Lag. adds 
δέοντα 
hefore πρὸς 


Lag. ταμιείων 


Lag. θερμῶν, 
ἄρτων 
Lag. κεράμιον 


Lag. 7 ip. 


Lag. om. 6 


Lag. 7 after 
ὑμῶν 


Lag. μέγ. Bao. 


Lag. brackets 
καὶ.. αὐτοῖς 


Lag. om, 
᾿Ιησοῦς 


ϑ 
bo 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


ἔχετε, καὶ δύνασθε γνῶναι δεξιὰν H ApicTepAN καὶ διακρῖναι ψευδοδιδασκάλους 
διδασκάλων. ᾿Ελθόντι μέντοι τῷ διδασκάλῳ ἐκ ψυχῆς ἐπιχορηγήσατε τὰ δέ- 
ovta’ τῷ δὲ ψευδοδιδασκάλῳ, δώσετε μὲν τὰ πρὸς τὴν χρείαν, οὐ παραδέξεσθε 
δὲ αὐτοῦ τὴν πλάνην, οὔτε μὴν συμπροσεύξησθε αὐτῷ, ἵνα μὴ συμμιανθῆτε 
αὐτῷ. Πᾶς προφήτης ἀληθινὸς ἢ διδάσκαλος ἐρχόμενος πρὸς ὑμᾶς δξιός ἐστι 
τῆς τροφῆς ὧς ἐργᾶτης λόγου δικαιοσύνης. 

20, Πάρον ἀπδρυὴν γεννημάτων ληνοῦ, ἅλωνος, βοῶν TE KAI προβάτων 
λώρειο τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν, ἵνα εὐλογηθῶσιν αἱ ἀποθῆκαι τῶν ταμείων σου καὶ 
τὰ ἐκφόρια τῆς γῆς σου, καὶ στηριχθῆς σίτῳ καὶ οἴνῳ καὶ ἐλαίῳ, καὶ 
αὐξηθῇ τὰ βουκόλια τῶν βοῶν σου καὶ τὰ ποίμνια τῶν προβάτων σου" 
πᾶσαν δεκάτην δώσεις τῷ ὀρφανῷ καὶ τῇ χήρᾳ, τῷ πτωχῷ καὶ τῷ προσ- 
ηλύτῳ. Πᾶοὰν ἀπάρχὴν ἄρτων θερμῶν, κερὰμίογ οἴνου ἢ ἐλδίογ ἢ μέλιτος 
ἢ ἀκροδρύων, σταφυλῆς ἢ τῶν ἄλλων τὴν ἀπάρχὴν δώσεις τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν' 
ἀργυρίου δὲ καὶ IMATICMOY KAI TIANTOC κτήματος τῷ ὀρφανῷ καὶ τῇ χήρᾳ. 

30. Τὴν ἀναστάσιμον τοῦ Kyploy ἡμέραν, τὴν KYPIAKHN φαμεν, οὐνέρχεοθε 
ἀδιαλείπτως, EYYAPICTOYNTEC τῷ θεῷ Kal ἐξομολογούμενοι ἐφ᾽ οἷς εὐηργέτησεν 
ἡμᾶς ὁ θεὸς διὰ Χριστοῦ ῥυσάμενος ἀγνοίας, πλάνης, δεσμῶν" ὅπως ἄμεμπτος 
ἢ ἢ θγοία ὑμῶν καὶ εὐανάφορος θεῷ, τῷ εἰπόντι περὶ τῆς οἰκουμενικῆς 
αὐτοῦ ἐκκλησίας ὅτι ἜΝ πὰντὶ τόπῳ προςενεχθήςεταί μοὶ θυμίαμα καὶ θγοία 
καθαρά: ὅτι βδειλεὴὺς μέγας ἐγώ εἰμι, λέγει κύριος παντοκράτωρ, κἀὶ τὸ ONOMA 
MOY θδλγμδοτὸν ἐν τοῖς ἐθνεοιν. 

31. Tlpoyeipicacbe δὲ ἐπιοκόπογες Azloyc τοῦ Kyploy καὶ πρεσβυτέρους, καὶ 
διακόνογο, ANApac εὐλαβεῖς, δικαίους, πρδεῖο, ἀφιλάργύρογο, φιλάλήθεις, δεδοκι- 
macménoyc, ὁσίους, ἀπροσωπολήπτους, δυναμένους διδάσκειν τὸν λόγον τῆς 
εὐσεβείας, ὀρθοτομοῦντας ἐν τοῖς τοῦ κυρίου δόγμασιν. Ὑμεῖς δὲ τιμᾶτε 
TOYTOYC ὡς πατέρας, ὡς κυρίους, ὡς εὐεργέτας, ὡς τοῦ εὖ εἶναι αἰτίους. 

Ἐλέγχετε δὲ δλλήλογο μὴ ἐν ὀργη, AAN ἐν μακροθυμίᾳ μετὰ χρηστότητος 
καὶ εἰρήνης. TIANTA τὰ προοτετάγμένὰ YMIN ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου φγλᾶξατε. Γρηγο- 
peite ὑπὲρ τῆς ζωῆς ὑμῶν. “Ectacan δὶ ὀσφύες ὑμῶν περιεζωομένδι κἀὶ οἱ 
λύχνοι KAIGMENO!, καὶ ὑμεῖς ὅμοιοι ἀνθρώποιο προσδεχομένοις τὸν κύριον ἑδυτῶν 
πότε Hizel, ἑσπέρας ἢ πρωὶ ἢ ἀλεκτοροφωνίας ἢ μεσονυκτίου" κ᾽ γὰρ Cpa oy 
TIPOCAOK@CIN, ἐλεύσεται ὁ κύριος, καὶ ἐὰν αὐτῷ ἀνοίξωσι, μακάριοι οἱ δοῦλοι 
ἐκεῖνοι, ὅτι εὑρέθησαν ηρηγοροῦντες" ὅτι περιζώσεται καὶ ἀνακλινεῖ αὐτοὺς 
καὶ παρελθὼν διακονήσει αὐτοῖς. νήφετε οὖν καὶ προσεύχεσθε μὴ ὑπνῶσαι 
εἰς θάνατον" οΥ̓ γὰρ ὀνήςει ὑμᾶς τὰ πρότερὰ κἀτορθώμδτα, ἐὰν εἰς τὰ ἐοχὰτὰ 
ὑμῶν ATIOTIAANHOATE τῆς πίοτεως τῆς AAHOOYc. 

32. Ἔν γὰρ taic ἐοχᾶτδις ἡμέρδις TAHOYNOHCONTAI οἱ ψευδοπροφῆτδι Kal οἱ 
Oopeic τοῦ λόγου, καὶ ctTpadricontal τὰ πρόβατὰ εἷς AYKOYC κἀὶ ἢ ἀγάπη εἰῪ 
Micoc’ πληθγνθείοης γὰρ τῆς ἀνομίας ψυγήσεται ἡ ἀγάπη τῶν πολλῶν, MICHCOYCI 
γὰρ δλλήλογο οὗ ἄνθρωποι καὶ λιώξογοι Kal προλώφογοι. Καὶ τότε ANHceTat 
ὁ κοομοπλᾶνος, 6 τῆς ἀληθείας ἐχθρός, ὁ τοῦ ψεύδους προστάτης, ὃν ὁ 
κύριος ᾿Ιησοῦς ἀνελεῖ τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ, ὁ διὰ χειλέων 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 33 


, > a \ \ , an ' 
ἀναιρῶν ἀσεβῆ" καὶ πολλοὶ CKANAAAICOHCONTAL ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ, οἱ δὲ ὑπομείναντες 
᾽ ‘ ’ ᾿ a - fal rn 
εἰς τέλος, οὗτοι CWAHCONTAI. Kal τότε cbANHCETAl TO CHMEION τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 
> I 4 > a “- ° , ‘ 
ἀνθρώπου ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, εἶτα Φωνὴ cAdAmiproc ἔσται δι’ ἀρχαγγέλου καὶ 
METAZY ANABIOCIC τῶν κεκοιμημένων" Kal τότε Hzel ὁ κύριος κἀὶ πάντες οἱ 
ἅγιοι MET ayTOY ἐν συσσεισμῷ ἐπάνω τῶν νεφελῶν μετ᾽ ἀγγέλων δυνάμεως 
᾽ a“ > A , , - A / , \ 
αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ θρόνου βασιλείας κατακρῖναι τὸν κοσμοπλάνον διάβολον καὶ 
᾽ -“" - a 
ἀποδοῦναι ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὴν πρᾶξιν αὐτοῦ. τότε ἀπελεύσονται οἱ μὲν 
πονηροὶ εἰς αἰώνιον κόλασιν, οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι πορεύσονται εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, 
tl > tal “Δ ᾽ \ ’ > \ = , uv \ » \ 
κληρονομοῦντες ἐκεῖνα, ἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδε Kal οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσε Kal ἐπὶ 
καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη, ἃ ἡτοίμασεν ὁ θεὸς τοῖς ἀγαπῶσιν αὐτόν" 
καὶ χαρήσονται ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ τῇ ἐν Χριστῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ. κτὲ. 


We pass on to the general quotations and references which are found in 
the early Fathers. 


Ascensio Vatis Isaiae. [End of saec. 1. 


Dillmann’s Translation (iii. 21). 

“Et deinde sub ejus appropinquationem missam facient discipuli ejus 
doctrinam duodecim Apostolorum et fidem et caritatem suam et sanctimoniam 
suam, et erit contentio multa de adventu ejus et de appropinquatione ejus.” 

(iv. 2,3.) “Descendet Berial angelus magnus rex hujus mundi cui domi- 
natur ex quo exstat et descendet e firmamento suo in specie hominis regis 
iniquitatis matricidae, hic est rex hujus mundi, et plantam quam plantaverunt 
duodecim Apostoli Dilecti persequetur ; e duodecim in manum ejus tradetur.” 

Cf. Διδὲ xvi. 4....... Kal διώξουσι........«καὶ ἡ yn παραδοθήσεται εἰς χεῖρας 
αὐτοῦ. 

(iv. 6.) “Et omnia quae voluerit faciet in mundo; faciet et loquetur 
Dilecti instar.” 

Cf. Ad. xvi. 4, φανήσεται 6 κοσμοπλανὴς ὡς υἱὸς θεοῦ. 

The writer of these passages was a Christian’ interpolating a Jewish Apoca- 
lypse ; the complete work is now extant only in Ethiopic. As the quotation 
shews him expecting the World-deceiver under the form of Nero returning 
from his hiding-place in Parthia, he cannot be assigned to a very late date. It 
is interesting to find that in another passage he laments the decline of prophecy 
under the influence of the lust for power and love of gain in the Church. 

11, 27. “Nee erunt in illis diebus prophetae multi nee qui loquentur 
res confirmatas nisi singuli singulis locis, &c.” 


The Epistle of Jude. [End of sae. 1. 7] 


vy. 22, 23. Καὶ o¥c μὲν ἐλέγχετε διακρινομένους.........«οὖς δὲ EAEATE ἐν φόβῳ. 
Cf. Διδ. ii. 7, oc μὲν ἐλέγξεις, [oye δὲ ἐλεήσειο], 


1 Dillmann, Proleg. xiii., ‘‘maxime apud Judaicam vel Essenicam Christianorum partem.”’ 


ΠΣ a 


Lag. ὁ δὲ 
ὑπομείνας 
Lag. οὗτος 
σωθήσεται 
Lag. ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ 
ἀνθρώπου 


34 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


v. 12. οὗτοί εἰσιν of ἐν ταῖς ἀγάπαις ὑμῶν σπιλάδες συνευωχούμενοι, 
ἀφόβως ἑαυτοὺς ποιμαίνοντες. , 

Cf. Διδ. xi. 9, καὶ πᾶς προφήτης ὁρίζων τράπεζαν κτὲ. 

v. 17. μνήσθητε τῶν ῥημάτων τῶν προειρημένων ὑπὸ τῶν ἀποστόλων 
τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ ὅτι ἔλεγον ὑμῖν “En ἐσχάτου χρόνου 
ἔσονται ἐμπαῖκται κτὲ. 

Cf. Διδ. xvi. 3. 

For the connexion between these passages and the Teaching see note 
on Aco. x1. 9, 


Ps.-Clement. Ep. vi. [Saec. u.] 


Although we may not be able to mark direct quotations from the Teaching 
in this book, there are some passages which are so suggestively like memories 
of the Teaching as to make us satisfied that the author of the homily was 
acquainted with the book of discipline: e.g, 


=55 ε τ - a in a a > , \ > 

2 Clem. ili. ἡμεῖς of ζῶντες τοῖς νεκροῖς θεοῖς ov θύομεν Kal ov προσ- 

a - “ > > » > τὰ fal \ 7 lal 3. / 
κυνοῦμεν αὐτοῖς ἀλλ᾽ ἔγνωμεν OL αὐτοῦ τὸν πατέρα τῆς ἀληθείας. 

Cf Ad. vi. 8, λατρεία γάρ ἐστι θεῶν νεκρῶν. 

2 Clem. iv. ἐν τῷ γὰρ ἐπιθυμεῖν ὑμᾶς κτήσασθαι αὐτὰ ἀποπίπτομεν τῆς 
ὁλοῦ THe Aikaiac, and 2 Clem. vii. THN ὁδὸν τὴν εὐθεῖδν. 

Cf, Διδ. iii. 3, μὴ γίνου ἐπιθυμητής. 

2 Clem. xvii. μὴ ἀντιπαρελκώμεθα ἀπὸ τῶν κοομικῶν ἐπιθγμιῶν, ἀλλὰ 
TTYKNOTEPON προςερχύμενοι πειρώμεθα προκόπτειν ἐν ταῖς ἐντολαῖς τοῦ κυρίου. 

Cf, Avd. 1. 4, ἀπέχου τῶν σαρκικῶν καὶ σωματικῶν (1. κοομικῶν) ἐπι- 
θυμιῶν and xvi. 2, πγκνῶς AE ογνάχθήςεοθε ἕξητοῦντες κτέ. 

2 Clem. xvii. Cf the singular expression πανθαμαρτωλὸς with πανθα- 
μάρτητος of the Διδαχή c. v. 2. We shall shew that the word in the 
Teaching must have been coined for the occasion. 

2 Clem. xx. τῷ μόνῳ θεῷ, ἀοράτῳ πατρὶ τῆς ἀληθείας, τῷ ἐξαποστείλαντι 
ἡμῖν τὸν σωτῆρα καὶ ἀρχηγὸν τῆς ἀφθαρσίας, δι’ οὗ καὶ Edanépwcen ἡμῖν 
THN δλήθειδν KAI τὴν ETIOYPANION ζωήν, AYT@ H AGZA εἰς TOYC δἰῶνδλς τῶν δἰώνων. 
ἀμήν. 

ὃ = 9 , lol ,ὔ , e lal ε ‘ nn “ ‘ 

Cf. Ad. ix. 2, εὐχαριστοῦμέν σοι, πάτερ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τῆς zwHc καὶ 
γνώςεως Hc ἐγνώρισας ἡμῖν διὰ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ παιδός cou: co! ἡ AOzZA εἰς τοὺς 


δἰῶνδς. 


The examination of the previous passages will shew that the writer of 
the homily may have been acquainted with the Teaching. The remi- 
niscences are seen in the language and expressions, and in the sequence 
of ideas, as in the last passage quoted, where God is addressed in doxology 
because of the illumination granted to man through Jesus Christ. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 35 


Now if we have sufficient evidence to shew cumulatively an acquaint- 
ance with the Teaching, that is to say if we have, over and above the 
ideas and language belonging to a given period, such identities of thought 
and expression as go beyond accidental coincidence, then we must go a 
step further and note that these coincidences are not confined to the doctrine 
of the Two Ways but embrace also the liturgical (c. ix.) and eschatological 
(c. xvi.) portions of the Teaching; acquaintance is also probable with the 
seldom-quoted sixth chapter of the Teaching; and we therefore infer that 
the writer of the second Epistle of Clement was acquainted with the whole 
of the Teaching in a form not very different, if it differed at all, from 
our text. Let us then ask one more question: did the Teaching used by 
Ps.-Clement contain the passage omitted in Barnabas and the Latin Version 
ας 3—ii 1)? To determine this point turn to ὁ. xiii. of the Epistle; τὰ 
ἔθνη yap ἀκούοντα ἐκ τοῦ στόματος ἡμῶν τὰ λόγια τοῦ θεοῦ ὡς καλὰ Kai 
μεγάλα θαυμάξει: ἔπειτα καταμαθόντα τὰ ἔργα ἡμῶν ὅτι οὐκ ἔστιν ἄξια 
τῶν ῥημάτων ὧν λέγομεν, ἔνθεν εἰς βλασφημίαν τρέπονται λέγοντες εἶναι 
μῦθόν τινα καὶ πλάνην: brav γὰρ ἀκούσωσι Tap ἡμῶν ὅτι λέγει ὁ θεός 
Οὐ χάρις ὑμῖν εἰ ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας ὑμᾶς, ἀλλὰ χάρις ὑμῖν εἰ 
ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἐχθροὺς καὶ τοὺς μισοῦντας ὑμᾶς, ταῦτα ὅταν ἀκούσωσι, 
θαυμάξουσι τὴν ὑπερβολὴν τῆς ἀγαθότητος. 

It seems likely that the instruction here given to the enquiring Gentile 
is a fixed form of oral tradition, in other words a Διδαχὴ τοῖς ἔθνεσιν. 
It is true that this communication is spoken of as being a part of the 
λόγια τοῦ θεοῦ, a term which would most commonly be taken to mean a 
collection of the sayings of Jesus; but even then it is not a little curious 
that the portion of the λόγια in discussion is precisely that which the 
Teaching of the Apostles has appropriated. Nor should we forget that the 
Διδαχή comes very near calling itself by the name of λόγια when it quotes 
from Isaiah the words τρέμων τοὺς λόγους. The pseudo-Athanasius in the 
Syntagma Doctrinae actually quotes the passage as τὰ λόγια, and the 
same reading is given in the Acts of Paul and Thecla’; may it not be 
an early term for the Teaching? We infer then that the writer of the 
epistle knew the whole of the Teaching as we have it in the Jerusalem MS. 
Now this epistle, or rather homily, was certainly read in the Corinthian 
Church, as the frequent reference to the Isthmian games plainly shews: 
and it is generally referred to the latter part of the second century. At 
this period, therefore, the Teaching was known in Corinth. 


1 In these Acts as edited by Grabe in his Spicilegiwm will be found the following sentence. 
(Gr. i. 96.) μακάριοι of τρέμοντες τὰ λόγια τοῦ θεοῦ ὅτι αὐτοὶ παρακληθήσονται. The expression 
is based upon the passage in Isaiah which the Teaching quotes in iii. 8 καὶ τρέμων τοὺς λόγους 
διαπαντὸς οὖς ἤκουσας. What is noticeable is that the variant τὰ λόγια for τοὺς λόγους is found 
also in Athanasius, Syntagma Doctr., where the reference is certainly to the Teaching. 

oe 


~ 


36 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Justin Martyr. [Saec. 11.] 


The next author whom we shall question as to his acquaintance with the 
Teaching is Justin Martyr. It is doubtful whether we have any direct quotation 
from the Teaching in Justin; at the same time there is no other early writer 
who contributes so much to the elucidation of the difficult passages of the 
Teaching. The two keys to these are taken from the hands of Barnabas 
and Justin. Of Barnabas no question arises nor do I think any could arise 
as to his acquaintance with the Teaching even if the last four chapters were 
subtracted from the Epistle. In the case of Justin there are some similarities 
in the argument to the imagined case of a truncated Barnabas. We have 
suspicions which might easily turn into certainties. The structure of the 
first Apology with its ground-plan of Christian ethics leading to Christian 
baptism, preceded by fasting and followed by a partaking of food which 
is explained to have relation to the prophecy in Malachi 1. 10—12', is very 
hike to the Teaching. So is the second Apology with its borrowed story 
of Hercules making the choice of the two ways. But it is from the Dialogue 
with Trypho that the most light comes on the Teaching: nor is the reason 
difficult to find; the Teaching is a Jewish-Christian book, and can best be 
illustrated by a discussion between a Christian and a Jew. Hence, as we 
shall see bye and bye, the obscure passages of the Teaching become in- 
telligible as soon as we stand in the circumference of the circle of Jewish 
ideas of the first two centuries. The following passage should be noted as 
evidence of a settled Teaching existing in Justin’s time though perhaps in 
various forms subject to party modifications. 

Justin, Dial. 35. Kal ὁ Τρύφων: Kai μὴν πολλοὺς τῶν τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν 
λεγόντων ὁμολογεῖν καὶ λεγομένων Χριστιανῶν πυνθάνομαι ἐσθίειν τὰ εἰδω- 
λόθυτα καὶ μηδὲν ἐκ τούτου βλάπτεσθαι λέγειν. 

Κἀγὼ ἀπεκρινάμην" Καὶ ἐκ τοῦ τοιούτους εἶναι ἄνδρας ὁμολογοῦντας ἑαυτοὺς 
εἶναι Χριστιανοὺς καὶ τὸν σταυρωθέντα ᾿Ιησοῦν ὁμολογεῖν καὶ κύριον καὶ 
Χριστὸν καὶ μὴ τὰ ἐκείνου διδάγματα διδάσκοντες ἀλλὰ τὰ ὑπὸ τῶν τῆς πλάνης 
πνευμάτων, ἡμεῖς, οἱ τῆς ἀληθινῆς Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ καὶ καθαρᾶς διδασκαλίας 
μαθηταί, πιστότεροι καὶ βεβαιότεροι γινόμεθα ἐν τῇ ἐλπίδι τῇ κατηγγελμένῃ 
ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ. 

Here Justin asserts positively that the abstinence from idol-meats is a 
characteristic of the pure and genuine teaching, and that it is an ordinance 
of the Lord himself. Certainly no such precept is found in the Gospel, and 
the simplest solution is to assume that it was in the Διδαχὴ τοῦ Κυρίου. 
Justin’s Teaching would thus have had a similar title to the longer form 
in the MS. and would have contained the sixth chapter as we have it. In 
the same chapter of the Dialogue, Justin states that the Lord is declared 


1 Quoted four times in the Dialogue with Trypho. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 37 


διά τε τῶν ἔργων Kal τῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ Kal νῦν γινομένων δυνάμεων 
καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν τῆς διδαχῆς λόγων καὶ ἀπὸ τῶν προφητευθεισῶν εἰς αὐτὸν 
προφητειῶν. 

A still more forcible illustration is found in Justin’s discussion of the 
Curse that is attached to the name of Christ in ec. 111 of the Dialogue with 
Trypho where he maintains that Christ was not cursed by the law, but he 
was only making it clear that he was going to save those who did not depart 
from their faith: an important passage for the interpretation of the last 
chapter of the Teaching, and, I think, a memory of it. 

Justin, Dial. 111. ὁ οὖν παθητὸς ἡμῶν καὶ σταυρωθεὶς Χριστὸς ov 
KATHPAGH ὑπὸ τοῦ νόμου, ἀλλὰ μόνος οὦςειν TOYC MH ἀφιοτἀμένογο τῆς πίοτεως 
αὐτοῦ ἐδήλου. 


Cf. Aud. xvi. 5. 


Hermas. [Latter half of second century ?] 


Vis. ili, 4°. ᾿Αποκαλυφθήσεται διὰ τοὺς Alyyyoye τοὺς διαλογιζομένους 
ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν εἰ ἀρὰ EcTi TAYTA H οὐκ ECTIN. 

Cf. Acd. iv. 4. Οὐ λδιψγχήςεις πότερον Ectal H οὐκ ἔοτδι. 

Mand. ii. Ἐργάζου τὸ ἀγαθόν, καὶ ἐκ τῶν κόπων σου ὧν ὁ θεὸς δίδωσίν 

-“ id , , id fal \ , ΄ lol a , \ fe 
σοι πᾶσιν ὑστερουμένοις δίδου ἁπλῶς μὴ διστάζων τίνι δῷς ἢ τίνι μὴ δῷς" 
πᾶσιν δίδου: πᾶσιν γὰρ ὁ θεὸς λίδλοοθαι θέλει ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων δωρημάτων: οἱ 

φ , ? , , fal A ‘ ' » ‘ > , cf ‘\ 
οὖν λαμβάνοντες ἀποδώσουσιν λόγον τῷ θεῷ Ald τί EAABON καὶ εἰς TI οἱ μὲν 
γὰρ λαμβάνοντες θλιβόμενοι οὐ δικασθήσονται, οἱ δὲ ἐν ὑποκρίσει λαμ- 
βάνοντες TicoycIN δίκην. ὁ OYN διλοὴὺς ἀθῶδσς ECTIN' ὡς γὰρ ἔλαβε παρὰ 

/ A / ‘ « fal ᾽ \ > / \ , ΄ 
κυρίου τὴν διακονίαν τελέσαι, ἁπλῶς αὐτὴν ἐτέλεσεν μηδὲν διακρίνων τίνι 

σι a \ a 
δῷ ἢ μὴ 86. 

Cf. Διὸς c. 1. 5. 

This passage is quoted from Hermas by Antiochus Hom. (in Migne, Patr. 
Gr. χουν. p. 1183), as follows: καλὸν οὖν ἔστιν ἐκ TOV ἰδίων κόπων ὧν 
ὁ θεὸς ἐπιχορηγεῖ πᾶσιν ὑστερουμένοις παρέχειν ἁπλῶς μηδὲν διστάξζοντα 

lel , \ fol fal ‘ « ἣν δίδ θ θέ > a ἰδί 
τίνι δῷς, τίνι μὴ δῷς: πᾶσιν γὰρ ὁ θεὸς δίδοσθαι θέλει ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων 

, ἣν δ cal - a a / \ a ε Ν ’ ε 
δωρημάτων καὶ μὴ διακρῖναι τίνι δῷ ἢ τίνι μὴ δῷ" ἡ γὰρ διακονία κτέ. 

It is also quoted from Hermas by Clem. Alex. as we shall see 
presently. 

. ’ὔ “Ὁ > / a , Z ’ \ A aA , , 

Mand. vi. 2. Πίστευε τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς δικαιοσύνης: ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ ἀγγέλου 

ca , > cal , > 
τῆς πονηρίας ἀπόστηθι, ὅτι ἡ διδαχὴ αὐτοῦ πονηρά ECTI. 

Cf. Avs. ν. 1. Note also in Mand. vi. the allusions to the ὁδὸς ὀρθή 
and ὁδὸς στρεβλή.. Some slight parallels may be traced in Mand. viii. 

Bryennios also refers largely to the 11th Mandatum, but the resem- 
blances are too general to have much weight. 


1 Quoted by Clem. Alex. Strom, i, 29. 181. 


“7 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


St) 
io 2) 


From what precedes it would seem that Hermas was acquainted with 
the Teaching, and that the portions omitted by Barnabas and the Latin 
Version were in his text: also he knew the gloss which expounds two 
angels who preside over the Two Ways. 


Theophilus of Antioch. [Saec. 11.] 


In his treatise to Autolyeus will be found a passage which is suggestive 
of the earlier portions of the Teaching’. 

Ad Autolycum, τι. 34. 

Οἱ (se. προφῆται) καὶ ἐδίδαξαν ἀπέχεσθαι ἀπὸ τῆς ἀθεμίτου εἰδωλο- 
λατρείας καὶ μοιχείας, καὶ φόνου, πορνείας, κλοπῆς, φιλαργυρίας, ὅρκου 
ψεύδους, ὀργῆς καὶ πάσης ἀσελγείας, καὶ ἀκαθαρσίας: καὶ πάντα ὅσα ἂν 
μὴ βούλεται ἄνθρωπος ἑαυτῷ γίνεσθαι, ἵνα μηδὲ ἄλλῳ ποιῇ. 

The language certainly reminds one of the Teaching, but it is doubtful 
whether an identification can be maintained: Theophilus goes on as if he 
were quoting from the Old Testament, 6 μὲν οὖν θεῖος νόμος κωλύει KTE. 
pone διό φησιν ὁ ἅγιος νόμος: οὐ μοιχεύσεις" οὐ φονεύσεις" οὐ κλέψεις" οὐ 
ψευδομαρτυρήσεις" οὐκ ἐπιθυμήσεις τὴν γυναῖκα τοῦ πλησίον σου. 


Clement of Alexandria. [Saee. ii—iii.] 


Strom. i. xx. ad. fin. (ed. Dind. ii. 83). Οὗτος κλέπτης ὑπὸ τῆς γραφῆς 
εἴρηται: φησὶ γοῦν" υἱὲ, MH FINOY YeyCTHC’ ὁληγεῖ γὰρ TO yef~cma πρὸς THN κλοπῆν. 

Cf. Avéd. i. 5. 

From the Catena of Nicetas. (Ed. Dind. π|. 492.) 

ἸΠοιητέον ἐλεημοσύνας ἀλλὰ μετὰ κρίσεως Kal τοῖς ἀξίοις ἵνα εὕρωμεν 

η nye μετὰ Kp pop 

ἀνταπόδομα παρὰ τοῦ ὑψίστου oval δὲ τοῖς ἔχουσι καὶ ἐν ὑποκρίσει λαμ- 

, Ἄ ͵΄ a ε a \ , 3 7, 
Bavovow, ἢ δυναμένοις βοηθεῖν ἑαυτοῖς καὶ λαμβάνειν παρ᾽ ἑτέρων βουλο- 
μένοις" ὁ γὰρ ἔχων καὶ δι’ ὑπόκρισιν ἢ ἀργίαν λαμβάνων κατακριθήσεται. 

The expression ἐν ὑποκρίσει λαμβάνουσιν shews that this does not involve 
the direct use of the Teaching c. 1. 5, but of Hermas, Mand. ii. 

Quis div. salv. § 29. Οὗτος ὁ τὸν οἶνον τὸ αἷμα τῆς ἀμπέλου τῆς Δαβὶδ 
ἐκχέας ἡμῶν ἐπὶ τὰς τετρωμένας ψυχάς, 

Cf. Διδ, ix. 2, εὐχαριστοῦμέν σοι, πάτερ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τῆς ἁγίας ἀμπέλου 
Δαβὶδ τοῦ παιδός σου. 

Paedagogus, iii. 12. 89, "ἔστιν ἡμῖν ἡ δεκάλογος ἡ διὰ Μωύσέως...... 

, ? Ul ’ > / > , 3 

περιγράφουσα: Οὐ μοιχεύσεις, οὐκ εἰδωλολατρήσεις, οὐ παιδοφθορήσεις, οὐ 
κλέψεις, οὐ ψευδομαρτυρήσεις, τίμα τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα σου καὶ 
τὰ ἀκόλουθα τούτοις. 


1 Noted by Funk, Doctrina, p. xiii. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 39 


Perhaps coloured by the Teaching. 

Paed. ii. 10. 89. ᾿Απηγόρευσε Μωῦσῆς...οὐ πορνεύσεις, οὐ μοιχεύσεις, οὐ 
παιδοφθορήσεις. 

Protrept. x. 108, ‘O δὲ θεὸς νομοθέτης. Τίψες δὲ καὶ οἱ νόμοι ; οὐ φονεύ- 
σεις οὐ μοιχεύσεις" οὐ παιδοφθορήσεις" οὐ κλέψεις" οὐ ψευδομαρτυρήσεις" 
ἀγαπήσεις κύριον τὸν θεόν σου. Ἑϊσὶ δὲ καὶ τούτων τὰ παραπληρώματα, 
λόγιοι νόμοι, καὶ ἅγιοι λόγοι, ἐν αὐταῖς ἐγγραφόμενοι ταῖς καρδίαις" ᾿Αγα- 
πήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς ἑαυτόν καί τῷ τύπτοντί σε εἰς τὴν σιαγόνα 
πάρεχε καὶ τὴν ἄλλην. 

In the last passage the reference to the Teaching is almost certain. Nor 
will it be unnoticed that if so Clement knew the Teaching as we have it 
including the section i. 8—ii, 1, and that he describes the passage by the 
significant term παραπλήρωμα. 


Tertullian. [Saec. 11. 11.] 


The following references to the greatest of the Latin fathers may be 
compared with the Teaching. 

De praescr. haer. xii. “ Pariter audiunt, pariter orant: etiam ethnici si 
supervenerint, sanctum canibus et porcis margaritas, licet non veras, jactabunt.” 

Cf Διὸ: ix. 5. 

Adv. Marc. iv. 1. “Quoniam a solis ortu usque ad occasum glorificatum 
est in nationibus nomen meum et in omni loco sacrificium’* nomine meo offertur 
et sacrificium mundum scilicet simplex oratio de conscientia pura.” 

Cf Aid. xiv. 3. 

The last part of the sentence should also be compared with Acé. iv., οὐ 
προσελεύσῃ ἐπὶ προσευχήν σου ἐν συνειδήσει πονηρᾷ. 

De Spectaculis, 24. Quod autem eieramus, neque dicto, neque visu, neque 
prospectu participare debemus. 

Cf. Acd. π|. 4, μηδὲ θέλε αὐτὰ βλέπειν. 

Further evidence will be necessary, before we can positively assert 
Tertullian’s acquaintance with the Teaching. 


Dionysius of Alexandria, [+ 265.] 

I suppose it is to this writer that we must refer the following extract 
which is to be found in the Parallels of John of Damascus. 

Dam. Par. 674 Διονυσίου: Μηδὲν τῶν cyMBAINONTON χωρὶς ἂν γενέσθαι 
θεοῦ πεπεῖσθαι χρή᾽ εἶναι δὲ ἀγαθὰ παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ πάντα κἂν ἀλγεινὰ ἢ. 

The reference to the Teaching c. iii, 10 may I think be accepted. The 
extract is probably from the treatise De Natura adv. Epicureos of which 
portions are preserved by Eusebius, Praep. Ev. xiv. 


1 We should expect “ incensum.” 


40 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


The Sibylline Oracles and Ps.-Phocylides. 


I have discussed the parallelisms between the Teaching of the Apostles 
and the early poetic Didascalia in the tract on The Teaching of the 
Apostles and the Sibylline Books, with the object. of shewimg the de- 
pendence of the latter (ie. the Sibylline literature) upon the former. Some 
suspicions arise in the investigation that the Doctrine of the Two Ways 
is a Jewish handbook for proselytes and earlier than the Christian era, a 
view which was proposed originally by Dr Taylor and has since been 
elaborated by Harnack in Die Apostellehre und die Jiidischen beiden Wege. 

In giving the most striking of the quotations and references to the 
Sibylline literature I arrange the extracts as in the tract referred to with 
some chronological landmarks borrowed from Alexandre. For the rest, 
reference may be made to the tract itself. 


a. Teaching i. Διδλάχὴ Kyploy διὰ τῶν δώδεκα ἀποστόλων τοῖς ἔθνεσιν. 
ὁλοὶ AYO Elcl κτέ. 
Orac. Sib. vi. 9 [294 A.D.] 
δείξει δ᾽ ἀνθρώποισιν Odoyc, δείξει δὲ κελεύθογς 
οὐρανίους" πάντας δὲ σοφοῖς μύθοισι διδάξει. 
β. Teaching i. ὅὁλοὶ dyo εἰσί, μία τῆς Ζωῆς καὶ μία τοῦ θδνᾶτογ. 
Orac. Sib. vii. 599 [age of Antonines] 
᾽ \ © \ , , n ’ 
αὐτὸς OdoYC προέθηκα AYO, Ζωῆς PANATOY TE, 
Ν , la > ’ \ \ Ue 
καὶ γνώμην προέθηκ᾽ ἀγαθὴν ζωὴν προέλεσθαι. 
γ. Teaching i. πρῶτον, ἀγὰπήςεις τὸν θεὸν τὸν ποιήσαντά ae’ δεύτερον, 
τὸν πλησίον COY ὡς CEAYTON. 


Orac. Sib. vii. 481 [250 Α.}.} 


ἐν κραδίῃ Te ταπεινοφρονεῖν, πικρὰ τέρματα μισεῖν 
καὶ πάντως ἀγὰπάν τὸν TIAHCION ὥςπερ ἑδυτόν᾽ 

καὶ θεὸν ἐκ ψυχῆς φιλέειν, αὐτῷ δὲ λατρεύειν. 
τοὔνεκ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ἡμεῖς, ὁσίης χριστοῖο γενέθλης 
οὐρανίης πεφυώῶτες, ἐπικλεόμεσθα σύναιμοι, 
μνῆστιν εὐφροσύνης ἐπὶ θρησκείῃσιν ἔχοντες, 
εὐσεβίης τε καὶ ἀτρεκίης βαίνοντες ἀταρπούς. 


ὃ. Teaching i. παντὶ τῷ αἰτοῦντί σε δίδου καὶ μὴ ἀπαίτει. πᾶσι γὰρ 
θέλει δίδοσθαι ὁ πατὴρ ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων χἀριομάτων. 
Orac. Sib. ii. 88 = Ps.-Phocyl. 29* 
πλοῦτον ἔχων σὴν χεῖρα πενητεύουσιν ὄρεξον᾽ 
ὧν Tol ἔδωκε θεύς, τούτων χρήζουσι παράσχου. 


1 The dates of these compositions are matters of much uncertainty. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 41 


The sentiment will also be found in the Preaching of Peter with close 


parallelism to the Διδαχή. Cf. Hilgenfeld, Praedicatio Petri, p. 57. 


e. Teaching i. ἱδρωτάτω ἢ ἐλεημοούνη σου εἰς Tas χεῖράς σου, μέχρις 


a - , a 
av γνῷς τίνι δῷς. 


ἡ 


Orac. Sib. τ. 77, ef. Ps.-Phocyl. 38 
πτωχοῖς εὐθὺ δίδου pnt’ αὔριον ἐλθέμεν εἴπῃς" 
ἱλρῶοι σταχύων χειρὶ χρήζοντι παράσχου" 
ὃς δ᾽ ἐλεημοούνην παρέχει, θεῷ οἷδε δανείζειν. 


s. Teaching 11. 
> , > , > , 
οὐ φονεύσεις, οὐ μοιχεύσεις, οὐ παιδοφθορήσεις. 
Ps.-Phocyl. 8 
μήτε γαμοκλοπέειν, μήτ᾽ ἄρσενα κύπριν ὀρίνειν'᾽ 
μήτε δόλους ῥάπτειν pnd αἵματι χεῖρα μιαίνειν. 


Similar conjunctions are found in the Sibyllines, passim. 


€ Teaching ii. ov mareyceic, οὐ capmakeyceic. 
Ps.-Phocyl. 149 


dpmaka MH τεύχειν᾽ μαγικῶν βίβλων ἀπέχεσθαι. 


n. Teaching ii. oY coneyceic τέκνον ἐν φθορᾷ οὐδὲ γεννηθὲν ἀποκτενεῖς. 
Orac. Sib. iii. 762 [165 8.0] 
/ , \ ” v ’ Laer, 
μοιχείαν πεφύλαξο Kal ἄκριτον ἄρσενος εὐνήν 
\ 2 50." / , , ‘ ᾿ 
τὴν δ᾽ ἰδίαν γένναν παίδων τρέφε μηλὲ φονεΥεης. 
Orac. Sib. i. 280 [250 Α.}.] 
a ᾽ > AY ͵ὔ , 
ὅσσαι δ᾽ ἐνὶ γαστέρι φόρτους 
ἐκτρώσκουσιν, ὅσοι τοκετοὺς ῥίπτουσιν ἀθέσμους, 
φαρμακοὶ ἢ καὶ φαρμακίδες. 
Ps.-Phocyl. 184 
μηδὲ γυνὴ φθείροι Βρέφος ἔμβρυον ἔνδοθι γαστρός, 
μηδὲ τεκοῦοὰ κυσὶν ῥίψῃ, καὶ γυψὶν ἕλωρα. 


t. Teaching ii. οὐκ ἐπιορκήςεις, οὐ yeyAomapTypHcelc. 
Orac. Sib. u. 68 = Ps.-Phocyl. 16 

μηδὲ ἐπιορκήοσῃςο, μήτ᾽ ἀγνὼς μήτ᾽ εἰκαῖος. 
Orac. Sib. τι. 64= Ps.-Phocyl. 12 


MAPTYPIHN ψευδῆ φεύγειν, τὰ δίκαια βραβεύειν. 


va. Teaching ii. οὐκ ἔσῃ διγνώμων οὐδὲ dAirAwccoc’ παγὶς γὰρ θανάτου 
διγλωσσία' οὐκ ἔσται ὁ λόγος σου ψεγλῆος...οὐκ ἔσῃ πλεονέκτης οὐδὲ 


ἅρπαξ οὐδὲ κακοήθης οὐδὲ ὑπερήφανος. 


H. 6 


42 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Orac. Sib. iii. 37, 38, 40 [250 a.D.] 
ἀνθρώπων ψεγλῶν AITA@CCWN Kal KAKOHOON, 
λεκτροκλόπων, εἰδωλολατρῶν, δόλια φρονεόντων, 


αὐτοῖς ἁρπάζοντες, ἀναίδεα θυμὸν ἔχοντες. 
wy. Teaching iii. τέκνον μου, φεῦγε ἀπὸ παντὸς πονηροῦ καὶ ἀπὸ 
TTANTOC ὁμοίου AYTOY- 
Orac. Sib. u. 145 = Ps.-Phocyl. 76 
σωφροσύνην ἀσκεῖν, αἰσχρῶν δ᾽ ἔργων ἀπέχεσθαι, 
μὴ μιμοῦ KAKOTHTA. 
8. Teaching iii. μὴ γίνου ὀργίλος" ὁδηγεῖ γὰρ ἡ ὀργὴ πρὸς τὸν φύνον. 
Orac. Sib. ii. 126 = Ps.-Phocyl. 57 
μὴ προπετὴς ἐς χεῖρα χαλίνου δ᾽ ἄγριον ὀργήν. 
πολλάκις γὰρ πλήξας, ἀέκων φόνον ἐξετέλεσσε. 
te. Teaching iii. μὴ γίνου ὀργίλος... μηδὲ ζηλωτὴς μηδὲ Epictikdc μηδὲ 
θγμικύο. 
Orac. Sib. u. 135 = Ps.-Phocyl. 63 
θγμὸς ὑπερχόμενος μανίην ὁλοόφρονα τεύχει. 
ὀργὴ δ᾽ ἐστὶν ὅὕρεξις, ὑπερβαίνουσα δὲ μῆνις. 
ζῆλος γὰρ ἐσθλῶν ἀγαθός, φαύλων δ᾽ ἀΐδηλος. 
Orac. Sib. 1. 147 = Ps.-Phocyl. 78 
πείθω μὲν yap ὄνειαρ, ἔρις δ᾽ ἔριν ἀντιφυτεύει. 
ws. Teaching iii. τέκνον μου, μὴ γίνου οἰωνοοκόπος᾽ ἐπειδὴ ὁδηγεῖ εἰς 
τὴν εἰδωλολατρείαν᾽ μηδὲ ETIADIAVC μηδὲ μαθημδτικόο. 
Orac. Sib. iii. 225 [165 B.c.] 
οὐ MANTEIC, οὐ φαρμακέας, οὐ μὴν ἐπδοιλοῦς, 
οὐ μύθων μωρῶν ἀπάτας ἐγγαστριμύθων, 
οὐδὲ τὰ Χαλδαίων τὰ προμάντια AcTpoAoPOyCIN 
οὐδὲ μὲν ἀστρονομοῦσι...... 
234 τοῦ πεπλανῆσθαι ὁλογς T ἀγὰθδο... 
ιξ. Teaching iv. κρινεῖς δικαίως, οὐ λήψη πρόσωπον ἐλέγξαι ἐπὶ 
παραπτώμασιν. 
Teaching ν. πλουσίων παράκλητοι, πενήτων ἄνομοι κριταί. 
Orac. Sib. ii. 61 = Ps.-Phocyl. 9 
πάντα δίκαια νέμειν, μηδὲ κρίσιν ἐς χάριν ἕλκε, 
μὴ ῥίψῃς πενίην ἀδίκως, μὴ κρίνε πρόσωπον. 
ιθ. Teaching iv. οὐ διστάσεις δοῦναι οὐδὲ διδοὺς γογγύσεις, γνώσῃ 
γὰρ τίς ἐστιν ὁ τοῦ μισθοῦ καλὸς ἀνταποδότης. 


Orac. Sib. ii. 18 τε Ps.-Phocyl. 22 πτωχοῖς εὐθὺ δίδου. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 43 


Orac. Sib. ii. 91 
μήποτε ἄνδρα πένητα ἰδὼν oxo ns ἐπέεσσι. 
Orac. δὲν. ii. 274 ὁπόσοι δ᾽ ἰδίων ἀπὸ μόχθων 
δόντες ὀνειδίζουσιν. 
Orac. Sib. ii. 80 
ds δ᾽ ἐλεημοσύνην παρέχει, θεῷ οἷδε δανείζειν. 
κα. Teaching vi. περὶ δὲ τῆς βρώσεως, ὃ δύνασαι βάστασον. ἀπὸ δὲ 
τοῦ εἰδωλοθύτου λίαν πρόσεχε. 
Orac. Sib. ii. 96 = Ps.-Phocyl. [32] 
αἷμα δὲ μὴ φαγέειν, εἰδωλοθύτων δ᾽ ἀπέχεσθαι. 
KB. Teaching vi. λατρεία γάρ ἐστι θεῶν νεκρῶν. 
Orac. Sib. viii. 46 [time of Trajan] 
καὶ πάντων ὧν ἐσεβάσθης 
δαίμονας ἀψύχους νεκρῶν εἴδωλα καμόντων. 
Orac. Sib. vii. 393 [time of Antonines] 
ταῦτα yap ἐς μνήμην βασιλήων ἠδὲ τυράννων 
δαίμοσι ποιήσουσι νεκροῖς ὡς οὐρανίοισι. 
xy. Teaching vii. Banticate εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Πατρὸς καὶ τοῦ Ὑἱοῦ 
καὶ τοῦ ἁγίου Τ]νεύματος ἐν ὕδλτι Ζῶντι. 
Orac. Sib. iv. 165 [time of Titus] 
ἐν ποταμοῖς \oYcacbe ὅλον AEMAC AENAOICI, 
χεῖρας τ᾽ ἐκτανύσαντες ἐς αἰθέρα, τῶν πάρος ἔργων 
συγγνώμην αἰτεῖσθε καὶ εὐσεβίαις ἀσεβείαν 
πικρὰν ἰάσασθε. 
Orac. Sib. viii. 315 [time of Antonines] 
ἀθανάτου πηγῆς ἀπολουσάμενοι ὑδάτεσσι 
τὰς πρότερου κακίας ἵνα γεννηθέντες ἄνωθεν 
μηκέτι δουλεύωσιν ἄθεσμοις ἤθεσι κόσμου, 
a passage which recalls also the language of the fourth gospel. 
xd. Teaching vii. ἐὰν δὲ ἀμφότερα μὴ ἔχῃς, ἔκχεον εἰς τὴν κεφαλὴν 
τρὶς ὕδωρ εἰς ὄνομα Πατρὸς καὶ Ὑἱοῦ καὶ ἁγίου Πνεύματος. 
Orac. Sib. vii. 87 [234 Α.}.] 
οὐδὲ θύρην κλείσεις ὅτε Tis σοι ἐπήλυτος ἄλλος 
ἥξει δυόμενος, πενίης ἀπερυκέναι λιμόν, 
ἀλλὰ λαβὼν κεφαλὴν τοῦδ᾽ ἀνέρος, ὕδατι ῥάνας, 
εὔξαι τρίς. 
xt. Teaching xii. τεχνίτης ὦν, ἐργαζέσθω καὶ φαγέτω' εἰ de οὐκ Exel 
τέχνην κατὰ τὴν σύνεσιν ὑμῶν προνοήσατε πῶς μὴ ἀργὸς μεθ᾽ ὑμῶν ζήσεται 


Χ ριστιανός. 
6—2 


44 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Ps.-Phocyl. 154 
πᾶς yap ἀεργὸς ἀνὴρ ζώει κλοπίμων ἀπὸ χειρῶν. 
Ψ ΄ ” > \ 3. “ον, , 
τέχνη TOL τρέφει ἄνδρας, aepyov δ᾽ ἴψατο λιμός. 
εἰ λέ τις OY A€AAHKE τέχνην, σκάπτοιτο δικέλλῃ. 


We come now to the doctrine of the Last Things. 


xn. Teaching xvi. ἐν yap ταῖς ἐσχάταις ἡμέραις πληθυνθήσονται οἱ 
ψεγλδοπροφῆτδι καὶ οἱ φθορεῖς. 
Orac. Sib. ii. 165 [250 a.D.] 
ἡ δὲ συναίρεσις ἐγγὺς ὅταν τινὲς ἀντὶ προφητῶν 
ψεγλαπάται πελάσωσιν ἐπὶ χθονὶ φημίζοντες. 


© 2 \ , , ες , € ey a \ 
x0. Teaching xvi. καὶ τότε φανήσεται ὁ κοσμοπλᾶνος ὡς υἱὸς θεοῦ Kal 
ποιήςει CHMEIA καὶ TépaTa...... καὶ τότε φανήσεται τὰ σημεῖα τῆς ἀληθείας. 
Orac. Sib. τι. 167 
καὶ Βελιὰρ δ᾽ ἥξει καὶ cHMaTA πολλὰ ποιήσει. 
Orac. Sib. τ. 52 [250 Α.}.] 
ἐκ δὲ Σεβαστηνῶν ἥξει Βελιὰρ μετόπισθεν 
καὶ νέκυας στήσει κἀὶ CHMATA πολλὰ TIOIHCE! 
> , > ? ’ \ , ” ’ > ᾿ al 
ἀνθρώποις, ἀλλ᾽ οὐχὶ τελεσφόρα ἔσσετ᾽ ἐν αὐτῷ 
? \ , e 
αλλα TIAANA KTE. 
λ. Teaching xvi. τότε ἥδξει ἡ κτίοις τῶν ἀνθρώπων cic THN πύρωειν τῆς 
AOKIMACIAC. 
Orac. Sib. iii. 86 [250 A.D.] KAI KTICIN αὐτὴν 
2 ao , Ν » \ ,, 
εἰς EN χωνεύςει καὶ εἰς καθαρὸν διαλέξει. 
Orac. Sib. vil. 412 [age of Antonines] 
, \ “ \ > \ ΄ 
χωνεύσω γὰρ ἅπαντα καὶ εἰς καθαρὸν διαλέξω. 
Orac. Sib. τ. 217 [250 Α.}.]} ἀλλ᾽ ἅμα πάντα 
> a , \ > \ / 
εἰς ἕν χωνεύσει καὶ εἰς καθαρὸν διαλέξει. 


ra. Teaching xvi. οἱ δὲ ὑπομείναντες ἐν τῇ πίστει αὐτῶν σωθήσονται 
ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ καταθέματος. 
Orac. Sib. τι. 253 [250 Α.}.] 
\ , ‘\ , , > , tal 
καὶ τότε δὴ πάντες δι’ αἰθομένου ποταμοῖο 
καὶ φλογὸς ἀσβέστου διελεύσονθ᾽, οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι 
πάντες σωθήσονται. 


AB. Teaching xvi. καὶ τότε φανήσεται τὰ εημεῖὰ τῆς ἀληθείας, πρῶτον, 
σημεῖον ἐκπετάσεως ἐν οὐρανῷ, εἶτα σημεῖον φωνῆς σάλπιγγος, καὶ τὸ τρίτον 
ἀνάστασις νεκρῶν. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 45 


Orac. Sib. ii. 187 [250 A.p.] 
καὶ τόθ᾽ ὁ Θεσβίτης" ye ἀπ᾽ οὐρανοῦ ἅρμα τιταίνων 
οὐράνιον, γαίῃ δ᾽ ἐπιβὰς τότε cHMaTA τριςςὰ 
κόσμῳ ὅλῳ δείξει. 
Ay. Teaching xvi. ἥξει ὁ κύριος καὶ πάντες οἱ ἅγιοι pet αὐτοῦ. τότε 
ὄψεται ὁ κόσμος τὸν κύριον ἐρχόμενον ἐπάνω τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. 
Orac. Sib. τι. 242 
ἥξει δ᾽ ἐν νεφέλῃ πρὸς τ᾽ ἄφθιτον ἄφθιτος αὐτὸς 
ἐν δόξῃ Χριστὸς σὺν ἀμύμοσιν ἀγγελτῆρσι. 


Against the use made by me of the previous quotations grave exception 
has been taken by Funk in the Prolegomena to his Doctrina XII. Apost. pp. 
xix.—xxil. He denies, apparently, any connexion between Ps.-Phocylides and 
the Teaching, and is equally sceptical as to any common ground between the 
Teaching and the Sibylline Oracles. 

With reference to the former, his objections resolve themselves into a series 
of arguments from the silence of the Phocylidist ; as that, while admitting that 
the Teaching and Ps.-Phocylides have much in common, there is no mention 
of the way of life and the way of death; that the three principal command- 
ments are omitted, that the whole of the third chapter of the Teaching 
furnishes no parallels, and further that Ps.-Phocylides has for his chief source 
the Old Testament. Now it is evident from the foregoing that even if Ps.- 
Phocylides had mentioned the two ways by name, as is done in δὲν. vill. 399, 
it would have been impossible to convince Dr Funk that there was anything 
in the allusion, for it would fall under the head of a quotation from the Old 
Testament. And in fact the passage referred to from the Sibyllines is thus 
considered by him as leaving the matter altogether in doubt. 

Further, a reference to the preceding extracts will shew that, so far from 
its being the case that there are no parallelisms between the third chapter 
of the Teaching and Ps.-Phocylides, the most striking illustration of the 
saying that “anger leads to murder” is the Phocylidean verse on the subject ; 
notice also the Phocylidean injunction to abstain from all that is “an imita- 
tion of evil.” There remains then the consideration as to the omission of the 
great commandments of the Teaching. 

There is certainly some difficulty in this omission, since they are all quo- 
tations from the Old Testament; but there may very well have been current 
forms of Jewish Didascalia which did not contain the most advanced of the 
doctrines in the Teaching, and we have then a sufficient background for the 
versifications of Ps.-Phocylides and for the expansions of the Teaching, and 
by implication for their common matter. For example, it is almost incon- 
ceivable that such an ethical treatise should not have had in some recensions 


1 According to the Jewish belief Elias comes first and gives the signs of the Advent. 


46 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


a trace of the commandment “Honour thy father and thy mother.” Now Ps.- 
Phocylides gives, v. 8, 
πρῶτα θεὸν τίμα, μετέπειτα δὲ σεῖο γονῆας, 

and may it not have stood so in some Jewish handbook? but the Teaching 
of the Apostles, while it has dealt with all the rest of the Decalogue, omits 
the precepts on paternal honour and on the sabbath. The latter omission 
is, no doubt, intentional; but no such hypothesis will explain the former. 
What has happened, then, must be that a new commandment has been sub- 
stituted for “Honour thy father,’ and the composer omitted to restore the 


displaced doctrine at a later pot of the book. Hence we read in the 
Teaching 


πρῶτον ἀγαπήσεις τὸν θεὸν τὸν ποιήσαντά σε, δεύτερον τὸν πλησίον σου 
ὡς σεαυτόν, 
and find nothing whatever on the fourth commandment. It is no slight con- 
firmation of the view which exhibits a common base for Ps.-Phocylides and 
the Teaching, to find the author of the second book of the Sibyllines, when 
appropriating to himself the Phocylidean verses, adding just the very words 
which would imply a consciousness on his part of the parallelism between 
the two earlier writings; for he adds to his Phocylides-extracts the words 

τοῦτο πύλη ζωῆς Kal εἴσοδος ἀθανασίας, 
which are sufficiently near, for poetry, to the words of the Teaching itself, 
αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ὁδὸς τῆς ζωῆς. 

It seems to me, therefore, that it is still possible, Dr Funk’s criticisms 
notwithstanding, to maintain that Ps.-Phocylides is either a metrical simpli- 
fication of our Teaching, or a versification of an earlier book of Discipline 
with which our own Teaching is not altogether unconnected; as well as to 
hold that some of the Sibyllists shew acquaintance with the Teaching. Perhaps 
one may add in conclusion that there is always something to be said for a view 
which clears up an obscurity in a subject; that which makes other things 
intelligible can hardly be itself unreasonable. Now it is precisely in the 
Sibylline oracles that I found the best and most conclusive explanation of 
the difficult term in the Teaching ἐκπέτασις ἐν οὐρανῷ, namely the interpre- 
tation which makes the words stand for a cross in the sky. Upon turning 
to Dr Funk’s commentary on this passage, I was surprised to find that he 
did not even notice that such an explanation had been given! It is, how- 
ever, the true interpretation of a very obscure word arrived at independently 
by several investigators, and involves, I think, a knowledge of the terms of 
the Teaching on the part of the Sibyllist* who wrote 


ἐκπετάσει δὲ χέρας Kal κέσμον ἅπαντα μετρήσει. 


1 Orac. Sib. viii. 302. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 47 


So much, then, having been said on the Phocylidean and Sibylline parallels 
to the Teaching, the matter must again be left to the judgment of patristic 
scholars. 


Origen. [Saec. 111. 


De Principiis iii. 2 (Migne, Patr. Gr. xi. 318). 

“Omnia haec quae fiunt in hoe mundo quae media existimantur sive 
illa tristia sint sive quoquomodo sint, non quidem a Deo fiunt nec tamen 
sine Deo...... Propterea docet nos Scriptura Divina omnia quae accidunt nobis 
tanquam a Deo illata suscipere, scientes quod sine Deo nihil fit.” 

Cf. Διδ. 1. 10. 

We have here a similar phenomenon to that presented by Clement of 
Alexandria who speaks of the Teaching as Scripture. In the present case, 
however, it is the epistle of Barnabas that is referred to by Origen. For in the 
same book just before the passage given above he quotes (111. 2. 4) the doctrine 
of the Two Ways from Barnabas expressly and not from the Teaching’. 
In book ii. 3. 3 he discusses the whole question of ἐνεργήματα or actions 
and events as under the direction and influence of good and evil spirits, 
maintaining that there are certain spiritual energies or powers which in 
accordance with their own free choice have elected to themselves certain 
modes of operation; and in particular they preside over the arts and sciences 
of this world. It is precisely this conception of spiritual directive force which 
is implied in the use of the word ἐνεργήματα by the author of the 
Teaching. 

Homil. vi. in Judic.* (Migne, Patr. Gr. xii. 975). 

“Antequam verae vitis, quae ascendit de radice David, sanguine ine- 
briemur.” 

Cf. Acd. ix. 2, τῆς ἁγίας ἀμπέλου Δαβίδ. 


The Apostolical Constitutions. [i11—1v. saec.] 


1.1. οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ of πρεσβύτεροι πᾶσι τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν πιστεύσασιν KTE. 
Cf. Acéd. i. 1. 

i. 1. ὃ σὺ μισεῖς ὑφ᾽ ἑτέρου σοι γενέσθαι, σὺ ἄλλῳ οὐ ποιήσεις...... 

οὐ βούλει σου τὸ ἱμάτιον ἀρθῆναι, μηδὲ σὺ τὸ τοῦ ἑτέρου ἄρῃς...... 

CE Avs. 1 2, 9: 

1. 2. ἀλλὰ καταρᾶταί σέ τις, σὺ εὐλόγησον αὐτόν. 


Cf. Διδ. i. ὃ. 


1 Hence Prof. T. 5. Potwin was wrong in referring this quotation of Origen to the Teaching. 
See N. Y. Independent, Jan. 21, 1886. 
* See Bornemann, Theol. Lz. No. 17, 1885. 


48 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


i, 1. πρᾷος ὑπαρχέτω...καὶ ἡσύχιος, ὅτι λέγει διὰ τοῦ “Hoaiov κύριος 
ὁ θεὸς "Emi τίνα διαβλέψω ἀλλ᾽ ἢ ἐπὶ τὸν ταπεινὸν καὶ ἡσύχιον καὶ τρέμοντά 
μου τοὺς λόγους διαπαντός ; ὁμοίως καὶ ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ οὕτω Μακάριοι οἱ 
πρᾳεῖς ὅτι αὐτοὶ κληρονομήσουσι τὴν γῆν. 

Cf. Acd. ii. 7, 8. 

ii. 6. ἔστω...μὴ αἰσχροκερδής...βλαπτόμενος μᾶλλον ἢ βλάπτων, μὴ 
πλεονέκτης, μὴ ἅρπαξ,...μὴ ψευδομάρτυς, μὴ θυμώδης, ... μὴ δίγνωμος, μὴ δί- 
γλωσσος. 

Cf Διδ. ii. and 111. 2. 

[ ii, 1ὅ. ὁ θεὸς διὰ Ἡσαΐου λέγει πρὸς τοὺς ἐπισκόπους ἸΠαρακαλεῖτε, 
παρακαλεῖτε τὸν λαόν μου, ἱερεῖς. 

| ii. 25. ὑμεῖς οὖν σήμερον, ὦ ἐπίσκοποι, ἐστὲ TO λαῷ ὑμῶν ἱερεῖς Kal 
Λευῖται.. ὑμεῖς τοῖς ἐν ὑμῖν λαϊκοῖς ἐστὲ προφῆται..... «οὗτοι yap εἰσιν ὑμῶν 
οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς. 

The preceding passages betray very decidedly the appropriation by the 
bishop of the prophetic title and office. Cf. Avé. xi. 3. 

ii. 84. διὸ Tov ἐπίσκοπον ὀφείλετε...τιμᾶν...ὡς κύριον. 

Cf. Διδ. iv. 1. 

ii. 36. μὴ προσανέχειν εἰδώλοις ἢ τισιν ἑτέροις ὡς θεοῖς ἀψύχοις. 

WE Avo. ν. 8. 

ii. 87. σὺ οὖν...κατὰ τὴν τοῦ κυρίου διδαχὴν ποίησον, καὶ μόνον παρα- 
λαβὼν τὸν κατηγορηθέντα ἔλεγξον αὐτὸν......... ἐν πρᾳότητι. 

Cf. Ard. xv. 8, ἐλέγχετε δὲ ἀλλήλους μὴ ἐν ὀργῇ ἀλλ᾽ ἐν εἰρήνῃ. The 
Teaching of the Lord here referred to is the Gospel of Matthew. 

ii. 47. τὰ δικαστήρια ὑμῶν γίνεσθω δευτέρᾳ σαββάτων, ὅπως ἐὰν ἀντι- 
λογία τῇ ἀποφάσει ὑμῶν γένηται ἕως σαββάτου ἔχοντες ἄδειαν δυνηθῆτε 
εὐθῦναι τὴν ἀντιλογίαν καὶ εἰρηνεῦσαι εἰς τὴν κυριακὴν τοὺς διαφερομένους 
πρὸς ἀλλήλους. 

This passage is interesting as furnishing a conclusive demonstration of 
the accuracy of the emendation in Avd. xiv. προεξομολογησάμενοι. Personal 
differences &c. are to be dealt with on Monday in order that a clean bill 
of health may be furnished by the following Sunday. This is evidently a 
development of the practice alluded to in the Teaching. 

111, 4. χρὴ yap εὖ ποιεῖν παντὰς ἀνθρώπους, μὴ φιλοκρινοῦντας τοῦτον 
ὅστις ἢ ἢ ἐκεῖνον. ὁ γὰρ κύριός φησι Llavtl τῷ αἰτοῦντί σε δίδου: δῆλον 
δὲ ὡς τῷ χρήζοντι κατ᾽ ἀλήθειαν. 

Cf. Avd. iv. 7. 

iv. 3. καὶ yap εἴρηται πάλιν ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ Oval τοῖς ἔχουσι Kai ἐν ὑποκρίσει 
λαμβάνουσιν ἢ δυναμένοις βοηθεῖν ἑαυτοῖς καὶ λαμβάνειν παρ᾽ ἑτέρων βουλο- 
μένοις....... ὁ δὲ ἔχων καὶ ἐν ὑποκρίσει λαμβάνων ἢ δι’ ἀργίαν ἀντὶ τοῦ ἐργα- 
ζόμενον βοηθεῖν καὶ ἑτέροις, δίκην ὀφλήσει τῷ θεῷ. 


Cf Acéd. i. 5. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 49 


v. 20. πᾶσαν τετράδα καὶ παρασκευὴν προστάσσομεν ὑμῖν νηστεύειν, 
καὶ τὴν περισσείαν ὑμῶν τῆς νηστείας πένησιν ἐπιχορηγεῖν. 

Cf. Διδ. viii. 1. 

vi. 18. οὗτοι yap εἰσι...... ψευδοπροφῆται καὶ ψευδαπόστολοι, πλάνοι καὶ 
φθορεῖς...δι ods ψυχθήσεται ἡ τῶν πολλῶν ἀγάπη" ὁ δὲ ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος 
ἀδιάστροφος, οὗτος σωθήσεται. 

Cf. Διδ. xvi. 8. 

The seventh book which incorporates the whole of the Teaching has been 
already discussed. 


Ps.-Ignatius ad Antiochenos. [Saec. iv. ?] 


That this writer was acquainted with the Teaching may, I think, be 
seen from the following extract. 

c. xi περὶ δὲ γοητείας ἢ παιδεραστείας ἢ φόνου περιττὸν τὸ γράφειν, 
ὁπότε ταῦτα καὶ τοῖς EONECIN ἀπηγόρευται πράττειν" ταῦτα οὐχ ὡς ἀπόοτολος 
παρακελεύομαι. 

Notice the way in which the reference to crimes forbidden to the 
heathen suggests the repetition of the Ignatian sentiment “but I am not 
an Apostle.” The evidence for the superscription Διδαχὴ τῶν ἀποστόλων 
τοῖς ἔθνεσιν is worthy of remark. 

From the same writer ad T’rrallianos the previous conclusion may be fortified. 

c. vi. εἰσὶ γάρ τινες,...οὐ χριστιανοὶ ἀλλὰ χριστέμποροι, Where it is not 
merely a case of using the word χριστέμπορος, but of using it as the Teaching 
does in opposition to χριστιανός. 


Athanasius. [Saec. iv.] 


Fragments (Migne, Pat. Gr. xxvi. 1253 and xxvii. 1381) περὶ Ψψευδοπρο- 


πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἀπὸ τῶν ἔργων ὀφείλεις δοκιμάζειν τοὺς χριστεμπόρους. 

Cf Aud. c. xi, ἀπὸ οὖν τῶν τρόπων γνωσθήσεται 6 ψευδοπροφήτης καὶ 
6 προφήτης. 

c. xii. χριστέμπορός ἐστι’ προσέχετε ἀπὸ τῶν τοιούτων. 

De Virginitate (Migne, Patr. Gr. xxviii. 2). 

Col. 265. καὶ ὅταν καθεσθῆς ἐπὶ τὴν τραπέζην Kal ἔρχῃ κλᾶσαι τὸν 
ἄρτον, σφραγίσασα αὐτὸν τρίτον (I. tpls) τὸ σημεῖον τοῦ σταυροῦ οὕτως 
εὐχαριστοῦσα λέγε' ΕΥ̓χὰριοτοῦμέν co, Πάτερ ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ τῆς ἁγίδλο ἀναστά- 
σεώς σου λιὰ γὰρ “lHcof τοῦ πδιλός coy ἐγνώριοδο ἡμῖν αὐτήν. καὶ καθὼς 
6 ἄρτος οὗτος διεοκορπιομένος ὑπῆρχεν ὁ ἐπάνω ταύτης τῆς τραπέζης καὶ 
cynaydeic ἐγένετο ἕν, οὕτως ἐπιογνάχθήτω Coy H Ἐκκληοία ἀπὸ τῶν TIEPATOON 


H, 7 


50 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


͵ 


τῆς γῆς εἰς THN βδοιλείδν coy, ὅτι cof ἐστιν H δύναμις Kal H δόξὰ εἰς τοὺς 
οἰῶνδς τῶν αἰώνων, ἀμήν. 

Col. 268. καὶ μετὰ τὴν δοξολογίαν πάλιν τὴν εὐχὴν πλήρωσον λέγουσα 
οὕτως" Ὃ θεὸς ὁ παντοκράτωρ καὶ κύριος ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦς Χριστὸς τὸ ὄνομα 
τὸ ὑπὲρ πᾶν ὄνομα, εὐχαριστοῦμεν καὶ αἰνοῦμέν σε ὅτι κατηξίωσας ἡμῖν 
μεταλαβεῖν τῶν ἀγαθῶν τῶν σῶν, τῶν σαρκικῶν τροφῶν. δεόμεθα καὶ παρα- 
καλοῦμέν σε, κύριε, ἵνα καὶ τὰς ἐπουρανίους τροφὰς ἡμῖν δωρήσῃ. καὶ δὸς 
ἡμῖν τρέμειν καὶ φοβεῖσθαι τὸ φρικτὸν καὶ ἔντιμον ὄνομά σου καὶ μὴ παρα- 
κούειν τῶν ἐντολῶν σου. τὸ ὄνομά σου καὶ τὰ δικαιώματά σου ἐγκατάθου 
ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ἡμῶν. ἁγίασον δὲ ἡμῶν τὸ πνεῦμα καὶ τὴν ψυχὴν καὶ τὸ 
σῶμα, διὰ τοῦ ἡγαπημένου παιδός σου ᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν KTE. 

Cf. Acé. c. ix., x. 

Col. 273. τί λέγεις, ἄνθρωπε; ἰδοὺ δύο ὁδοὶ παρετέθησαν ἐνώπιόν σου, 
ἡ ζωὴ καὶ ἡ θάνατος. ὅπου ἐὰν θέλῃς πορεύου. 

(ΟἿ ἄν τς 

Col. 279. πάσῃ ὥρᾳ μὴ λειψάτω ἔλαιον τῇ λαμπάδι σου, μὴ πότε ἔλθη 
ὁ νύμφιος καὶ εὕρῃ αὐτὴν σβεσθεῖσαν. 

Cf. Aud. xvi. 1. 

Syntagma Doctrinae. (Migne, Patr. Gr. xxviii.) 

Col. 836. κύριον τὸν θεόν cov ἀγαπήσεις ἐξ ὅλης καρδίας σου καὶ ἐξ 
ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου καὶ τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν. οὐ φονεύσεις, οὐ 
μοιχεύσεις, οὐ πορνεύσεις, οὐ παιδοφθορήσεις, οὐ φαρμακεύσεις, οὐ διχο- 
στατήσεις" ἀπέχου πνικτοῦ καὶ εἰδωλοθύτου καὶ αἵματος. 

Cf. Avd. i. ii. 

Col. 837. φυλάττεσθαί τε μὴ εἶναι Siroyor, μὴ δίγνωμον, μὴ ψεύστην, μὴ 
κατάλαλον, μὴ ἀκεροπερίσπαστον, μὴ ἀναίσχυντον, μὴ ῥεμβόν, μὴ ἀναίσθητον, 
μὴ αὐθάδη, μὴ σαπρὸν λόγον ἐκ χειλέων προσφέροντα, μήτε ὅρκον ὅλως 
τὸ παράπαν. 

6 Διδ. ἀἱ: 

Col. 837. σάββατα μὴ φυλάττειν, μὴ μαγεύειν, μὴ φαρμακεύειν......μὴ 
ἀπέρχεσθαι πρὸς ἐπαοιδὸν μήτε φυλακτήριον ἑαυτῷ περιτιθέναι μηδὲ περι- 
καθαίρειν μήτε μὴν ταῦτά σοι ποιεῖν μήτε ὑπὸ ἄλλου σοὶ γένηται. The last 
clause is an expansion of the idea μηδὲ θέλε αὐτὰ βλέπειν in the Teaching. 

Cf Acé. ii. iii. 

Col. 837. μὴ παράβαινε νηστείαν, τούτεστι τετράδα καὶ παρασκευήν... 

Cf. Aud. viii. 1. 

Col. 840. μὴ γίνου φιλάργυρος μὴ αἰσχροκερδής...γίνου ταπεινὸς καὶ 
ἡσύχιος τρέμων διὰ παντὸς τὰ λόγια τοῦ κυρίου. 

Cf. Avé. iii. 5, 8. 

Col. 841. δικαίως συνάγων καρποὺς καὶ μὴ ἔχων τι ἀδικίας πρῶτον 
μὲν τὰς ἀπαρχὰς τοῖς ἱερεῦσι πρόσφερε. 


Cf, Διδ. xiii. 3. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 51 


Col. 841. πρὸ παντὸς δὲ τέχνην ἐπιχειρεῖν" ἐν ἀγρῷ ἐργάξου ἵνα μὴ 
ἐσθίῃς ἄρτον ἀργόν. μᾶλλον δὲ ἐκ τῶν χειρῶν σου ἔχε πρὸς τὸ ἀναπαύειν 
ἀδελφούς κτὲ. 

Cf. Διδ. xii. 3. 


Col. 844. εἰ δέ τις ἀντιλέγει τοῖς προειρημένοις θεῷ ἐστιν ἀντιλέγων. 
Cf Aid. vi. 1. 


Ps.-Athanasius. 
Fides Nicaena‘’. (Migne, Patr. Gr. xxviii. 1639.) 


καὶ τὸν κύριον ἡμῶν ᾿Ιησοῦν Χριστὸν ἀγαπήσεις αὐτὸν ἐξ ὅλης τῆς 
καρδίας σου καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου καὶ τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυτόν᾽ 
οὐ φονεύσωμεν" οὐ μοιχεύσωμεν. οὐ παιδοφθορήσωμεν' οὐ φαρμακεύσωμεν" 
οὐ κλέψωμεν. οὐ Ψψευδομαρτυρήσωμεν' οὐ διχοστατήσωμεν. ἀπεχώμεθα 
πνικτοῦ καὶ αἵματος καὶ πλεονεξίας. ὅρα, ἄνθρωπε, μήτις σε ἀπατήσει 
τῆς πίστεως ταύτης" ἐπεὶ παρεκτός σε θεοῦ διδάσκει........ : 

φυλάττεσθαι δὲ πάλιν μὴ εἶναι δίγλωσσον ἢ δίγνωμον, μὴ ψεύστην, 
μὴ κατάλαλον, μὴ ἀκαίρως περιπατοῦντα", μήτε ῥεμβόμενον, μὴ ἀναίσχυντον, 
μήτε ὀργίλον, μήτε πάροινον ἢ φιλάργυρον, μὴ ὑπερήφανον, μὴ αὐθάδην, μὴ 
σαπρὸν λόγον φέροντα, μήτε ὅρκον ὅλως τὸ παράπαν........ ‘ 

τὰ σάββατα μὴ φυλάττειν, καθάπερ οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι' μὴ μαγεύειν" μὴ φαρμα- 
κεύειν...μὴ ἀπέρχεσθαι πρὸς ἐπαοιδόν' μήτε φυλακτήρια ἑαυτῷ περιτιθέναι 
μήτε περικαθαίρειν μήτε ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ μήτε ἀπ᾽ ἄλλου τινός....... re 

μὴ παράβαινε νηστείαν κυρίου τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι τετράδα Kal TapacKEUND......... 

μὴ γίνου φιλάργυρος, ἢ αἰσχροκερδής........Ψ.. 

γίνου ταπεινὸς καὶ ἡσύχιος, τρέμων διὰ παντὸς τὰ λόγια τοῦ θεοῦ..-...... 

πρὸ πάντων δὲ τέχνην γίνωσκε' ἢ ἐν ἀγρῷ ἐργάζου: ἵνα μὴ ἀργὸς 
ἐσθίης τὸν ἄρτον...... ve 

πρῶτον Tas ἀπαρχάς σου τοῖς ἱερεῦσιν ἐν TH ἐκκλησίᾳ πρόσφερε.......... 

ἀπεχόμενος ἀπὸ παντὸς πονηροῦ πράγματος...... ἊΣ 

μὴ προσωπολήπτην, τοῦ ἐλέγξαι ἐν παραπτώμασι μικρούς τε καὶ 
μεγάλους. 

The relations of this to the preceding are sufficiently evident; Prof. 
Orris was the first to draw attention to the Fides Nicaena in N. Y. Inde- 
pendent, April 15, 1886. 


1 P. Batiffol has just published under the title of Didascalia ccecxviii. Patrum, Paris, Leroux, 
a revised text of this Nicene Faith based upon three Greek MSS. and one Coptic text. He 
promises to prove that the Didascalia is a Greek version of a Coptic work which is itself 
taken from the Athanasian Syntagma ad Monachos, and that it emanated from lower Italy in 
the xth century. 

2 This appears in the Syntagma as ἀκεροπερίσπαστον, but the correctness of the text in the 
Fides is seen by comparing Ap. Const. i. 4, οὐκ ἔσῃ ἐμπεριπατῶν...ἐν ταῖς ῥύμαις, ἀκαιροεπόπτης 
τῶν κακῶς ζώντων....... μὴ ῥεμβὸς γίνου μηδὲ ἀκαιροπεριπάτητος. The antiquity of the common matter 
which shews itself here must be great. 


7—2 


52 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Lactantius. [Saec. iii—iv.] 


Epit. div. instit. c. lix. 

“ Duas esse humanae vitae vias nec philosophis ignotum fuit, nee poetis: 
sed eas utrique diverso modo induxerunt: philosophi alteram industriae, 
alteram inertiae esse voluerunt: sed hoc minus recte, quod eas ad sola vitae 
huius commoda retulerunt. Melius poetae qui alteram justorum, alteram im- 
plorum esse dixerunt. Sed in eo peccant quod eas non in hac vita, sed apud 
inferos esse aiunt. Nos utique rectius qui alteram vitae, alteram mortis et 
hic tamen esse has vias dicimus. Sed illa dexterior qua justi gradiuntur non 
in Elysium fert sed in coelum. Immortales enim fiunt. Sinistrior ad 
Tartarum: aeternis enim cruciatibus addicuntur injusti. Tenenda est igitur 
nobis justitiae via quae ducit ad vitam. Primum autem justitiae officium 
est, dewm agnoscere ut parentem, eumque metuere ut dominum, diligere ut 
patrem. Idem enim nos genwit qui vitali spiritu animavyit qui alit qui salvos 
facit. Habet in nos non modo ut pater verum etiam ut dominus licentiam 
verberandi et vitae ac necis potestatem, unde illi ab homine duplex honos, 
id est amor cum timore, debetur. Secundum justitiae offictum est, hominem 
agnoscere velut fratrem. Si enim nos idem deus fecit, et universos ad 
justitiam vitamque aecternam pari conditione generavit, fraterna utique necessi- 
tudine cohaeremus, quam qui non agnoscit injustus est... . 

ce. lx. Sed radix justitiae et omne fundamentum aequitatis est illud ut 
ne facias ulli quod pati nolis sed alterius animum de tuo metiaris.” 

Div. instit. vi. 3. “Has igitur vias longe aliter inducimus quam a 
philosophis induci solent. Primum quod utrique praepositum esse dicimus 
ducem, utrumque immortalem, sed alterum honoratum, qui virtutibus ac 
bonis praesit, alterum damnatum, qui vitiis ac malis.” 

These and other references to Lactantius are given by von Gebhardt (v. 
Harnack, Lehre der zwélf Apostel ii. 284). 

It should be noted that Lactantius’ version of the two ways agrees with 
the Latin Version in emphasizing that the two ways are in this world: he 
agrees with the Latin Version, Barnabas and Hermas in placing guides over 
each of the two paths and with the Apostolical Constitutions in making 
these guides, not angelic powers, but God and the Devil. 


Ps.-Cyprian. [?] 


De aleatoribus (Migne, Patr. Lat. iv. 906). 

“Et in doctrinis apostolorum: si quis frater delinquit in ecclesia et non 
paret legi, hic nec colligatur, donee poenitentiam agat, et non recipiatur ne 
inquinetur et impediatur oratio vestra.” 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 53 


Cf. Acé. c. xiv., and note that the explanation of the pure sacrifice is the 
same as that given by Tertullian. The quotation is a very free one, or 
else it is taken from a different recension of the Teaching to ours. _ 


Dorotheus of Palestine. [c. 590.] 


(Migne, Patr. Gr. lxxxviii. p. 1840.) 

παρακαλῷ σε, τέκνον, ὑπόμεινον Kal εὐχαριστεῖ ἐπὶ τοῖς συμβαίνουσιν 
ἐν τῇ ἀσθενείᾳ συμπτώμασι, κατὰ τὸν λέγοντα: Ilavra τὰ ἐπερχόμενά σοι 
ὡς ἀγαθὰ προσδέχου. 

(id. p. 1101.) ὀφείλομεν... μηδέποτε...μικροψυχεῖν ἐπὶ τοῖς συμβαίνουσιν 
ἡμῖν ἀλλὰ δέχεσθαι ἀταράχως τὰ ἐπερχόμενα μετὰ ταπεινοφροσύνης καὶ τῆς 
μετὰ θεὸν ἐλπίδος" πεπεισμένοι, καθὼς εἶπον, ὅτι πάντα ὅσα ἂν ποιῇ μεθ᾽ 
ἡμῶν ὁ θεός, ἀγαθότητι ποιεῖ. ὀφείλει γὰρ ὁ μοναχός.. ἑτοιμάσαι κατὰ τὴν 
σοφίαν τὴν ψυχὴν αὐτοῦ εἰς πειρασμοὺς ἵνα μὴ ξενίζηταί ποτε μηδὲ ταράσ- 
σηται ἐν τοῖς συμβαίνουσι: πιστεύων ὅτι οὐδὲν ἄνευ τῆς προνοίας τοῦ θεοῦ 
γίνεται. 

These references were given by Prof. Orris, of Princeton, in the Jnde- 
pendent (N. Y.) for March 10, 1887. Prof. Orris thinks that the reference 
is to Barnabas on account of the expression “according to him that saith,” 
and the use of ἄνευ for drep. The following references will shew an 
acquaintance on the part of Dorotheus with a sentence in the Teaching 
not quoted directly by Barnabas. 

1661. ἔκκλινον ἀπὸ κακοῦ" οἷον, φεῦγε ἁπλῶς πᾶν κακόν, ἔκκλινον ἀπὸ 
παντὸς πράγματος φέροντος ἁμαρτίαν. 

Cf. Avd. 11. 1, φεῦγε ἀπὸ παντὸς πονηροῦ καὶ ἀπὸ παντὸς ὁμοίου αὐτοῦ. 


Clementine Homilies. [2] 


We shall shew that the writer of these stories, which contain so much 
early tradition and are invaluable for the restoration of primitive Church 
life, was acquainted with the customs and doctrines of the Church as given 
in the Teaching. 

For example, the negative form of the Golden Rule is found in 

Hom. vii. 4. οὕτω δ᾽ ἂν ὑμῶν ἕκαστος νοήσειεν τὸ καλόν, ἐν ἑαυτῷ 
διαλεχθείη τὰ τοιαῦτα" οὐ θέλεις φονευθῆναι, ἕτερον μὴ φονεύσῃς" οὐ θέλεις 
τὴν σὴν vp ἑτέρου μοιχευθῆναι γυναῖκα, τὴν ἑτέρου μὴ μοίχευε γαμετήν κτέ. 

Its positive form, with an intimation that it is a part of apostolic 
teaching, is found in 

Hom. xii. 32. vi λόγῳ, ὃ θέλει ἑαυτῷ, θέλει Kal TH πλησίον... οὗτος 

, > lol / \ a ’ \ lel > / « / 
yap ἐστιν θεοῦ νόμος καὶ προφητῶν. αὐτὴ τῆς ἀληθείας ἡ διδασκαλία. 


54 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


The modified counsels of perfection found in ὁ. vi. of the, Teaching are 
to be compared with 

Hom. ix. 23. τρισμακαρίᾳ ἐπ᾽ ὀνομασίᾳ εἰς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν βαπτισα- 
μένοι τὸ ὅσον δύνασθε ἐπὶ τὸ τέλειον τῆς ἁγνείας ἑαυτοὺς ἀποδιδόναι. 

The advice to honour the Teacher as God is found in 

Hom. iii. 67. χρὴ οὖν ἑνί τινι ὡς ὁδηγῷ τοὺς πάντας ἕπεσθαι ὡς εἰκόνα 
θεοῦ προτιμῶντας. 

The “dead gods” of the Teaching are found in 

Hom. xi. 14. ὅπως... νεκρῶν νεκροτέροις προσενέγκητε. 

Hom. x. 9. ὦ τῶν ταλαιπώρων ἀνθρώπων φρένες, νεκρῶν νεκρότερα δε- 
διότων, οὐδὲ γὰρ νεκρὰ αὐτὰ λέγειν δύναμαι, τὰ μηδέποτε ζήσαντα. Cf. x. 17. 

The Homilies furnish excellent illustrations of baptism in running water 
with triple mvocation ; 

Hom. xi. 26. ἐὰν μὴ ἀναγεννηθῆτε ὕδατι ζῶντι εἰς ὄνομα πατρός, υἱοῦ, 
ἁγίου πνεύματος. 

Hom. ix. 19. ἀενάῳ ποταμῷ ἢ πηγῇ ἐπεί γε κἂν θαλάσσῃ ἀπολουσα- 
μένοι ἐπὶ τῇ τρισμακαρίᾳ ἐπονομασίᾳ. 

The injunction to fast before baptism is in 

Hom, xi. 35. νηστεῦσαί μοι κελεύσας ἡμερῶν, ἀγαγών pe εἰς Tas ἐν TH 
θαλάσσῃ πλησίον οὔσας πηγὰς ὡς εἰς ἀέναον ἐβάπτισεν ὕδωρ. 

Hom. iii. 73. ὅσοι ποτὲ βαπτισθῆναι θέλετε, ἀπὸ τῆς αὔριον νηστεύειν 
ἄρξασθε καὶ καθ᾽ ἡμέραν χειροθετεῖσθε καὶ περὶ ὧν θέλετε πυνθάνεσθε....... 
μετὰ δὲ τρεῖς ἡμέρας βαπτίζειν ἀρξάμενος. 

But perhaps the most complete and perfect illustration of the rules of 
initiation and the common meal is found in the account of Mattidia’s 
baptism in 

Hom. xii. 9. ὁ Tlétpos ἔφη" Τί νομίζετε, ἐγὼ μόνος ἄσπλαγχνός εἰμι, 
ὅτι μὴ βούλομαι ὑμᾶς συνεστιασθῆναι τῇ μητρὶ βάπτισας αὐτὴν σήμερον ; 
ἀλλὰ KAN MIAN ἡμέραν πρὸ TOY Βαπτιοθῆνδι νηοτεζολι αὐτὴν δεῖ. 

Hom. ΧΙ. 11. ἡ δὲ μήτηρ ὑμῶν ἐπειδὴ πιστῶς διακεῖται περὶ τοῦ 
βαπτίσματος KAN MIAN πρὸ TOY BATITICMATOC νηοτεγοἄᾶτω ἡμέραν" ἡ δὲ ὥμνυεν, 
δύο τῶν διελθουσῶν ἡμερῶν, τῇ γυναικὶ τὰ κατὰ τὸν ἀναγνωρισμὸν διη- 
γουμένη, ἀπὸ τῆς πολλῆς χαρᾶς τροφῆς μεταλαβεῖν οὐκ ἠδυνήθην. 

Cf. the rest of the story, and the account of the baptism in the sea 
in Hom. xiy. 1. 


John Climacus. [Ob. ec. 580.] 


Bryennios drew attention to a curious passage in this writer which 
seems to illustrate and confirm the reading of his text of the Teaching 
im one very obscure place, viz. c. 1. ἐὰν λάβῃ τις ἀπὸ σοῦ τὸ σόν, μὴ 
ἀπαίτει: οὐδὲ γὰρ δύνασαι. 


an 
or 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


John Climacus (Migne, Patr. Gr. 88, col. 1029). 

° »" \ \ > -“ ᾿ ᾽ , \ a \ > - 
εὐσεβῶν μὲν τὸ αἰτοῦντι διδόναι, εὐσεβεστέρων δὲ καὶ τῷ μὴ αἰτοῦντι: 
- 70 δὲ ὠπὸ τοῦ αἴροντος MH ἀπδιτεῖν, AYNAMENOYC μάλιστα, τάχα τῶν ἀπαθῶν 
καὶ μόνων ἴδιον καθέστηκεν. 


A Scribe of the Sinaitic Codex. 

We have shewn that the epistle of Barnabas makes great use of the 
Teaching; hence it becomes of the utmost importance in such places where 
a quotation from the Teaching is introduced to determine the text of 
Barnabas with great care from its principal authorities, viz. the Sinaitic 
Codex, the Jerusalem MS., the Latin Version and the like. Now suppose 
that in any case the text of Barnabas being duly established we find that 
either the Sinaitic Codex or a correcting hand has deflected that text into 
greater agreement with the text of the Teaching. We should conclude 
that the scribe or corrector had acquaintance with the Teaching, and thus 
a new authority would be given for the distribution of that document in 
time and place. 

Let us illustrate by an example. In Barnabas iv. 9 the accepted text 
of Hilgenfeld and Funk is οὐδὲν γὰρ ὠφελήσει ἡμᾶς ὁ πᾶς χρόνος τῆς 
ζωῆς ἡμῶν καὶ τῆς πίστεως. 

Here the text follows the Latin Version, the Jerusalem Codex giving 
τῆς ζωῆς ἡμῶν and the Sinaitic Codex τῆς πίστεως ὑμῶν. Now if the 
received reading be correct, the ancestry of the Jerusalem Codex must 
have dropped the unintelligible words καὶ τῆς πίστεως, while the Sinaitic 
Codex, or one of its ancestors, must have restored the reading to the form 
in which it stands in the Teaching, and would thus be in evidence for 
the knowledge of the Teaching. As a matter of fact, however, it seems to 
me to be more simple to suppose conflation on the part of the Latin 
Version of Barnabas and error on the part of the ancestry of the Jerusalem 
Codex. We should thus bring the text of Barnabas into harmony with 
the Teaching. The passage will, however, serve to illustrate what we mean. 

Suppose again in Barnabas xix. we have οὐ φοβηθῶσι with the Jeru- 
salem Codex against the vulgate reading οὐ φοβηθήσῃ and the Sinaitic οὐ 
μὴ φοβηθήσονται, we must admit that the scribe of the Sinaitic or one of 
his literary ancestors has restored the reading of the Teaching to the text 
of Barnabas, or else he has given us the true reading of the text of 
Barnabas, which was primitively in harmony with the Teaching. Now 
this dilemma is not easy to resolve; nor is the conclusion as to the 
knowledge possessed by the scribe capable of being used for critical purposes, 
except only in such case as the hand of a corrector of known date or 
place has gone over the text of the Sinaitic and conformed it to the 
readings found in the Teaching. In this case we might with some show of 


Parallel pas- 
sages of the 
Teaching. 


i, 2 


56 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


reason affirm the probability that the corrector was acquainted with the 
Teaching, provided the texts of Barnabas shew no such variant as he 
introduces. 

For instance Hilgenfeld reads in Barnabas xix. 


\ 5 , » e , e / x A / e 
καὶ ἐκζητήσεις καθ᾽ ἑκάστην ἡμέραν ἢ διὰ λόγου KTE. 


following the combined verdict of the Jerusalem Codex and the Sinaitic 
against the Greek vulgate. A corrector of the Sinaitic Codex, however, 
adds τὰ πρόσωπα τῶν ἁγίων either from the Greek vulgate or from the 
Teaching. Which? Did he complete the sentence from some current text 
of Barnabas or from his knowledge of the Teaching? If the former, it 
gives very early authority indeed to the vulgate texts of Barnabas; if the 
latter, the Teaching was known in the seventh century to the owners of 
the Sinaitic Codex. In some cases it is almost certainly the former, as 
when he restores αὕτη ἐστὶν ἡ ὁδὸς τοῦ φωτός. Perhaps then we might 
satisfy the conditions of the question by this latter hypothesis. 

But what shall we say when the first hand of the Codex Sinaiticus 
reads for πόσῳ μᾶλλον ἐν τοῖς φθαρτοῖς of all other authorities the θνητοῖς 
of the Teaching (c. iv. 8)? Since it seems impossible to assume this to be 
the correct text of Barnabas, for the corrector of the Codex deserts it, 
the reading must be a memory of the Teaching. We must say then that 
the scribe of the Simaitic Codex or one of his literary ancestors was 
acquainted with the text of the Teaching. 


Severinus. [? Archbishop of Cologne, saec. v.] 


From Pez: Thesawrus anecdotorum, Tom. Iv. pars i. p. 1. (Pez gives his 
authority as “ex MS, Cod. Inclyti Monasterii Hilariensis Ord. Cist. in Austria.”) 


Doctrina Severini Episcopi De Sapientia. 
Cap. I. 


De amore Dei et Sapientia, charitate in proximum, taciturnitate, mansue- 
tudine, ac justitia. 


1. Dilige Deum: Sapientiam disce. 

Quod odis, et tabi fieri non vis, aliis non facias. 
Spere semper in Domino: tempus futurum exspecta. 
Sapientes homines cole: insipientes fuge. 

Quod bonum est, discere non erubescas. 

Linguae tuae impera. 

Pecuniae amator non fueris. 


2 bo 


Al eo tes 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 57 
8. Bona est taciturnitas: mala est verbositas. iii. 8 
9. Nullum contemnas. ii. 7 
10. Majorem natu verere: pdaieeeertrorert si sapiens fuerit, ut senem ?iv. 1 
honora; et quae animae prosunt, discere labora. xvi. 2 
11. Quod daturus es, ex animo da, quia futura ignoras, iv. 7 
12. Nemini opprobrium dixeris. iii. 6 
13. Aequo animo esto. ili. 7 
14. Lram fuge; mater est peccati. iii, 2 
15. Justitiam operare in judicio: servos dilige. εὐ ἢ 
Cap. II. 


De modestia, studio tranquillitatis et pacis, de prudentia, orationis puritate, 
observantia legum, et confessione peccatorum. 


10. 


11; 
12. 


De nullo male loquaris: memineris hominem te esse. 

De rebus multis noli anxius esse: sapiens homo non cito turbatur. 
Cum nullo litiges. 

Linguam bonae famae habe. 

Sectare silentium ne te multum poenitentia sequatur. 


Tuis mansuetus esto, et extraneis necessarius. iv. 10 
Brutis sapientiam ne dederis: nam postea persequentur te. ix, 5 
Sacramenta Dei nisi dignis non aperias. ix. 5 


Noli esse amarus his, qui in tristitia sunt. 

Lege hominum ut homo utere: et lege Dei ut Dei. 

Noli invidere bono: non enim immortalis es. 

Cum conscientia mala noli accedere ad orationem: condemnaberis enim iy. 14 


per tuam conscientiam. 


13. 


Confessio peccati initium salutis. iv. 14 


Cap. III. 


De fuga detractionis, clementia, occlusione feminarum a testimonio, de 
homicidio et adulterio, charitate in servos, &c. 


if; 
2. 
3. 


Neminem male loqui permittas, ne ut fautor injustitiae habearis. 
Absentem noli condemnare: praesentem juste accipe. 
Ex argumentis noli condemnare, ne et tu condemneris: quia displicent 


Deo talia et quomodo nos viderit agentes, sic judicat. 


ONS 


H. 


Mulierem in testimonium noli recipere. 

Omne peccatum indulge praeter homicidium aut adulterium. 

Injuriam facienti noli consentire, ne sicut injustitiae adjutor puniaris. 

Servos ut filios enutri. iv. 10 

Apud Deum omnes aequales sumus, quia personas non accipit. iv. 10 
ὃ 


58 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Cap, IV. 


Fugienda superbia, bonorum societas quaerenda, orationis qui locus et 
modus, ete. 


1. Superbis noli conjungi. 

2. Facies sanctorum semper inquire, ut instruaris verbis eorwm. 

3. Misero ΠΟΙ exprobrare, ne et tu exprobrabilis efficiaris: circa omnes 
enim justum judicium Dei est. 

4. Adorans Deum secrete adora, et noli notabilem locum eligere: ubique 
enim est Deus et ubicunque invocatus fuerit, adest. 


5. Et orans noli multum loqui, ne stulto similis habearis. Nam quae 
cogitas, ante quam petas, Deus non ignorat. 


FINIS. 


We have given this little tract on Discipline in full in order that the 
process of its manufacture may be carefully studied. It is evidently based 
upon the Teaching, and indeed it is almost amusing to see how the bones 
shew through the skin. For example, in c. 11. 7 the expression “ brutis 
sapientiam ne dederis” at once recalls the passage “Give not that which is 
holy to the dogs,” a reference which appears also from the words “ postea 
persequentur te.” But that the words are taken from the Teaching and not 
from the Gospel, and have a further reference to the Eucharist, appears from 
the fact that a second precept is hung on the same thread, with direct refer- 
ence to the “Sacramenta Dei.” 

In a similar manner the writer having in c. ii. 12 maintained the necessity 
of prayer being uttered from a pure conscience (in the very words of the 
Teaching) returns to the clause of the Teaching which he had omitted, viz. 
that on Confession, and makes a special precept on the subject. Notice also 
the way in which he has altered the sentence in 6. iv. 1 of the Teaching. The 
date of the writer is the beginning of the fifth century, if we are to accept the 
identification of Pez who makes him bishop of Cologne: if however the writer 
is St Severinus who lived upon the banks of the Danube, and whose life was 
written by his disciple Eugippius, then we must place him in the latter part 
of the fifth century’. He was certainly acquainted with the Teaching, and 
probably in its complete form, since he betrays his knowledge of the last 
chapter by a single clause and was also acquainted with the ninth chapter. 
He does not shew any trace of the supposed interpolation (c. 1. 3—ii 1). 


1 Of, Rettberg, Kirchengeschichte Deutschlands, i. 202, 226. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 59 


S. Boniface. [Archbishop of Mainz, saee. viii.] 


It will be remembered that in our notes on the Latin fragment, attention 
was drawn to a sermon of Boniface on the subject of Baptismal Renunciation 
which Pez transcribes from a codex in the cloister-library at Milk. No one, 
as far as I know, seems to have noted that this sermon is based directly upon 
the Teaching. In fact the book of extracts which contains the sermon has 
arranged the matters with which it deals in an orderly manner, so that those 
subjects which are similar come together, and in the neighbourhood of the 
fragment of the Teaching stands the patristic matter which is most closely 
connected therewith. It is much to be wished that some one would examine 
the Pez Codex more carefully and report wpon what he finds. All we can 
do here is to point out the underlying sentences of the Teaching in the fabric 
of the Sermon. Accordingly we print the Sermon at length with the 
references to the Teaching noted on the margin or by italics. 


Ammonitio sive predicatio sancti Bonifacti Episcopt de Abrenuntiatione in 
Baptismate. 


Audite fratres et adtentius cogitetis quid in Baptismo renuntiastis. Abre- Parallel pas- 
nuntiastis enim diabolo et omnibus operibus ejus et omnibus pompis ejus. Quid roan? 
sunt ergo opera diaboli? Haee sunt, superbia, idolatria’, invidia, homicidium, e, i.) 
detractio, mendacium, perjurium, odium, fornicatio, adulterium, omnis pollutio, me Ϊ 
furta, falsum testimonium, rapina, avaritia, gula, ebrietas, turpiloquia, con- passim. 
tentiones, ira, beneficia, mcantationes, et sortilegos exquirere, strigas et fictos 
lupos* credere, abortum (cod. avorsum) facere, dominis inobedientes esse, 
filacteria habere. Haee et his similia mala opera sunt diaboli, et his omnibus iii. 1 
in Baptismo renuntiastis, et sicut Apostolus dicit; qui talia agunt, digni sunt 
morte et regnum Dei non consequentur. 

Sed quia credimus per Dei misericordiam, ut his omnibus superius dictis 
corde et opere renuntietis, ut veniam consequi mereamini: ammoneo vos, 
Fratres karissimi, ut reminiscamini quod omnipotenti Deo promisistis. 

Primitus enim promisistis credere in Deum patrem omnipotentem et in 
Jesum Christum filium ejus, et in Spiritum Sanctum, unum omnipotentem 
Deum in Trinitate perfecta. 

Haec sunt mandata Dei quae facere et conservare debetis, wt Dewm quem 
confessi estis diligatis ex toto corde et ex tota mente, et ex tota virtute. 
Deinde proximos vestros tanquam vosmetipsos. In his omnibus mandatis 
tota lex pendet et Prophetae. 


τῷ 


11, idololatria. 
2 i.e, werewolves. 


oo 
᾿ 


60 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Estote patientes, estote misericordes, benigni, casti, impolluti. Filios docete 
ut Deum timeant: familiam similiter. Discordes pacate. Qui causas audit, 
Juste judicet, munera non accipiat, quia munera obcoecant etiam sapientes. 

Diem Dominicam observate: ad Ecclesiam convenite, ibi orantes et non 
verbositantes. Elimosinas date juxta vires: quia sicut aqua extinguit ignem, 
ita elimosina extinguit peccatum. Hospitales invicem peregrinos suscipete, 
infirmos visitate, viduis et pupillis ministrate, decimas reddite ecclesiis, et 
quod tibi non vis, alio ne facias. Deum solum ubique timete. Servi subditi 
estote dominis et domini justitiam conservate servis. Orationem Dominicam 
et Symbolum tenete et filiis vestris tradite et filiolis vestris, quos in baptismo 
fide jussores extitistis. Jejunium amate, justitiam diligete, diabolo resistite, 
Kucharistiam per tempora sumite. Haec sunt opera, quae Deus jussit facere 
et conservare et his similia. Venturum Christum credite et carnis resurrec- 
tionem et judicium omnium hominum. Ibi discernuntur impii in ignem 
aeternum : justi autem in vitam aeternam. Ibi est vita cum Deo sine morte, 
lux sine tenebris, salus sine aegritudine, satietas sine fame, felicitas sine timore, 
gaudium sine tristitia, ibi aeterna gloria, ibi fulgebunt justi sicut Sol, quam 
(sic ἢ) oculus (cod. oculos) non vidit, nee aures (sic!) audivit nee in cor hominis 
ascendit, quantum praeparayvit Deus diligentibus se. Hoc etiam moneo vos, 
Fratres karissimi, quia natalis Domini imminit (sic cod.), ut abstineatis vos ab 
omnia luxuria, et ab omni fornicatione, et ab omni immunditia, et ab omnibus 
operibus malis. Iracundiam et odium et invidiam velut venenum de vestris 
cordibus respuite. Castitatem etiam cum propriis uxoribus conservate. Ornate 
vos bonis operibus. Elimosinas pauperibus Christi erogate, ad convivia lautiora 
pauperes frequentius revocate. Pacem cum omnibus custodite, discordes pacate. 

Hoe si fideliter Christo adjuvante volueritis adimplere, et in hoe seculo ad 


altare Domini securiter potestis accedere, et in futuro ad aeternam beatitu- 
dinem feliciter pervenite. 


The foregoing sermon shews the use of the Teaching from beginning to 
end, and in some cases uses the very language of it. Nearly all the subjects 
treated of in the Teaching are represented, Prayers, Fasts, Eucharists, Church 
hospitalities and Church dues, the Sunday meeting and the second advent. 
Hence we are entitled to say that if Boniface was the apostle of Germany, the 
Teaching must have been his text-book. And the complete book (without 
prejudice to the question of interpolation) was therefore known on the banks 
of the Rhine in the beginning of the eighth century. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 61 


NOTICES OF THE TEACHING BY WRITERS ON THE CANON 
ΟἿ᾽ DEBS Ν ΤΣ 


Eusebius. (+340 A.p.) 
Hist. Eccl. wi. 25. 
ἐν τοῖς νόθοις κατατετάχθω καὶ τῶν Ἰ]αύλου πράξεων ἡ γραφὴ ὅ τε λεγό- 
\ Ν id > Li / \ \ Ul « , 
μενος Ποιμὴν καὶ ἡ ἀποκάλυψις Ἱ]έτρου, καὶ πρὸς τούτοις ἡ φερομένη Bap- 
νάβα ἐπιστολὴ καὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων αἱ λεγόμεναι διδαχαί. 


Athanasius. [307 A.D.] 

Festal Letters. 

»Μ ‘ “ ,ὔ , » Ἵ , \ , 

ἔστι καὶ ἕτερα βιβλία τούτων ἔξωθεν οὐ κανονιζόμενα μὲν τετυπωμένα 
δὲ παρὰ τῶν πατέρων ἀναγινώσκεσθαι τοῖς ἄρτι προσερχομένοις καὶ βουλο- 
μένοις κατηχεῖσθαι τὸν τῆς εὐσεβείας λόγον, Σοφία Σολομῶντος καὶ Σοφία 
Σιρὰχ καὶ ᾿Εσθὴρ καὶ ᾿Ιουδὶθ καὶ Τωβίας καὶ Διδαχὴ καλουμένη τῶν ἀπο- 
στόλων καὶ ὁ ἸΠοιμήν. 


Rufinus. [c. 410 Α.}.] 


Comm. in Symb. Apost. § 38. 

In novo vero Testamento libellus qui dicitur Pastoris sive Hermas, qui 
appellatur Duae Viae vel Judicium Petri. Quae omnia legi quidem in ecclesiis 
voluerunt non tamen proferri ad auctoritatem ex his fidei confirmandam. 


Nicephorus Constantinopolitanus, (Patr. Const. 806—814.) 


καὶ ὅσα τῆς νέας ἀπόκρυφα. 
> / \ fal , / 
εὐαγγέλιον κατὰ Θωμᾶν: στίχοι ar’, 
διδαχὴ ἀποστόλων" στίχοι σ΄. 
From a Catalogue of Canonical and other books in the Bodleian Library 
(Cod. Baroce, 206). 
ν “ ᾽ , 

καὶ ὅσα ἀπόκρυφα. 


ιζ΄. περίοδοι καὶ διδαχαὶ τῶν ἀποστόλων, 
ιη. Βαρνάβα ἐπιστολή. 


The Teaching 
needs little 
emending 


but it has 

a few very 
obseure pas- 
sages. 


* Saved by 
the curse,” 


which is an 
early canon 
of interpreta- 
tion 


62 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


OBSCURE PASSAGES IN THE TEACHING. 


Probably there never was a document which so successfully vindicated 
its right not to be conjecturally emended as the Teaching. Indeed we may 
say that with the exception of one or two merely clerical errors, the text 
justifies itself almost at every point. For example no one now wishes to 
correct the expression ὁρίζων τράπεζαν (noe JIS) nor the at first sight 
difficult ἐκπέτασις ἐν οὐρανῷ. There may perhaps be still some slight dis- 
agreement as to the meaning of the terms employed; none, I think, as to 
the correctness of the words. 

In fact, as previously stated, the opinion of Harnack is that there are 
only three passages in the Teaching that can be said to still resist ex- 
planation. And so much light has been thrown upon these by the Talmudic 
skill of Dr Taylor in his admirable lectures on the Teaching, that two out 
of the three places referred to need very little further to be said upon them. 
Whatever we may have to say will readily be recognized to have its foundation 
in the lectures referred to. 

We shall begin with the obscurity that stands almost at the end of the 
tract which runs in the MS. as follows: 


e \ ¢ ,ὔ aA ,ὔ ’ lal lal cal 
ot δὴ ὑπομείναντες ἐν TH πίστει αὐτῶν σωθήσονται ὑπ᾽ αὐτοῦ τοῦ κατα- 
θέματος, 


and which should be translated “but they that endure in their faith shall 
be saved by the very curse”: the only alternatives being to take ὑπὸ in 
the sense of motion from under the curse, “they shall be saved from under 
the curse itself,” or to interpret αὐτοῦ in a personal sense and render it 
“shall be saved by Him the curse.” Nothing is gained by substituting 
ἀπὸ for ὑπὸ nor by such emendations as the one proposed by Bryennios ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτοῦ τοῦ κάτω θέματος, that is to say “upon the earth.” 

We proceed to explain the passage; and we have selected this one to 
begin with because when rightly understood it throws light upon the other 
obscurities of the Teaching. 

Let us then remark that the most popular canon of soteriology in early 
times is if I may coin an expression that of Salvation by Similars. It is 
not merely that the antidote grows near the poison, it grows on the same 
stem with the poison; that which damns turns into that which saves. Thus 
there is hardly a curse pronounced in the Scripture that is not interpreted. 
in a remedial manner by early exegetes; whether the Christians borrowed 
the idea from Rabbinism or not, the conceit is none the less wide-spread over 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 63 


their earlier literature, and we shall shew that it has affected the New 
Testament itself. 

Nowhere is this more strikingly seen than in expositions of the first 
chapters of Genesis; partly because all Christians were formerly educated 
in the interpretation of these chapters, so that there grew up both amongst 
Jews and Christians a mystical Gnosis of the Pentateuch, and partly be- 
cause in the present case curses congregate in that part of the Scripture. 
Let us examine some of these: there is a curse upon the serpent who deceives 
by means of the tree of knowledge, there is a curse upon childbirth, there 
is a curse upon the ground. Let us take these in order and see how they 
would be explained by primitive divinity. We begin with the cursed serpent. 


Now in order to turn the serpent to some good end we may proceed, if 


we please, by Gematria or the numerical calculation of the letters of the 
word for serpent (WM), and then by a common device substituting for ἢ 
the two letters which are numerically equivalent to it, and %, we form the 
name of Messiah (MY). In this way man is saved by the Curse itself: 
and either this or a similar gnosis is implied in the words of our Lord to 
Nicodemus, “As Moses lifted up the serpent in the wilderness, so must 
the Son of Man be lifted up’”: words which would thus be an indirect state- 
ment of his Messiahship. The illustration which He used is a favourite 
instance of the law of salvation by the Curse, and was frequently on the 


lips of early exegetes and must, I suspect, have been a commonplace of 


primitive preachers. So important was the mystery involved in this act 
of Moses that he was held to be justified on account of it for having 
broken his own law against the making of images, and there is no doubt 
that the early Christians employed the illustration freely in arguing with 
the Jews, since we find the argument as late as Anastasius of Sinai’, as 
follows:—do7ep yap ὑμεῖς οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι ἐπιστεύσατε τῷ ὄφει TO χαλκῷ Kpe- 
μαμένῳ ἐπὶ ξύλου, ἐπικατηραμένου ὄντος ἀπὸ παντὸς θηρίου οὗτινος ἡ εἰκὼν 
ζωὴν παρεῖχε τοῖς προγόνοις ἡμῶν: ὡς γὰρ ὁ ὄφις ὁ μὴ δάκνων ὑπὲρ τῶν δακνόν- 
των ὄφεων ζωὴν ἔφερεν, οὕτω καὶ ὁ Χριστὸς ἀναμάρτητος ὧν ὑπὲρ ἁμαρτωλῶν 
κρεμασθείς, ζωὴν τῷ κόσμῳ ἐχαρίσατο. According to Anastasius, then, the 
cure for a serpent is a serpent, the one that does not bite becomes the 
remedy for the one that does, and thus we are saved by the curse itself®. 
Similar reasoning is found in a curious homily On the Serpent‘, attributed 
to Severianus of Gabala. Its interest lies in the persistence which it shews 
of traditional Jewish objections to the doctrine of the Cross, while we may be 


1 John iii, 14. 

2 Disp. adv. Jud. (Migne, Patr. Gr, Ixxxix. 1245, and cf. 1276). 

3 Is there a similar reason for the explanation of the Targum that God clothed Adam and 
Eve in the cast-off skin of a serpent? 

4 Migne, Patr. Gr. lvi. col. 501, 


perhaps based 
on the first 
chapters of 
Genesis 


and has given 
rise both to 
Gematria 


and to much 
subtle exe- 
gesis. 


64 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


sure that the answers given by Severianus contain the ordinary Christian 
presentation of those explanations which were in vogue amongst the teachers 
of times much anterior to his own, Severianus argues as follows:—“It is 
written, Cursed is he that hangeth on a tree. If then it is thus written, and 
attested (by St Paul), how is the blessing given from the thing cursed to the 
followers of the Cross? Such objections are ever made and put forward by 
the Jew, that enemy of the cross of Christ. Suppose then that he should 
say to you, How doth the cursed one give blessing? say to him, How was it 
in the wilderness when the serpents bit thy ancestors and Moses made a 
serpent of brass and set it on a cross and said, Let every one that hath been 
bitten by a serpent give heed to the serpent and he shall be saved? And 
what, he will say, has that to do with the matter in hand? But in good 
sooth it has much to do with it. Hast thou never heard God saying, Cursed 
art thou above all beasts of the earth? How then did the image of the 
cursed bring life to thy ancestors? I repeat my words that I may confirm 
their meaning. If it is considered out of the question with you to attach a 
blessmg to the cursed (for cursed is every one that hangeth on a tree), how 
did the image of the cursed serpent, that heard the words, Cursed art thou, 
&c., bring salvation to the people lying in distress? Would it not have been 
more credible to say, ‘If any one of you has been bitten let him look to 
the Heaven above, to God, and he shall be saved’? But leaving out the 
question of lookmg to Heaven, could he not have said, If any one has been 
bitten, let him look to the candlestick and he shall be saved; or to the table 
of the shewbread or to the altar or the vail, or to the ark or to the image 
of the cherubim or to the mercy-seat? But the great Lawgiver introduced 
none of these: he only erected the figure of the Cross, and that too by 
means of the cursed serpent. Wherefore then, Jew, doth Moses thus? where- 
fore doth he make a molten serpent, he that saith, Thou shalt not make a 
carven or molten image? But why do I utter such questions to one void 
of knowledge? I will ask the lawgiver himself, Tell me, most faithful of 
the servants of God, wherefore doest thou what thou forbiddest ? why framest 
thou what thou dost reject? Thou that sayest, Make no carven nor molten 
image, dost thou make a molten serpent? But, saith he, these laws I or- 
dained to cut off the material of impiety and to lead this people out of 
idolatry. But I do now mould the serpent that 7 may typify beforehand 
the image of the dispensation of the Cross.’ He then goes on to shew, as 
Anastasius does, that the serpent which does not bite is the cure for those 
that do. 

The same idea hes hidden in the following sentence of Irenaeus (IV. iv. 2): 
“non enim lex prohibebat eos credere in Filium Dei, sed et adhortabatur, 
dicens non aliter salvari homines ab antiqua serpentis plaga, nisi credant in 
eum, qui secundum similitudinem carnis peccati in ligno martyrii exaltatur 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 65 


a terra.” The reason why Christ is made in the likeness of sinful flesh, is in 
order that he may appear to be the curse itself, just as the innocent brass 
appeared to be a serpent’. 

In all of the preceding extracts another point is brought out, namely, 
that the original curse which came by the serpent upon man was wrought 
by means of the tree of knowledge of good and evil. This is involved in the 
reference to the cross as “a tree.” Hence it might be said in a certain sense 
that a curse resided in the tree. Certainly the early fathers thought so, since 
they never tire of reiterating that if man was lost by the tree, he is also 
saved by the tree, namely the cross, which either stands as representing the 
destructive tree of knowledge, or else mystically stands for the tree of life 
which is planted hard by. Hence by a tree we lose, and by a tree we gain, 
and thus we are saved by the very curse. This cannot be put more positively 
than in Irenaeus (V. xvii. 4) (though I suppose it to be involved in 1 Pet. ii. 
24 “in his own body on the tree”), where we find 

ἐπεὶ yap διὰ ξύλου ἀπεβάλομεν αὐτὸν διὰ ξύλου πάλιν φανερὸν τοῖς πᾶσιν 
ἐγένετο, ἐπιδεικνύων τὸ ὕψος καὶ μῆκος καὶ πλάτος καὶ βάθος ἐν ἑαυτῷ. 

It is also very clearly stated in an extract ascribed to Eusebius? in the 
Parallels of John of Damascus. 

Dam. Par. 697. ἐπειδὴ διὰ τοῦ ξύλου ἐθανάτωσε τὸν πρωτόπλαστον ὁ 
Σατανᾶς, διὰ τοῦτο ὃ κύριος ἐνανθρωπήσας διὰ τοῦ ξύλου τοῦ σταυροῦ αὐτοῦ 
τὸν διάβολον καταπάτημα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου πεποίηκεν" ὅσοι yap ἔχουσι τὸ τοῦ 
σταυροῦ σημεῖον καταπατοῦσιν αὐτοῦ τὴν δύναμιν. 

Another form of the curse consists in the pangs of childbirth, and here too 
we shall find that the same method of exegesis prevails. The woman must 
find her salvation by that which is her curse, that is to say by the child- 
bearing: for her seed bruises the head of the serpent; her pains are the birth- 
pangs of the Messiah. Hence in 1 Tim. ii. 15 after a direct reference to Eve 
it is said that she (Woman) shall be saved through the childbearing. The 
gains are to be found in the pains. She, 1.6. Woman representatively, has 
sorrow for a season, but after that she has joy because the Man (so read with X*) 
has been born into the world. Chrysostom, or some one who passes under 
his name, brings out this expectation of Salvation on the part of the Woman, 
in a homily on the Decapitation of John the Baptist, of which the following 
extract is quoted in the Parallels of John of Damascus. 

Dam. Par. 415. ἀλλὰ μηδεὶς παρακαλῶ τοῦ λοιποῦ λοιδορείτω THY Εὔαν" 
ἡ γὰρ ἁγία θεοτόκος παρθένος τὴν ὕβριν αὐτῆς ἀπεγράψατο. εἰ γὰρ καὶ 
ἀτακτήσασα συνόμιλος τῷ ὄφει γέγονεν, GAN ὅμως διὰ τῆς τεκνογονίας τὸ 
ἄχγος τῆς ἀνομίας ἀπέθετο, καθὼς καὶ ὁ ἀπόστολος ἐμνημόνευσε λέγων" ἡ γυνὴ 


1 Cf. Cyril Alex. (Migne Patr. Gr. Ixix. 640) τεθεάμεθα γὰρ τὸν ὄφιν, τούτεστι Χριστόν.. 
Οφις δὴ οὖν ὁ Χριστός. 

? Query, of Alexandria. 

3 So in Quest. ad Antiochum (Patr. Gr. xxviii. 694), καὶ καθάπερ διὰ τοῦ καρποῦ τοῦ ξύλου 


ἢ ἁμαρτία, οὕτω διὰ τοῦ ξύλου τοῦ σταυροῦ ἡ σωτηρία. 


Η. ὃ 


John xvi. 20. 


ra) 


Tobit iv. 10. 


66 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


ἀπατηθεῖσα ἐν παραβάσει γέγονεν, σωθήσεται δὲ διὰ τῆς Texvoyovias. ποίας; ἐκ 
μὲν αὐτοῦ τοῦ ᾿Αδὰμ οἱ γεννηθέντες παῖδες, ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν δὲ οἱ μετ᾽ ἐκείνους, εἶτα 
οἱ πατριάρχαι, οἱ προφῆται, Δαβίδ, καὶ τὸ κατὰ σάρκα, ὁ Δεσπότης Χριστός. 

Here the Salvation of Woman by the Curse is not restricted to the Messiah, 
but is reckoned as a continuous process through the birth of holy men, 
culminating in the Messiah. Other writers have given a further interpretation, 
regarding woman not only as cursed, but as the curse. And indeed this is 
involved in the preceding quotation. 

Taking the matter a step further let us ask in what way the Curse of 
the Fall comes more especially upon Man. The answer is that the ground 
is cursed for his sake and he labours in the sweat of his brow; hence in some 
way or other his salvation has to come from the ground and from his labours, 
I believe this is the origin, one origin at least, of the exaggerated importance 
which the Jews attached to almsgiving. Whatever view prevailed at first 
with regard to the grace of almsgiving and its power of delivering some other 
person from death, it is certain that in very early times the person redeemed 
from death was the giver of alms. Alms cancelled the decrees of heaven just 
as much as did reformation of conduct or prayer’. Hence the Teaching directs 
that by means of our hands we should give a ransom for our sins. The 
meaning is that the products of the soil which has been cursed constitute, 
as alms, the form in which the Curse becomes Salvation. To the man they 
are the pains which God gives him for his salvation, just as to the woman 
her sorrows involve her benediction. His alms are the sweat of his brow, 
and by them he must be saved, at least if the rule of Salvation by the Curse 
is always to be maintained. 

Nor must it be forgotten that the curse culminates in the fact that 
man must die; and we will only draw attention to those passages which 
affirm that “as by man came death, by man came also the resurrection 
from the dead”; “that through death he might destroy him that had the 
power of death, the devil®.”’ Both of these are aspects of the same rule, 
Salvation by the Curse. Nor is it to be omitted that “God sent forth his 
Son, made of a woman,” since by woman sin entered in. Irenaeus expressly 
affirms that the devil would not have been fairly conquered except by a 
man born of a woman. For, says he (¥. xxi. 1), “neque autem juste victus 
fuisset inimicus, nisi ex muliere homo esset qui vicit eum. Per mulierem 
enim homini dominatus est.” And Justin even says that as the curse 
came by a Virgin, so by a Virgin the salvation, καὶ διὰ τῆς παρθένου 
ἄνθρωπον γεγονέναι, ἵνα καὶ δι’ ἧς ὁδοῦ ἡ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄφεως παρακοὴ τὴν 
ἀρχὴν ἔλαβε, διὰ ταύτης τῆς ὁδοῦ καὶ κατάλυσιν λάβῃ" παρθένος γὰρ οὖσα 
Eva κτὲ A better illustration of Salvation by Similars could hardly be 
wished for. 

1 Rosh Hashana, f. 16 b. 


2 Cf. Methodius, De Cruce (Migne xviii. 401), πάθος παθῶν διὰ τοῦ παθεῖν γενόμενος, καὶ θάνατος 
διὰ τοῦ θανεῖν θανάτον. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 67 


Sometimes the argument that salvation must come by woman is pushed 
to a fanciful extreme. The women who announce the resurrection become 
representatives in the matter of salvation who answer to Eve in her sin. 
They are the heralds of salvation, she the author of sin. She leads the 
first Adam to his fall; they bear witness to the second Adam in his rising. 
This is very clearly stated in Ps.-Athan. in Sanctum Pascha (Migne, Patr. 
Gr. xxviii. 1084): 

καὶ ai γυναῖκες τοῖς ἀποστόλοις εὐηγγελίζοντο τοῦ Χριστοῦ τὴν ἀνάστασιν 
καὶ τοῦτο εἰκότως" οὕτω γὰρ τῆς Evas ἡ ἐπήρεια τῷ διαβόλῳ περιετρέπετο. 
ὅθεν γὰρ ὥδευσεν ἡ νόσος, ἐκεῖθεν ἡ θεράπεια ἔρχεται: ὕθεν ὁ θάνατος 
ἤρξατο, ἐκεῖθεν ἡ ἀνάστασις φαίνεται: γυνὴ γὰρ τῆς παραβάσεως αἰτία 
καὶ τῆς ἀναστάσεως κήρυξ ἡ τὸν πρῶτον "Adam πρὸς τὴν πτῶσιν χει- 
ραγωγήσασα, τὸν δεύτερον ᾿Αδὰμ ἀνάσταντα μαρτύρεται. 

It will be seen that our author distinctly regards the women at the 
sepulchre as a particular instance of the general law that the remedy must 
proceed from the disease, ie. as the Teaching puts it, salvation is by the 
curse. Another variation is to regard woman as sprung from the side of 
man, in which case the side furnishes the curse: it must accordingly 
furnish the redemption. The writer just quoted makes the pierced hands 
of the second Adam redemptive for the hands of the first Adam stretched 
out to take the fruit, and his pierced side the remedy for the death 
which was brought in by Eve: 

Col. 1085. idm χεῖρας ὀρυχθείσας, δι’ ὧν ai παραβᾶσαι τοῦ ᾿Αδὰμ ἐθερα- 
πεύθησαν χεῖρες. ἴδω πλευράν, δι’ ἧς ὁ ἐκ τῆς πλευρᾶς ἀνήρῃται θάνατος. 

A similar statement will be found in Quest. ad Antiochum (Migne, Patr. 
Gr. xxvill. 696): 

λόγχῃ THY πλευρὰν νύττεται, ἵνα τὴν ἐκ τῆς πλευρᾶς τοῦ ᾿Αδὰμ κτι- 
σθεῖσαν θεραπεύσῃ καὶ τὴν φλογίνην ῥομφαίαν τὴν καθ᾽ ἡμῶν στρεφομένην 
παύσῃ. 

Here the spear in the Redeemer's side is the antidote for the flaming 
sword, and the side-wound of the second Adam the cure for the evil that 
sprung from the side-wound of the first. 

Similar arguments will be found in a tract on the Passion of the Lord 
bound up with the works of Athanasius. The writer not only lays down 
the general principle that man is set free by those things which were his 
condemnation, but takes a special instance in the thief upon the cross. 
The first Adam stretched his hands to sin and lost his paradise by the 
act. The penitent thief expands his arms to a cross and regains paradise. 

Ps.-Athan. in Passionem Domini (Migne, Patr. Gr. xxvii. 1055): 

ξύλον καταδίκης ὄργανον τοῖς καταδίκοις ἐλευθερίαν ἐκαρποφόρησεν ...... 
ὁ πλάστης ξύλον ἀντιφάρμακον ξύλου τῇ φύσει χαρίζεται καὶ πάθος oiko- 
νομίας εἰσήνεγκε πάθους ἀλεξιφάρμακον καὶ θανάτῳ κρατοῦντι θανάτου 


9—2 


68 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


ἀνθοπλίσας κατηγωνίσατο. Kal πάλιν ἐλεύθερος ὁ ἄνθρωπος, ols ἐδέθη πρὸς 
θάνατον, τούτοις τὴν ἀθανασίαν εὑράμενος, δ ὧν γὰρ κατεκρίνετο, διὰ 
τούτων ἐλύετο....... οἷς ὁ πρῶτος ᾿Αδὰμ κατεκρίθη, τούτοις ὁ δεύτερος ᾿Αδὰμ 
ἠλευθερώθη: ὑφ᾽ ὧν ἡ ἀρχὴ τῶν ἀνθρώπων κατέπεσεν, ὑπὸ τούτων ἡ ἀπαρχὴ 
τῶν ἀνθρώπων avuydbn. 

Col. 1060. ὦ λῃστὰ τοῦ προγόνου περὶ τὸν παράδεισον ἀσφαλέστερε! 
ἐκεῖνος ἀκαίρως ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα ἐπὶ τὸ ξύλον θάνατον εἰς τὸν σταυρὸν 
εἰσήγαγε σὺ δὲ εὐκαίρως ἐπὶ τὸν σταυρὸν τὰς χεῖρας ἁπλώσας τὸν ἀπο- 
λόμενον ἀνεκτήσω παράδεισον. 

If we proceed a little farther with the book of Genesis we find the same 
method of interpretation to prevail in primitive times. 

Let us then notice how when the earth was cursed with a flood, the elect 
found their redemption. In this case Water is the curse, and therefore we 
find in 1 Pet. (iii. 20) that in those days “few, that is eight souls, were saved 
by water,” 1.6. they were saved by the curse. 

The explanation was sometimes carried beyond the simple statement of 
the apostle by explaining how the waters buoyed up the ark from below 
instead of submerging it from above, and at the same time, the idea of 
salvation from the curse by the curse being prominent to the mind of the 
exegete, the wood of the ship is made to do duty and redeem them from 
the curse derived from the tree, and thus the ship is now the cross (Wood = 
Tree = Cross= τὸ ξύλον). Thus Justin says (Dial. 111) ὁ Noe ἐν ξύλῳ διεσώθη 
ἐποχούμενος τοῖς ὕδασι. 

We have already alluded to the illustration which the Brazen Serpent 
furnishes of the matter; perhaps it should also be admitted that in a certain 
sense and in some circles Christ himself came to be called the Curse. The 
passage in the Teaching cannot however be restricted to a merely personal 
reference ; and although it might be owned that Paul went rather out of his 
way to demonstrate to the Galatians that Christ was the Curse, yet when 
he found the Corinthians carrying the doctrine ἀνάθεμα ᾿Ιησοῦς into too 
positive statement, he denied that those who used the term spoke by the 
Spirit. Justin also tried to put a check on those who carried the personal 
reference beyond what was appropriate. For he says in his Dialogue with 
Trypho that our Christ “was not cursed by the law; but he was only demon- 
strating that he would save those who did not depart from their faith”: 

Dial. 111. ὁ οὖν παθητὸς ἡμῶν καὶ σταυρωθεὶς Χριστὸς ov KATHPABH ὑπὸ 
τοῦ νόμου, ἀλλὰ μόνος εὦςειν TOYC ΜῊ AICTAMENOYC THC πίοτεως αὐτοῦ ἐδήλου. 

The coincidence of this language with that of the Teaching is very remark- 
able. The Teaching affirms that those who abide in their faith shall be 
saved by the curse itself.’ If no other evidence were forthcoming from Justin, 
I think it would be sufficient to shew his use of the Teaching. Justin is 
evidently repelling the opinion that Jesus is the one Cursed by the Law, 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 69 


but he does not deny the personal reference to Christ in the question; and 

this would seem to shew that it was a popular interpretation of the sentence 
in the Teaching. 

It is, however, certain to my mind that the passage has a much wider 

sense than that which Justin and his friends attached to 10". 


Alms and Sweat. 


The next passage to be examined is Διδ i 6 which stands in the 
MS. iSpwtatw ἡ ἐλεημοσύνη cov εἰς τὰς χεῖράς σου μέχρις ἂν γνῷς τίνι 
δῷς. It is by far the most difficult in the whole tract. Various un- 
successful attempts have been made to emend it, as ἱδρωσάτω (Bryennios) 
which is only a change of verb-form: ἱδρυσάτω (Hilgenfeld) ; μὴ δραχθήτω 
(Harnack), ἅς. Of one thing we may, I think, assure ourselves, that the 
text cannot be very far wrong as it stands. For every idea in it can be 
closely paralleled from writers acquainted with the Teaching. We have 
already drawn attention, under our remarks upon the Curse, to the pro- 
minence which is given to alms as the redemptive side of the curse of 
labour. Sweat turned to alms is a curse turned into a blessing; it is 
labour issuing in charity and charity issuing in salvation. 

Now we find Barnabas using this term sweat to describe the toil of 
man (c. x. 4): for he says in giving the explanation why it is forbidden 
under the law to eat the eagle, the osprey, and the raven, that we are 
not to associate with nor assimilate ourselves to such men as do not know 
how to provide themselves food by their own labour and sweat. Here then 
sweat is the synonym of toil, and we are reminded of the words “In the 
sweat of thy face thou shalt eat bread.” (Gen. ui. 19.) 

The same thought appears in connexion with almsgiving in the Patristic 
tract Questiones ad Antiochum (Migne, Patr. Gr. xxviii. 651), καὶ ἄλλος πάλιν 
ὁ μισθὸς τοῦ γεωπόνου ἐξ idloy ἱδρῶτος ποιοῦντος οὐμπάθειαν Kal ἕτερος ὁ τοῦ 
ἄρχοντος τοῦ ἀπὸ δώρων καὶ προσόδων παρέχοντος. Here ἱδρώς is the 
toil of the field labourer, which carries us again back to Genesis and to 
the Teaching. He does alms out of his sweat. 

Turn now to the Sibylline Oracles and note the same conjunction of 
ideas in Orac. Sib. i. 79, 

ἱδρῶσι σταχύων χειρὶ χρήζοντι παράσχου. 


When I first noted this passage, it seemed so unintelligible that I 
ventured to emend the text, as the word σταχύων was apparently out of 


1 The illustrations from Barnabas as to the two goats on the Day of Atonement which 
are one cursed and the other crowned, a passage which Justin also refers to the two advents 
of Christ, should be noted. See Taylor, Lectures on the Teaching, pp. 105, 106. 


“Let your 
alms sweat in 
your hands.” 


Alms are the 
redemptive 
side of labour. 


A sheaf of 
corn is a 
sacred 
symbol, 


An early 
Targum is 


probably con- 


cealed in the 
saying. 


70 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


harmony with the rest of the sentence. But I see now that it must be 
right; for a reference to early Christian art will shew that a sheaf of corn 
is the symbol of toil commended by God to man, and by man returned 
to God by the way of almsgiving. For example Brownlow and Northcote 
in describing the figures on early Christian sarcophagi draw attention to this 
point : 

Early Christian Art, p. 244, “He (se. Jesus) gives to Adam a sheaf, for 
in the sweat of thy brow thou shalt eat bread.” 

P. 250. “The promised Saviour, beardless, as in all representations of 
the incarnation, holds the sheaf in his hand but extends it towards the 
seated figure, as though to imply that the bread obtained by the sweat of 
Adam’s brow is to be offered to God.” It is clear then that the Sibylline 
text is correct, or very nearly so (we may if we please put the singular 
ἱδρῶτι, or with Dr Taylor read ἱδρῶ σῇ, but the sense is not altered). 
We are to give to the needy of the sweat of our sheaves. 

But if this be so what better illustration could we have of the connexion 
between alms and sweat and the reference to Genesis? We may be sure 
then that in the Teaching ἱδρωτάτω ἡ ἐλεημοσύνη cannot be far wrong. 
The next part of the sentence consists of the words εἰς τὰς χεῖράς σου. 
I take this to be merely an equivalent of ἐν ταῖς χερσί cov, the uses of 
εἰς and ἐν being scarcely to be discriminated in N. T. Greek. But why 
should the alms sweat in the hands rather than on the face, as in Genesis ? 
We have here unless I am mistaken a Synagogue interpretation. Certainly 
the Targum of Jonathan ben Uzziel gives the passage in Genesis “in 
the labour of the palm of thy hands thou shalt eat bread.” Something 
similar has been noted by Dr Taylor in the Coptic version of the Apo- 
stolical Canons, where the catechumen is instructed to honour the teacher 
“of the sweat of thy face and of the labour of thy hands.” This is 
based upon the Teaching, and the changes introduced shew again the 
influences of glosses upon the early chapters of Genesis. It certainly does 
not seem as if there were much need of making any change in the words 
εἰς Tas χεῖράς σου. 

There remain the words μέχρις ἂν γνῷς τίνι δῷς. The difficulty of 
these words hes in the fact that they contradict what has preceded. They 
introduce a caution in almsgiving which has already been excluded. Not 
only so, but they are at variance with the fourth chapter of the Teaching 
which directs ἐὰν ἔχῃς, διὰ τῶν χειρῶν cov δώσεις λύτρωσιν ἁμαρτιῶν 
σου: οὐ διστάσεις δοῦναι οὐδὲ διδοὺς γογγύσεις: γνώσῃ γὰρ τίς ἐστιν ὁ 
τοῦ μισθοῦ καλὸς ἀνταποδότης. Now the plain sense of this is “Thou 
shalt give thine alms freely, for thou givest to God,’ and the same thing 
is intimated in Orac. Sib. 11. 80, 


ὃς δ᾽ ἐλεημοσύνην παρέχει, θεῷ οἶδε δανείζειν. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. χὰ! 


The suspicion then arises in our mind that there must have been in 
the early Church a saying current of the form γνῶθι τίνι δῷς which was 
. susceptible of a double interpretation, One school interpreted it as meaning 
“Know that your alms are an offering to God”: the other interpreted it 
cautiously in the sense “Be sure of the people to whom your alms are 
given.” Perhaps the passage thus variously interpreted was based upon 
Sirach xii, 1 ἐὰν ed ποιῇς γνῶθι τίνι ποιεῖς. For we find in the tract 
Questions to Antiochus’ that two interpretations of this verse are discussed. 
“Some persons say that we ought to avoid indiscriminate charity and to 
enquire carefully if the person who comes to us is really in need. For 
Solomon says ‘if thou doest good take heed to whom thou doest it’ But 
this is a perversion of the evil-minded, similar to their wresting of the 
other Scriptures, for Solomon did not speak of the poor man; but ‘take 
heed to whom thou doest, ie. that thou doest it to God.” 

Here we see the question decided as in the fourth chapter of the 
Teaching; alms are a gift to God rather than to man. The same solution 
is implied by Hermas who rejects all questions of the form τίνι δῷ ἢ μὴ 
δῷ as foreign to the spirit of primitive Christianity. Thus in his Second 
Mandate he says ἐκ τῶν κόπων cov ὧν ὁ θεὸς δίδωσίν σοι πᾶσιν ὑστερου- 
μένοις δίδου ἁπλῶς, μὴ διστάζων τίνι δῷς ἢ τίνι μὴ δῴῷς"...τὴν διακονίαν... 
ἐτέλεσεν μηδὲν διακρίνων τίνι δῷ ἢ μὴ δῷ. But from these words it is 
sufficiently clear that the two interpretations of “knowing to whom we 
give” were current in the time of Hermas. We are almost driven then to 
the belief in the existence of a formula γνῶθι τίνι δῷς when we find in 
the Teaching the words “Thou shalt know who is thy recompenser,” and 
in Hermas as just quoted. But if this be the case, how are we to explain 
the two opposite currents of interpretation in the Teaching? The first 
chapter is out of harmony with itself as well as out of harmony with the 
fourth. 

May not the true solution be that the words “let thine alms sweat 
in thy hands” are an oral Targum on Gen. iii. 19, while the added clause 
“until thou know to whom to give” is a primitive formula inserted sub- 
sequently to the first publication of the Teaching and by way of explana- 
tion ? 


On the Cosmic Mystery. 


Our next difficulty is in the 11th chapter of the Teaching: “No prophet 
who has been tried and is true, when he acts with reference to a cosmic 
mystery of the Church but does not teach others to do what he does, shall 
be judged at your hands; for with God he has his judgment; for on the 


1 Migne, Patr. Gr. xxviii. 649. 


The Cosmic 
Mystery of 
the Church 


has reference 
to abnormal 
doings of 
early prophets 
and teachers 


with a view to 
the exposition 


of deep reli- 
gious truths 


especially 
with regard 
to Christ and 
the Church, 


72 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


same wise did the prophets of old’ time also.” The question is as to the 
meaning of the words ποιῶν εἰς μυστήριον κοσμικὸν ἐκκλησίας. The key to 
the passage lies in the allusion to actions of the prophets of an earlier day, 
which were not to be imitated, and apparently were only justified because 
they were done to expound some mystery. 

Now if we turn to the discussion of Justin with Trypho and his com- 
panions, § 94, Justin gives an explanation of a problem whose solution one 
of his hearers admits he had vainly sought from many Jewish teachers, viz. 
why Moses, having enunciated a law against graven images, should have 
himself made a serpent of brass. It was, says Justin, a mystery which he 
was announcing, to wit, he proclaimed the dissolution of the power of the 
serpent who had caused transgression to come to pass through Adam, and 
the salvation for those who believed in him that was to be crucified, ὅσο. 
And his hearer gladly accepts his explanation and promises attention to the 
further mystery which Justin proceeds to unfold; for, says he, it is on account 
of these things that even the teachings of the prophets have fallen into evil 
repute’. 

The very same difficulty which was felt by the Jewish audience of Justin 
must have been known in Christian circles, if we may judge from the frequent 
expositions given of the meaning of the Brazen Serpent. And Barnabas ex- 
pressly (c. xii.) discourses on the subject: Πέρας γέ τοι Μωῦσῆς ἐντειλάμενος" 
Οὐκ ἔσται ὑμῖν οὔτε χωνευτὸν οὔτε γλυπτὸν εἰς θεὸν ὑμῖν, αὐτὸς ποιεῖ ἵνα 
τύπον τοῦ Ἰησοῦ δείξη. 

In a similar manner Justin explains the conduct of Jacob in taking four 
wives and two of them sisters; first he reproaches the Jews with making a 
precedent out of Jacob’s conduct for marrying as many women as they took 
a fancy to, and then goes on to shew that in every such patriarchal action 
a great mystery was involved. The nuptials of Jacob were a type of an action 
which was to be consummated by Christ; Leah being the synagogue and 
Rachel the Gentile Church*. 


1 Dial, 94. εἴπατε yap μοι, οὐχὶ Beds ἣν ὁ ἐντειλόμενος διὰ Μωυσέως μήτε ὁμοίωμα μήτε τῶν ἐν 
οὐρανῷ μήτε τῶν ἐπὶ γῆς ὅλως ποιῆσαι καὶ αὐτὸς ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ διὰ τοῦ Μωυσέως τὸν χαλκοῦν ὄφιν 
ἐνέργησε γενέσθαι καὶ ἐπὶ σημεῖον ἔστησε dt οὗ σημείου ἐσώζοντο οἱ ὀφιόδηκτοι καὶ ἀναίτιός ἐστιν 
ἀδικίας; μυστήριον γὰρ διὰ τούτου, ὡς προέφην, ἐκήρυσσε....... καὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ περὶ τούτου πολλάκις τοὺς 
διδασκάλους ἠρώτησα καὶ οὐδείς μοι λόγον ἀπέδωκεν. ὥστε λέγε σὺ ἃ λέγεις" προσέχομεν γάρ σοι 
MYCTHPION ἀποκαλύπτοντι, δι᾽ ὧν καὶ τὰ τῶν προφητῶν διδάγματα συκοφαντητά ἐστι. 

2 Dial. 184. καὶ ἐὰν εὔμορφόν τις ἰδὼν ἐπιθυμήσῃ αὐτῆς, τὰς ᾿Ιακὼβ τοῦ ᾿Ισραὴλ καὶ τῶν ἄλλων 
πατριαρχῶν πράξεις ἀνιστοροῦντες καὶ μηδὲν ἀδικεῖν λέγοντες TOYC τὰ GMOIA TIPATTONTAC, τάλανες 
καὶ ἀνόητοι καὶ κατὰ τοῦτο ὄντες. ὡς προέφην γάρ, οἰκονομίαι τινὲς λλεγάλων MYCTHPIWN ἐν ἑκάστῃ 
τινὶ τοιαύτῃ πράξει ἀπετελοῦντο........ τῆς ὑπὸ τοῦ Χριστοῦ μελλούσης ἀπαρτίζεσθαι πράξεως τύποι ἦσαν 
οἱ γάμοι τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβ. The same interpretation in Irenaeus ry. xxi. 3, ‘‘Omnia autem ille faciebat 
propter illam juniorem, oculos bonos habentem, Rachel, quae praefigurabat EccLEsIAM, propter 
quam sustinuit Christus qui tune quidem per patriarchas suos et PROPHETAS praefigurans et 
praenuntians futura, etc.” 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 73 


If we turn to Irenaeus (Iv. xx. 12) we shall find him explaining two ab- 
normal acts of the earlier prophets, one the marriage of Hosea with the 
_ harlot, another that of Moses with the Ethiopian. “Propter quod et Osee 
propheta accepit uxorem fornicationis; per operationem prophetans quoniam 
fornicando fornicabitur terra a Domino, hoc est, qui super terram sunt 
homines; et de hujusmodi hominibus beneplacitum habebit Deus assumere 
ecclesiam sanctificandam communicatione Filii ejus, sicut et illa sanctificata 
est communione prophetae. Et propter hoc Paulus sanctificatam ait infidelem 
mulierem in viro fideli. Adhue etiam filios suos nominavit propheta, Non- 
misericordiam-consecuta et Non-populus...... Id quod A PROPHETA TYPICE PER 
OPERATIONEM FACTUM EST, ostendit apostolus VERE FACTUM IN ECCLESIA A 
CHRISTO.” The action of Hosea was therefore a cosmic mystery of Christ 
and the Church: the same thing holds of the marriage of Moses, as 
follows:— 


Διὰ τοῦ γάμου Μωσέως ὁ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ νοητὸς γάμος ἐδείκνυτο, καὶ διὰ 
τῆς Αἰθιοπικῆς νυμφῆς ἡ ἐξ ἐθνῶν ἐκκλησία ἐδηλοῦτο. 


The preceding illustrations will then suffice to shew what sort of actions 
on the part of the earlier prophets had to be explained symbolically and not 
imitated. They were cosmic mysteries, inasmuch as they were wrought upon 
the stage of this world to illustrate what was doing or to be done on a 
higher plane. Their frequent reference to the subject of marriage and to 
the mystery of Christ and the Church shews that we are to translate ἐκκλη- 
σίας in the Teaching as a genitive. A good illustration may be taken from 
Athanasius, De Virginitate § 2, where discoursing on the mystery of Christ 
and the Church he says, “Ὥσπερ ἢ ἐκκληοίὰ ὑποτάσσεται τῷ κυρίῳ, οὕτω 
καὶ αἱ γυναῖκες τοῖς ἀνδράσιν ἐν πᾶσι. ἀπ᾽ αὐτῶν γὰρ τῶν κοομικῶν, ἐὰν 
θέλωμεν, καὶ τὰ ἄνω νοοῦμεν. ἡ δὲ συναπτομένη τῷ ἐπουρανίῳ νυμφίῳ, τὸ 
θέλημα τοῦ νυμφίου αὐτῆς κατεργάζεται. So far then we have the matter 
clear; and the contingency which the Teaching contemplates is the recurrence 
of similar eccentric conduct on the part of the new prophets: for, as Justin 
points out, the gift of prophecy had passed over from the Jews to the Chris- 
tians. Many symbolic actions must have been performed in the early days of 
the Church of which no record has come down to us: those cases, however, 
which survive, such as the binding of Agabus’ hands and feet with the girdle 
of Paul, are harmless enough, and would scarcely need to be protected from 
criticism by precept. 

The references given above may be completed by shewing the source 
in the Rabbinic literature from which this curious expression is derived. 
The word κόσμος, both here and in the expression “let this world pass 


away,’ is the Hebrew phy, and the “cosmic mystery” stands for Δ, 2 
chy Sw of the Rabbis. 
iy 10 


The difficult 
expression is 
found ver- 
batim in 
Rabbinic 
literature. 


ἐκπέτασις 
denotes the 
appearance 
of the Cross 
in Heaven. 


Its root- 
meaning 15 
“ flying” 
then 
‘‘praying” 
and ‘ eruci- 
fixion.” 


74 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Thus the tract Chagigah* has a curious passage dealing with the matter 
of the Beginning, ie. the Gnosis on Exedes, and the matter of the Chariot, 
Le, the mystical exposition of Ezekiel: and the necessity of keeping these 
mysteries secret is enforced as follows: 

“Rabbi Abuhu says [we may also derive it] from this [text] The ἜΞΕ 
are for thy clothing (Prov. xxvii. 26). Do not read it ὩΖΞΘ lambs, but 
DW ID the secret things, (meaning) the things that are the Mystery of the 
Universe, let them be as a garment unto thee.” 

The passage is expanded by Maimonides’ as follows: 

“Now these things are exceedingly profound and not every intellect is 
capable of sustaining them, therefore Solomon says in his wisdom concern- 
ing them by way of a proverb, The lambs are thy clothing. So the sages 
say as an explanation of the proverb, The things which are a Mystery of 
the Universe, let them be as a garment to thee, meaning, to thyself alone, 
and do not discuss them before many people.” 


On ἐκπέτασις in heaven. 


This expression in the last chapter of the Teaching which caused some 
perplexity im the first reading of the Teaching is now understood to mean 
the sign of the cross, or, as Dr Taylor translates it, “the sign of a cross 
spread out in heayen.” 

According to the Teaching the three Signs of the Truth are (i) ἐκπέ- 
tacts in heaven, (ii) the sound of the trumpet, (iti) the resurrection of the 
elect. Now in Matthew xxiv. 30, 31, we have καὶ τότε φανήσεται τὸ 
σημεῖον τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐν οὐρανῷ Kal τότε κόψονται πᾶσαι ai 
φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς καὶ ὄψονται τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἐπὶ τῶν 
νεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ μετὰ δυνάμεως καὶ δόξης πολλῆς" καὶ ἀποστελεῖ τοὺς 
ἀγγέλους αὐτοῦ μετὰ σάλπιγγος φωνῆς μεγάλης καὶ ἐπισυνάξουσιν τοὺς ἐκλεκ- 
τοὺς αὐτοῦ. This agrees very closely with the order in the Teaching if we 
take ἐκπέτασις to mean the cross, and the cross to be the sign of the Son 
of Man. Hence it is not surprising that the Apostolical Constitutions in the 
vulth book, which incorporates the Teaching, interpret the first sign of the 
truth to be the sign of the Son of Man. If there is any difference be- 
tween the Teaching and the Gospel it is upon the point whether the first 
sign is Christ’s cross or Christ himself, a point which we shall find some 
of the fathers discuss. 

The word ἐκπέτασις is in its first idea the spreading abroad of a bird’s 
wings, then it is used of the attitude of a man in prayer with his arms 
outstretched, and finally of a human form stretched upon a cross, All 
three meanings are involved in the beautiful sentence with which Tertullian 


1 Ὁ. 15. ndyy oY ywas ONY O37. 
2 Hilkoth yesode hathorah, c. 2, 18. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 75 


closes his treatise De Oratione: “and even the little birds, rising from 
their nests, spread abroad the cross of their wings and utter what is meant 
to be a prayer to God.” Two of them are found in ὁ. xiv. of the same 
treatise, where he says “We not only raise our hands but also expand 
them...... and taking our model from the Lord’s passion, even in prayer 
we confess to Christ.” And when once the connexion between the out- 
spread arms of prayer and the Passion was established, the fathers could 
hardly come across a passage in which the words ἐκπέτασις, ἔκτασις, and 
the like occur, without making some allusion to the cross. If God spread 
out his hands all the day to a disobedient people, it was from the Cross: 
if Moses prayed with supported hands for warring Israel, he was a type 
of Christ on the Cross. The very name for the Crucifixion in some lan- 
guages is derived from this: thus in the Slavonic the word means “a 
spreading abroad,” “an expansion,” “a stretching asunder’”; while in the 
Ethiopic liturgy a similar usage is found, and the Lord is described as 
suffering to fulfil the Father's will, and to gather to Him a people by 
the expansion of his hands*. The Syriac literature also, as represented by 
the recently published Book of the Bee, furnishes very interesting confirmation 
of the preceding statements, and a reference to it will be valuable as 
shewing some ground for believing that the term ἐκπέτασις exercised and 
perplexed the early students of the Teaching precisely as it has done the 
moderns, so that it was variously interpreted as a “rolling up” of the 
sky or “a hole in the firmament.” The writer affirms in accordance with 
the Teaching’ “Then will the Son of Perdition appear, of the seed and 
of the tribe of Dan: and he will shew deluding phantasms and lead astray 
the world.” After declaring that the cross was to be taken to Heaven he 
goes on “After Elijah comes and conquers the son of destruction and en- 
courages the believers, for a space and time which is known to God alone, 
there will appear the living sign of our Lord’s Cross, honoured and borne 
aloft in the hands of the Archangel Gabriel...and suddenly will the mighty 
sound of the first trumpet of the Archangel be heard....As touching the 
heavens some say that they will be rent and that the waters which are 
above the firmament will descend, for it is not possible for the substance 
of water to pass through the substance of the firmament....... Others say 


The following further illustrations will be useful: 
John xxi. 18, 19, ἐκτενεῖς τὰς χεῖράς cov...... τοῦτο δὲ εἶπεν σημαίνων 
ποίῳ θανάτῳ δοξάσει τὸν θεόν. 


1 For this I am indebted to Prof. Long of Constantinople. 
2 Bunsen, Christianity and Mankind, vii. 108, “et filius tuus manifestatus fuit a Spiritu 
Sancto, ut impleret voluntatem tuam, et populum tibi efliceret expandendo manus suas.” 
3 Budge, Book of the Bee, p. 53. 
10—2 


The idea 
involved 

is found 
throughout 
all the early 
Churches, 


76 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Ep. Barnab. ὁ. x., ἐξέτεινε τὰς χεῖρας καὶ οὕτως πάλιν ἐνίκα ὁ ᾿Ισραήλ' 
53 Ἔ , / ~ / 5 lol A / vA lal a 
εἶτα, ὁπόταν πάλιν καθεῖλε, πάλιν ἐθανατοῦντο' πρὸς TL; ἵνα γνῶσιν ὅτι 

> / an > \ » > > a / \ > id / , , 
ov δύνανται σωθῆναι εἰ μὴ ἐπ᾽ αὐτῷ ἐλπίσωσι: καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ προφήτῃ λέγει' 
Ὅλην τὴν ἡμέραν ἐξεπέτασα τὰς χεῖράς μου πρὸς λαὸν ἀπειθοῦντα καὶ 
ἀντιλέγοντα ὁδῷ δικαίᾳ μου. 

Orac. Sib. vill. 302, 

ἐκπετάσει δὲ χέρας Kal κόσμον ἅπαντα μετρήσει" 
’ \ δὴ lel \ \ “ ” ” 
εἰς δὲ TO βρῶμα χολὴν καὶ πίνειν ὄξος ἔδωκαν. 

Cf. also Sib. vill. 251, ὃν Μωσῆς ἐτύπωσε προτείνας ὠλένας ἁγνάς, 
and Sib. i, 372, ἀλλ᾽ ὅταν ἐκπετάσῃ χεῖρας καὶ πάντα μετρήσῃ. 

Justin Dial. 90. Μωῦσῆς γὰρ πρῶτος ἐξέφανεν αὐτοῦ ταύτην τὴν δοκοῦσαν 

1 Drone) ΄, , / , ” Q il ς , , 
κατάραν δι’ ὧν ἐποίησε σημείων. τίνων τούτων, ἔφη, λέγεις ; ὅτε ὁ λαός, φημί, 
’ λέ lel °-A λὴ \ ς a N fol tH) c > 6 \ lol il - ’ / 
ἐπολέμει τῷ ᾿Αμαλὴκ Kal ὁ τοῦ Ναυῆ υἱός, ὁ ἐπονομασθεὶς τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ ὀνόματι, 
τῆς μάχης ἦρχεν, αὐτὸς Μωῦσῆς ηὔχετο τῷ θεῷ τὰς χεῖρας ἑκατέρως ἐκπε- 
τάσας...ἐν ἀρχῇ τῆς μάχης τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Ἰησοῦ ὄντος, αὐτὸς τὸ σημεῖον τοῦ 
σταυροῦ ἐποίει. 

Dial. 91. διά τε τοῦ τύπου τῆς ἐκτάσεως τῶν χειρῶν τοῦ Moicéas. 

Cf. Dial. 97. καὶ διὰ Ησαΐου ὁμοίως εἴρητο περὶ τούτου, δι’ οὗ τρόπου 
, f ΕΣ “ ’ ,ὔ U \ tal e 
ἀποθνήσκειν ἔμελλεν, οὕτως: ᾿Εξεπέτασά μου τὰς χεῖρας κτὲ. 

- ς - a rn r 

Dial. 111. ὁ μὲν yap αὐτῶν τὰς χεῖρας ἐκτείνας ἐπὶ τοῦ βουνοῦ μέχρις 
ε ΄ » ς ΄ a a “Δ ᾽ \ ow , , 
ἑσπέρας ἔμενεν, ὑποβασταζομένων τῶν χειρῶν, ὃ οὐδενὸς ἄλλου τύπον δείκ- 
νυσιν ἢ τοῦ σταυροῦ, ὁ δὲ κτὲ. 

Dial. 112. οὐχὶ δὲ ἀνοίσομεν ἐπὶ τὴν εἰκόνα τοῦ σταυρωθέντος ᾿Ιησοῦ 
τὸ σημεῖον, ἐπεὶ καὶ Μωῦσῆς διὰ τῆς ἐκτάσεως τῶν χειρῶν KTE. 

- ad \ \ >’ , r 3 \ ”- a > Τὰ ΄ 
1 Apol. 55. TO ὡς ἀνθρώπειον σχῆμα οὐδενὶ ἄλλῳ τῶν ἀλόγων ζώων 
΄ Dy lol 3) 5 \ a nr Yj OX - 
διαφέρει, ἢ τῷ ὀρθόν τε εἶναι Kal ἔκτασιν χειρῶν ἔχειν...καὶ οὐδὲν ἄλλο 
δείκνυσιν ἢ τὸ σχῆμα τοῦ σταυροῦ. 

Irenaeus Adv. Haer, v. 17. ἐπεὶ γὰρ διὰ ξύλου ἀπεβάλομεν αὐτόν, διὰ 

, / \ lal lal > / 5 , \ a A n \ 
ξύλου πάλιν φανερὸν τοῖς πᾶσιν ἐγένετο, ἐπιδεικνύων TO ὕψος Kal μῆκος Kal 

, \ / > ec a \ ε » tal la A a , 
πλάτος καὶ βάθος ἐν ἑαυτῷ καὶ ὡς ἔφη τις τῶν προβεβηκότων, διὰ τῆς θείας 
ἐκτάσεως τῶν χειρῶν, τοὺς δύο λαοὺς εἰς Eva θεὸν συνάγων KTE. 

Clem. Alex. Paedagogus, § 5. οὗτος εἰς ἡμᾶς ἐξεπέτασε τὰς χεῖρας τὰς 
ἐναργῶς πεπιστευμένας. 

Methodius, De Cruce Domini (Migne, Patr. Gr. xviii. 400). τά τε γὰρ 
ὄρνεα ὑψιπετοῦντα τὸ σταυροειδὲς κατὰ τὴν ἔκτασιν τῶν πτερύγων σχῆμα 
αἰνίττονται" αὐτός τε ὁ ἄνθρωπος, τὰς χεῖρας πετάσας, οὐδὲν ἄλλο ὑπάρχων 
φαίνεται ἢ τοῦτο. 

Tertullian adv. Mare. ti. 18. Jam vero Moyses, quid utique tunc tantum, 
cum Jesus adversus Amalech praeliabatur, expansis manibus orabat residens,... 
nisi quia illic ubi nomen Domini Jesu dimicabat, dimicaturi quandoque adversus 


1 The last part of this quotation should be compared with the passage of the Ethiopic 
Liturgy previously referred to, 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 77 


diabolum, crucis quoque erit habitus necessarius, per quam Jesus victoriain 
esset relaturus ? 

Cf. De Idololatria xii. Corpus solum, quod in modum crucis est. 

Ad Nationes xii. Crucis qualitas, signum est de ligno; etiam de materia 
colitis penes vos cum effigie; quanquam sicut vestrum humana figura est, ita 
et nostrum propria...quoniam wpsi quoque corpori nostro tacita et secreta linea 
crucis situs est...Si statuerts hominem manibus expansis imaginem crucis feceris. 

Cyprian Testim. ii. 20. Quod cruci illum fixuri essent Judaei, apud Esaiam : 
Expandi manus meas tota die, ete. 

Cyprian Testim. ii. 21. Hoe signo crucis et Amalech victus est ab Jesu 
per Moysen, ete. 

De Exhort. Mart. 8. Moyses ad superandum Amalech qui figuram portabat 
diaboli in signo et sacramento crucis allevabat supinas manus etc. 

The author of the Opus Imperfectum in Matt. comments as follows: “Quidam 
putant crucem Christi ostendendam esse in caelo; verius autem est ipsum 
Christum in corpore suo habentem testimonia passionis.” Jerome comments 
much in the same strain: “Signum hic aut crucis intelligemus ut videant 
Judaei quem compunxerunt: aut vexillum victoriae triumphantis.” And 
Chrysostom, Homil. Ixxvii. in Matt., τότε φανήσεται TO σημεῖον τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 
ἀνθρώπου ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ" τούτεστιν ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ ἡλίου φαιδρότερος ὦν. 

Ps.-Hippolytus, de Consummatione Mundi, gives the order of signs as in 
Matthew (Migne, Patr. Gr. x. 940), τὸ yap σημεῖον τοῦ σταυροῦ ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν 
ἕως δυσμῶν ἀνατελεῖ ὑπὲρ τὴν λαμπρότητα Tod ἡλίου Kal μηνύσει TOD κριτοῦ 
τὴν ἔλευσιν καὶ τὴν ἐμφάνειαν, τοῦ ἀποδοῦναι ἑκάστῳ κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ... 
τότε γὰρ ὁ σάλπιγξ ἠχήσει καὶ ἐξυπνήσει τοὺς κεκοιμημένους. 

Cyril Hier. Catech. xiii. (Migne, Patr. Gr. xxiii. 805). ἐξεπέτασεν ἐν σταυρῷ 
τὰς χεῖρας iva περιλάβῃ τῆς οἰκουμένης τὰ Tépata’ τῆς yap γῆς TO μεσώτατον 
ὁ Γολγοθᾶς οὗτός ἐστιν... ἐξέτεινεν ἀνθρωπίνας χεῖρας. 

Cyril (Alex.) quoted in Catena Nicephori, col. 896. κέρατα δὲ θυσιαστη- 
plov οἱονεὶ χεῖρες ἐκτεταμέναι τοῦ τιμίου σταυροῦ τὸ σχῆμα προσαναπλάτ- 
τουσαι κτὲ. 

Philo Carpasius in Cant. (Migne, Patr. Gr. xl. col. 110). Χριστοῦ γὰρ 
τανύσαντος ἐπὶ σταυροῦ τὰς χεῖρας ἐπέστρεψε πρὸς αὐτὸν ἡ ἐκκλησία μετὰ 
χαρᾶς λέγουσα “Ev τῇ σκέπῃ τῶν πτερύγων σου ἐλπιώ". 

Procopius in Exod. (p. 268, ed. Gesner). Manus Mosis erant graves ut 
sub harum typo commonstraretur crux Christi. His...extensis palmis sus- 
ceperunt crucem, Christo ipsos quodammodo fulciente et tutante ut declara- 
retur per Ur et Aaron qui sub typo docent Christum esse et judicem et 
summum pontificem, 

Imitatio Christi. Atque hoe erit signum crucis in caelo quum Dominus 
ad judicandum veniet. 


1 Notice how the writer reverts to the idea of wings involved in ἐκπέτασις. 


The Teaching 
is Hebraistic 
from cover 

to cover. 


It is a Talmud 


or a Targum, 


ba | 
fo) 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


HEBRAISMS OF THE TEACHING. 


Whatever theory may be adopted with regard to the Teaching, whether 
we regard it as Jewish with Christian glosses, as Christian, or as a docu- 
ment emanating from some primitive heresy, our judgment with regard to 
it will have to take account of Hebraisms in style and in thought which 
colour the book almost from beginning to end, so that if written by a 
Christian, it would be one who was intimately acquainted with the language, 
literature and ritual of the Jews; if by a heretic, it must be one who 
belonged to a school that was in touch with the laws of interpretation 
that prevailed in Rabbinical circles. To confirm these statements it is only 
necessary to add to what the previous pages furnish in illustration of them 
some striking points which come to the light as we proceed to examine 
the text with care; and to mark the parallel passages in the Jewish litera- 
ture; a task in which I have had much and valuable assistance from my 
friend Mr W. R. Brown of Cambridge. 

To begin with; the very title of the book is Hebraistic; it is a Talmud ; 
if we drop the numeral from the title (and it is suspected by some critics 
not to be a part of the original draft) there is nothing foreign to the 
heading of a handbook for Jewish missionaries in the title 


omen ΟΣ 
for it is extremely likely that the term Apostle is the recognized Greek 
form for the Hebrew muy. 

The Exordium of the book should be compared with the Targum* on 
Deut. xxx. 13, “Behold, I have set before you this day the way of life 
wherein is the recompense of the reward of good unto the righteous: and 
the way of death wherein is the retribution of the wages of evil unto the 
wicked, for I teach you to-day to love the Lord your God and to walk in 
his ways that are right.” 

This Targum furnishes us the link between the doctrine of the Two 
Ways and the precept of the love of God, and shews how they were con- 
nected in Jewish minds. And incidentally it does more; it will be noted 
that the expression is used that God is the recompenser of the reward of 
good unto the righteous, a Hebraism similar to that which the writer of 
the epistle to the Hebrews presents us with when he says that “Moses 
had respect unto the recompense of the reward*.” Now this very expression 
is found in the Teaching, iv. 7, “Thou shalt know who is the good 
recompenser of the reward,’ a sentence which differs from the Targum 
chiefly in the displacement of the adjective from the reward to the re- 


1 Edersheim, Targums on the Pentateuch, li, 654, 
2 Heb. xi, 26, 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 79 


compenser. Whatever may be thought of this parallelism it can hardly fail 
to be regarded as a striking Hebraism on the part of the Teaching. 

In a similar manner it is possible for us to connect together from 
Hebrew theology the precepts of love to God and the neighbour, and the 
Golden Rule. Much has been said on these points, especially on the last, 
concerning the negative form of which reference has been made to Con- 
fucius, Tobit, Hillel, &c. to establish its antiquity and its wide diffusion, 
while on the other hand there is evidence from the early western texts 
of the Acts of the Apostles to shew that it must have been early current 
among Christians in this form as well as in that given by the Gospels}. 

An interesting passage in the Yen Lebanon, a modern commentary on 
Pirge Avoth, makes the following connexion: “The commandment for the 
‘love of the brotherhood’ is one of the commandments based upon the 
law and to be interpreted thereby, as it is said ‘Thou shalt love thy neigh- 
bour as thyself’ (Lev. xix. 18), and all men are bound by it. Hillel the 
elder interpreted this thing and said ‘What to thyself is hateful, do not to 
thy neighbour.’” And it is the very same sequence which was in Paul’s 
saying “Love worketh no evil to his neighbour, therefore love is the fulfill- 
ing of the law.” 

Here then we have an illustration of the way in which Jewish thought 
made the connexion between the separate precepts. And it is probable 
that it circulated for some time in the very form in which it is here 
presented, since the Apostolical Constitutions still present us with the rule 
in the words ὃ μισεῖς σοι γενέσθαι οὐδὲ ἄλλῳ σὺ ποιήσεις". The only 
change from the archaic form that has taken place is in the last part of 
the sentence. Here it has been made a trifle more comprehensive by writing 
ἄλλῳ : the language of Hillel would give ἑταίρῳ, the word ἑταῖρος standing 
for the Hebrew Chaber, the equivalent of which stands, in the New Testa- 
ment, as I suppose, in the well-known passage “Who is my neighbour?” But 
this ἑταῖρος became in Greek ἕτερος by itacism, and then ἄλλος. We can see 
some traces of the change in the Teaching itself where in ὁ. xiv. ἑταίρου 
remains, while in c. xv. it reads érépov. This word again is a thorough 
Hebraism and proves that at the time when the Teaching was originally 
produced, it was designed for members of a religious brotherhood, not wholly 
dissimilar from those which we know to have existed among the Pharisees’. 

Returning to the opening verses of the Teaching we find the sentence 
“and of these words this is the Teaching” (a perfect Hebrew sentence in 
which λόγοι -Ξ- 2). But why should what follows be described particu- 
larly as Teaching? The reason seems to be that the opening sentences are 


1 Vide apparatus criticus on Acts xy. 20, 29. 
5. Ap. Const, ii, 15, 
3 See Taylor, Pirge Avoth, p. 30. 


(Tob. iv. 15) 


(Avoth i. 13) 


and contains 
‘*fences’’ to 
its laws, 


which shew 
close agree- 
ment with the 
traditional 
Talmud. 


Involves a 
gnosis on the 
Ten Words, 


80 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


not Teaching but Thorah: they are taken directly from the Old Testament, 
and what follows is an extended commentary to elucidate the text; they 
are Targum or Talmud to a proposed text. 

Concerning the passages that follow there is some dispute; many: good 
reasons have been produced for regarding them as interpolated; they are, 
however, susceptible of a good deal of illumination from Jewish sources; 
and if not the earliest part of the book, they cannot be very late in 
time. We shall, however, discuss their genuineness under its own head. 

One of the most interesting Hebraisms in the following chapters is found 
at the beginning of chapter iii., “My child, flee from all evil and all that is 
like to it.” Dr Taylor has pointed out that the verse contains the important 
principle of the “fence to the Law,” by means of which a person is kept at 
a distance from sin; this fence, for example, is the rule according to which 
Hillel decided that a person must not look upon a festival egg lest he 
should wish to touch it nor touch it lest he should wish to eat it. It is a 
principle which occurs again a few sentences lower down, “Nor be willing 
to look upon them, for from all these things idolatries are generated.” But 
Dr Taylor goes further and points out that the opening words of the chapter 
are a literal translation of the following sentence in the Talmud’, “Flee 
from the base and from its likeness”; a sentiment which occurs also with 
very little change in Avoth Rabbi Nathan, ec. 2, “Flee from the filthy and all 
that is like to the filthy’” The sentiment was understood by the fathers and 
finds an echo in them; it will also be found versified in the Sibylline Oracles. 
It appears in the New Testament as the doctrine of avoiding the appearance 
of evil, and a writer in the Talmud says that “whatever the wise men have 
prohibited for appearance sake, is forbidden in the most secret chambers®*.” 

It will be seen, in passing, that the foregoing considerations do not lend 
much support to the Revised rendering “every form of evil” in 1 Thess. ν. 22. 

Another passage upon which Dr Taylor has thrown much light is the 
sentence which was quoted by Clement of Alexandria by which Lagarde and 
others were so much quickened to a belief in the antiquity of the primitive 
Didascalia which underlies the early Canons and Constitutions, “My child, 
be not a har, for lymg leads to theft.” Dr Taylor refers to a remarkable 
passage in the Mekiltha which describes the Ten Commandments as being 
written five on one table and five on the other and traces a subtle cor- 
respondence between the sins on one side of the table and the sins on the 
other. Thus “it was written, how shalt not take the name of the Lord thy 
God in vain; and opposite to it Thou shalt not steal.” At first sight this 


1 Talm. Bab. Chullin 44, b MITA P91 WAT 12 PAIN. 
2 ΣΟ mova yy yam Wp ὈΠΊΠ. 
3 Shabbath f. 64 b, WON OF IN] EN PY MANN ΒΞ ONIN ONY? DrpId bs. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 81 


explanation seems a little artificial, in spite of the illustrations by which it 
is supported, especially since the other parts of the chapter do not seem 
- to be constructed on the same plan. It is, however, the only explanation 
that has been suggested, and is well supported by the instances which 
Dr Taylor brings forward. Perhaps the following additional considerations 
may not be out of place. 

Concerning the arrangement of the Commandments on the tables there 
can be no doubt: Philo gives us express information on the point, and there 
is a consensus amongst Jewish teachers thereupon: so that the tables stood 
as follows: 


I am the Lord thy God. Thou shalt not murder, 
Thou shalt have no other gods. nor commit adultery, 
Thou shalt not take the name, We. nor steal, 

Remember the Sabbath. nor bear false witness, 
Honour thy father. nor covet, 


The whole arrangement is described as follows in the Jewish service-book 
(Machzor for Pentecost): “They were set in order one after the other and 
joined vis-d-vis, being tables written on this side and on the other side. 
And the writing was written by God to confirm it, and he engraved them 
opposite to each other for purposes of commentary: he arranged them five 
against five. 

“The pleasant expression ‘I AM’ he caused them to hear, and opposite to 
it he admonished them to observe ‘thou shalt not kill,” to understand and 
to judge the one from the other, that when creatures stumble and spill blood 
it is equally as if they presumptuously diminished the glory of God, for in 
the image of God made he man. And the second commandment he pointed 
to, THOU SHALT NOT HAVE, and opposite to it he admonished the congre- 
gation, THOU SHALT NOT COMMIT ADULTERY. Thus every word was fitly 
spoken: to shew that he that denieth God is like to her that committeth 
adultery’, for instead of her husband she consorted with others. He com- 
manded THOU SHALT NOT TAKE IN VAIN THE NAME of him that searcheth 
the reins; opposite he admonished THOU SHALT NOT STEAL to aggrandise 
thyself, for the thief, the murderer and the adulterer swear to a@ lie.” And 
so with the rest of the passage, which is even more forced in its interpre- 
tation than what has been given, as for instance that the false witness will 
not testify that the world was made in six days. 

The parallelism here drawn out seems to have been understood by the 
early Christians. Tertullian harps upon the relations of idolatry to murder 
and adultery in a manner” which seems to involve more than word-play : 

1 τ Most idolaters are adulterers,” Kethuvoth, 13 b. ᾿ 

2 De Idololatria, 1. ‘“Idololatres, idem homicida est...proinde adulterium et stuprum im 


eodem recognosces,” 


Η. nO 


and a decided 
memory of 
the Jewish 
Vidui. 


82 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


and perhaps St Paul’s “covetousness, which is idolatry’,” may be due to some 
attempt to re-arrange the parallel injunctions of the Tables. 

Another peculiar passage is the fifth chapter of the Teaching which con- 
tains a list of vices characteristic of the evil way, followed by a list of 
vicious persons variously described, without any connecting particles or verbs. 
No doubt the style of this passage is Hebraistic, and the transition from 
the vice-catalogue to the vicious-catalogue can be paralleled by similar con- 
structions from Jewish sources. But there is something more in the matter 
than this: when a Jew confesses his sins on the Day of Atonement he 
makes an alphabetical confession (called Vidui), enumerating the sins ac- 
cording to the twenty-two letters of the alphabet, from Aleph to Tau. Now 
our writer has not shewn any signs of an alphabetic order, but he has be- 
trayed his reminiscence of the prayers on the Day of Atonement or some 
similar catalogue by enumerating exactly twenty-two vices; while the number 
of vicious persons is either twenty-two or so nearly as to indicate a similar 
structure. The chapter, then, should be printed as follows’: 


“But the Way of Death is this. 
First of all it is eyil and full of curse. 


Murders Persecutors of the good, 
Adulteries hating truth, 
Lusts loving falsehood, 
Fornications not knowing the reward of righteousness, 
Thefts not cleaving to that which is good 
Idolatries nor to just judgment, 
Sorceries watchful not unto that which is good 
Witcherafts but unto that which is evil, 
Ravenings far from whom are meekness 
False-witnessings and patience, 
Hypocrisies loving vain things, 
Doubleness of Heart following after reward, 
Guile not pitying the poor man, 
Arrogance not travailing for the distressed, 
Malice not knowing him that made them, 
Self-will slayers of children, 
Greed destroyers of God’s workmanship, 
Impure Speech turning aside from him that is in need, 
Jealousy distressing him that is afflicted, 
Presumption advocates of the rich, 

1 Col. iii, 5. 


* Translation from Dr Taylor. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 83 


Haughtiness lawless judges of the poor, 
Braggery universal sinners’. 


May ye be delivered, children, from all these.” 


The question will at once arise whether we have here a translation of 
Hebrew catalogues arranged alphabetically or misplaced from an original 
alphabetical order; and whether the vicious are meant to match the vices. 
The latter question must, I think, be answered in the negative ; we cannot 
rearrange the matter into a correspondence; the former demands more con- 
sideration. 

It is interesting to notice that this remarkable numerical arrangement 
has disappeared from Barnabas, having been disturbed by additions and 
omissions; a further proof of the antiquity of the Teaching, if any further 
proof were needed; at the same time we see how futile are those arguments 
which would make the worse-arranged text the later; an alphabetical con- 
fession, of necessity, deserts logical order. 

Let us see whether any further light can be thrown on the supposition 
of a primitive Catalogue of Sins which has suggested the enumeration made by 
the author of the Teaching. The service for the Day of Atonement is full of 
alliterative confession and prayer. Not only is there a general Vidui, but 
there is a more extended one, in which the manner and matter of sins are given 
in detail; e.g. 


By force or free-will 73) DIN3 
By hardness of heart abn ἸΌΝ 
By want of knowledge nyt $35 
By rashness of the lips pynby 25 
&e. ἄς. &e. &e. 


and such catalogues can hardly fail to throw some suggestion in our way 
as we proceed to elucidate the problem. 

But this is not all; there are traces of a precisely similar usage in 
the Pauline Epistles: for instance, we find in Rom. 1. 29 a catalogue of sins 
which runs as follows: 

/ , > / / 2 I 4 / 4 , 
πεπληρωμένους πάσῃ ἀδικίᾳ πονηρίᾳ πλεονεξίᾳ κακίᾳ, μεστοὺς φθόνου 
φόνου ἔριδος δόλου κακοηθείας, Ψιθυριστάς, καταλάλους, θεοστυγεῖς, ὑβριστάς, 
ὑπερηφάνους, ἀλαζόνας, ἐφευρετὰς κακῶν, γονεῦσιν ἀπειθεῖς, ἀσυνέτους, 

1 The reason for the coinage of this word is that the catalogue is based upon a tale of 
sins from Aleph to Tau; hence they are universal sinners. Cf. Talm. Bab, Shabbath, § 55a, 
“Rabbi Joseph taught thus: Do not read at my Sanctuary, WPI) (Ezek. ix. 6), but ΣΡ, 
at my Saints, namely, at the men who haye fulfilled the law from Aleph to Tau.’ The 
saints would be πανθάγιοι if treated as the sinners are treated in the Teaching. In harmony 
with this interpretation we are told in Yalkut Rubeni, f. 17 a, col. 2, that “Adam transgressed 


the whole law from Aleph to Tau”; and on f. 48 b, col. 2, that ‘‘Abraham kept the whole 
law from Aleph to Tau.” 


11—2 


84 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


ἀσυνθέτους, ἀστόργους, ἀσπόνδους, ἀνελεήμονας᾽ οἵτινες τὸ δικαίωμα τοῦ 
θεοῦ ἐπίγνοντες, ὅτι οἱ τὰ τοιαῦτα πράσσοντες ἄξιοι θανάτου εἰσίν, οὐ μόνον 
αὐτὰ ποιοῦσιν ἀλλὰ καὶ συνευδοκοῦσιν τοῖς πράσσουσιν. ᾿ 

I have inserted ἀσπόνδους on the faith of certain MSS.: there is also 
a question of reading πορνείᾳ before or after πονηρίᾳ, but it is not clear 
whether the theory of the accidental omission of such a word could be 
maintained without better authority. Leaving this word out we have again 
a catalogue of TWENTY-TWO vices and one which is instructive when read 
side by side with that in the Teaching. For it shews us, what was not 
apparent, the reason for the queer clause “It is evil and full of curse.” 
Twice this is illustrated by Romans (πεπληρωμένους, μεστοὺς). The words 
“Tt is full of curse” are therefore probably the rejected commencement of 
the Vidui by which the catalogue im the Teaching was suggested. Rendered 
into Hebrew as in Rom. i. 14 (=Ps. x. 7) they run ~bN roy which 
furnishes us with the necessary initial alphabetic sign. Nor is the coinci- 
dence of the two catalogues confined to numerical equivalence and similarity 
of opening: there are six words which coincide in the two, and may, 
therefore, reasonably be suspected to form a part of the archaic Vidui: 
these are φόνος, πλεονεξία, κακία, δόλος, ὑπερηφανία, ἀλαζονεία. Further, 
St Paul's catalogue seems to be a translation of a Way of Death, since he 
adds the words, “they that do such things are worthy of death.” 

We should therefore print side by side as follows : 

Confession of Day of Catalogue of 


Catalogue of (Cf. Catalogue of 


Atonement. Teaching. Rom. i. 29. Mark vii. 21. 
ΟΣ φόνοι ἀδικία διαλογισμοὶ κακοί 
2223 μοιχεῖαι πονηρία πορνεῖαι 
ΩΝ ἐπιθυμίαι πλεονεξία κλοπαί 
53 NII πορνεῖαι κακία φόνοι 
NYA κλοπαί φθόνος μοιχεῖαι 
ΠῚ εἰδωλολατρίαι φόνος πλεονεξίαι 
ΠῚ μαγεῖαι ἔρις πονηρίαι 
\YIOSA φαρμακίαι δόλος δόλος 
ὙΦ bay ἁρπαγαί κακοηθεία ἀσέλγεια 
YI VWSY ψευδομαρτυρίαι ψιθυρισταί ὀφθαλμὸς πονηρός 
YD ὑποκρίσεις κατάλαλοι βλασφημία 
wy διπλοκαρδία θεοστυγεῖς ὑπερηφανία 
ΠΏ δόλος ὑβρισταί ἀφροσύνη] 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 85 


Confession of Day of Catalogue of Catalogue of 
Atonement. Teaching. Rom, i. 29. 


ὮΝΝΣ ὑπερηφανία ὑπερήφανοι 


Θ᾽ κακία ἀλαζόνες 
ὯΝ αὐθάδεια ἐφευρεταὶ κακῶν 
ΝΒ πλεονεξία γονεῦσιν ἀπειθεῖς 


ΠΝ. αἰσχρολογία ἀσύνετοι 


ὃν Ὁ Ρ ζηλοτυπία ἀσύνθετοι 
Δ θρασύτης ἄστοργοι 
ΤΠ ὕψος ἄσπονδοι 


ΤΌΤ ΝΠ AYN ἀλαζονεία ἀνελεήμονες 


The column on the left represents the Vidui in its modern form; but 
it is certain that it has been altered from the Confession as used in the 
Temple. A false sentiment has removed the more glaring vices of the 
Decalogue, all of which, we may be sure, were represented in the Confes- 
sion of this solemn day. It is, however, possible, by comparing the different 
Jewish service-books and by a reference to the authority of MSS., to 
restore some points. For example, it is certain that \J¥N) (=we have 
blasphemed) stands for a primitive \JBN) (=we have committed adultery). 
The two last words of the Confession are a later supplement. No doubt 
other changes might be brought to light. 

The question now is to identify which terms in the three columns 
answer to one another; a reference to Delitzsch’s translation of the passage 
in Romans shews us ὯΝ for ὑπερήφανοι and this clearly is the 2] of 
the left-hand column. The same translation gives us O32 for ἀσύνθετοι 
of the third column; now this must be the 93939 of the left-hand column. 
For ἀδικία Delitzsch gives DISA which is found also in the left-hand column. 
πονηρία is YY and is found in the left-hand column. May we not say 
further that ἐφευρεταὶ κακῶν is Paul’s translation of Y9 \3J¥Y'? There is 
sufficient reason then to suspect common matter in the Vidui and the 
Pauline Catalogue, and it has been shewn that there is also common 
matter between the Pauline Catalogue and that in the Teaching, and 
further for μοιχεῖαι we have shewn that there should stand }J5N) in the 
Vidui. A comparison of the Catalogue in Romans with 2 Tim. iii. 2—5 will 
shew again a number of singular recurrences, which are better explained 
by a common documentary origin than by a coincidence of authorship. Is it 
unreasonable then to imagine a common catalogue out of which they have 
all arisen? It will, perhaps, be said that it is mevitable that catalogues of 
sins should shew agreement; this is perfectly true; but it must be re- 


Adopts the 
Jewish rules 
for the testing 
of prophecy, 


86 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


membered that in the present case our suspicion is invited by the equality 
in length of the catalogues. 

It would be an indulgence in mere speculation to attempt from our 
uncertain materials to reconstruct the table of vices from Aleph to Tau, 
of whose existence we have become suspicious. It may not however be 
amiss to note that several of the terms used in the Teaching will at 
once suggest Hebrew expressions which begin with the letter answering to 
the place of the word in the catalogue, as though they had been unaffected 
by the re-arrangement of the terms. 


Such are ἁρπαγαί = DW. 
διπλοκαρδία = 3b) ob. 
δόλος = DVD. 
ζηλοτυπία = ΓΔ. 


Here, then, we must leave the matter for the present with the following 
summary: there is ground for a suspicion that the Vidui of the Day of 
Atonement, the Catalogue of vices in the Teaching, and the Catalogue in 
the first chapter of Romans, are all derived from a lost alphabetical 
Catalogue of Sins. 

Much perplexity has been caused by the descriptions given of the ways 
of the prophets, and the rules for their discrimination into true and false. 
Concerning the former we have written at length under the head of the 
Cosmic Mystery; but something should be said in addition with reference 
to the testing of the prophet and the manner in which he is said to have 
his judgment with God. The rules here given are, without doubt, taken 
from the Jews, though they were brought into greater prominence on account 
of the practical question with which the Church had to deal, namely, that 
of directing into right channels the energy of a new Visitation of God, 
and safeguarding itself from the impostures of the Evil One. But the Jews 
must have already discussed and settled this question from the speculative 
side in commenting on the rules given in the Pentateuch for knowing the 
true prophet from the false. The whole matter is expounded at length 
in Maimonides, with close analogy to the Teaching. He begins by pointing 
out that “It is part of the foundation of the law to know that God may 
cause the sons of men to prophesy,” and then proceeds to shew the con- 
nexion between prophesying and sanctity, and that it is a gift belonging 
to those only who are delivered from the evil nature. Rules for re- 
cognizing prophecy and descriptions of its tendency follow. It is insisted 
upon that a prophet shall act upon his own message, or be judged of 
Heaven. “He who trespasses against his words deserves to be destroyed 
by Heaven, for it is said ‘And it shall come to pass, that whosoever will 
not hearken unto My words which he shall speak in My name, J will require 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 87 


it of him’ (Deut. xviii. 19). Moreover, a prophet who trespasses against 
his own words or suppresses his prophecy, also deserves to be destroyed 
-of Heaven: and it is with regard to these cases that it is said, 7 will 
require wt of him.” 

The passage is probably based upon the following from the tract Sanhedrin’. 

“He who is a false prophet, he who prophesies that which he has not 
heard, and he who prophesies that which was not said unto him, are to 
be destroyed by the hands of men: but he who suppresses his prophecy, 
and he who is slack about the words of a prophet, and also a prophet 
who transgresses his own words, are to be destroyed by the hands of 
Heaven, for it is said, ‘I will require it of him.’” And an illustration 
is given from 1 Kings xii. of the old prophet who was sent to Bethel. 

Here then we have two points in the Teaching especially illuminated, 
(i.) εἰ ἃ διδάσκει ov ποιεῖ, ψευδοπροφήτης ἐστί, (ii) μετὰ θεοῦ γὰρ ἔχει 
τὴν κρίσιν, the latter passage being proved by Deut. xviii. 19. 

We may also shew how the apparent contradiction in the Teaching 
between “tempting no prophet who speaks by the Spirit,” and the assertion 
that “not every one who speaks by the Spirit is a prophet,” is to be resolved. 
Here a distinction is made between the recognized prophet who habitually is 
under the influence of the Spirit (so that we may take λαλοῦντα in ὁ. xi. 7 
as an imperfect tense), and one who is beginning to claim attention as 
a seer or teacher. Concerning the first the Rabbis required an almost 
complete suspense of judgment, the prophet was already δεδοκιμασμένος, 
tried and tested metal. Hence Maimonides says’: 

“A prophet whose prophecy shall have become known, and whose words 
shall have been repeatedly believed, or to whom another prophet shall have 
borne witness, and who moreover has been walking in the ways of prophecy* 
—it will be unlawful to make reflections upon him, or to suspect his 
prophecy that it may not be true. Moreover it is unlawful to tempt him 
more than necessary: so that we must not be continually tempting him: 
for it is said, ‘Ye shall not tempt the Lord your God as ye tempted 
him in Massah, when they said Is the Lord among us or not?’ But after 
it has become known that this man is a prophet, they ought to believe 
and to know that the Lord is among them, and ought not to suspect him: 
as it is said: ‘yet they shall know that there hath been a prophet among 
them.” 

The last sentence gives fresh force to the expression in the Teaching (xii. 1) 
δοκιμάσαντες αὐτὸν γνώσεσθε, σύνεσιν yap ἕξετε. Light is also thrown on 
the words in the sixth chapter, “without God he is teaching thee,” for if 


1 Talm. Bab. Sanhedrin, ο. 10. 
* Hilkoth yesode hathorah, 10 g. 
3 Cf, Ad. xi. 8, ἀλλ᾽ ἐὰν ἔχῃ τοὺς τρόπους κυρίου. 


and for co- 
baptismal 
fastings, 


which rules 
seem to be 
later than 
A.D. 70. 


88 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


he were a true prophet, it would be known that the Lord was among them, 
as well as that a prophet was among them. And indeed from these two 
considerations it follows that where the Teaching about God is, there God 
himself is. From the foregomg passages it will be clear that our Teaching 
is rooted in rules of Judaism which were already formulated. 

A peculiar and unnoticed Hebraism lies in the expression of ¢. xii. 4, 
“According to your understanding provide that no idle person shall live 
amongst you as a Christian.” I do not think that it has been noticed that 
this expression is euphemistic ; it involves rough treatment, perhaps ejectment 
from the Church. The passage 1 Kings ii. 6 will illustrate it, in which 
David on his deathbed directing Solomon to accomplish the murder of Joab, 
says “Do therefore according to thy wisdom.” One cannot help wishing 
that the Church had always retained and acted upon the precept of the 
Teaching. 

A slight hint may perhaps be found in the directions which the Teaching 
gives for the conjunction of fasting with baptism by means of which a superior 
limit of time may be set to the Teaching considered as a Christian document. 
Concerning the antiquity of the rule given in the Teaching there need be 
no question as it is supported by the descriptions given by Justin in his 
First Apology. But how did the custom arise? Α little reflection will shew 
that for a complete proselyte initiation three things were necessary, Cireum- 
cision, Baptism and Sacrifice. Now in borrowing the Jewish forms of initiation 
the Christians modified the rite of baptism in certain points and maintained it 
in practice; the rite of circumcision they were, however, unable to enforce 
on the new converts, and it was dropped at a very early period; what then 
with regard to the third? The necessity for a solution of this difficulty 
was felt even more by the Jews than by the Christians, especially after the 
destruction of the City: and the substitute which the Jews brought forward 
was fasting. It is positively stated in the Talmud that this substitute is 
later in date than the fall of Jerusalem, although otherwise we might have 
supposed the change to have been made at an early period in the interest 
of proselytes in distant countries. Thus we find in Talmud Berachoth 17a, 
“Rab Shesheth, when fasting, after having repeated his prayers used to say, 
‘Lord of the world, it is revealed before thee that while the Holy House stood a 
man who was a sinner brought a sacrifice: it was only the fat and the blood 
that atoned for him. Now I am fasting and diminishing my fat and my blood: 
let it be thy pleasure that my fat and my blood thus decreased be offered 
before thee as though offered on thy altar.” 

It is clear that in the foregoing extract the mind of the Rabbi is dwelling 
upon the fact that fasting is the substitute for sacrifice, and the reason of 
this is the downfall of the Holy House. Now if we could regard this as 
the correct explanation of the change made in the ritual, since the Christians 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 89 


must have borrowed the new custom from the Jews’, then the fall of Jerusalem 
is a superior limit to the Teaching considered as a Christian document. The 
matter is not, however, so clear as it looks; may not the rule of fasting in 
lieu of sacrifice be somewhat earlier? There must have been always a difficulty 
felt in regard to the sacrifices made by proselytes of distant countries. 

No less interesting than the Hebraisms of baptism are those which attach 
themselves to the Eucharist. The prayers are full of reminiscence of the 
Jewish Passover ritual, and capable of direct illustration from the Jewish 
service-books of the present day: and even in those parts of the thanksgiving 
where no direct parallel can be made, the language of the Teaching-is utterly 
Jewish. Take for example the rule of prayer given in Berachoth f. 40 Ὁ; 
“All blessing in which there is no mention of the Name is not a blessing ; 
that blessing in which there is no mention of the Kingdom is not a blessing.” 
To this test our Lord’s prayer exactly corresponds, the Name and the Kingdom 
being the first points introduced, while the shortened doxology, whether the 
correct form or not, bears witness to the consciousness that the Kingdom 
having been mentioned once, did not need to be repeated. Similar things 
are true of the Teaching, especially in cases where the Kingdom is followed 
by the doxology: e.g. 

“So let thy Church be gathered together...into thy Kingdom ; for thine 
is the glory and the power through Jesus Christ for ever.” 

“Gather her from the four winds...into thy Kingdom which thou hast 
prepared for her: for thine is the power and the glory for ever.” 

And the “Name” is found in the expression, “Thy holy Name which thou 
hast caused to dwell in our hearts.” Nothing could be more evidently Jewish. 

The same thing is true of the curious word κλάσμα which is used to 
describe the bread that is given thanks for. At first sight this looks artificial 
enough to be a Christian invention, especially in the light of the passage in 
the Gospel τὸ σῶμα τὸ κλώμενον κτὲ. but a closer examination shews that it 
is a literal translation of the Hebrew word FA which is derived from a root 
meaning “to break.” The word, however, must have lost all trace of this 
meaning; in the Old Testament we may find it used frequently with the 
word for bread (=a morsel of bread), but in the time of the Teaching it means 
nothing more or less than bread and should be so translated, without philo- 
logical consciousness. Thus Rabbi Judah the Holy, when lamenting that he 
had given his bread to an unworthy person, uses this very term’, and in- 
numerable other instances might be given of the usage*. 


1 The writer seems to be sensible of an agreement with the Jews, since he goes on at once 
“But let not your fasts (i.e. the periodic fasts) be with the hypocrites.” 

2 Τὶ, B. Bava Bathra, f, 8 a. 

3 Cf. Talm. Scheviith, c. 8. Rabbi Eleazar said, ‘‘He that eateth the bread (M5) of a Cuthite 
(Samaritan) is as if he ate swine’s flesh.” : 


H, 12 


Follows the 
order of the 
Paschal 
Service, 


and is similar 
in its escha- 
tology to the 
Jewish Mes- 
sianice expec- 
tations. 


90 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


The blessings of the bread and of the cup are modifications, then, of the 
regular Jewish forms used at meals, and especially at the Passover service. 

Notice also what the Teaching has taken up from the sentence in the 
Passover prayers concerning the “memorial of the Messiah the son of David 
thy servant',” and the parallels between the last Psalm of the Hallel sung 
at the Passover Table (Ps. exvili.) and the “Hosanna to the God of David” 
which we find in the Teaching. The very words with which the last prayer 
of the service is introduced are based on Deut. vii. 10, as may be seen from 
the sentence in the Passover Service, “Thy Name shall be blessed by the mouth 
of every living thing...according as it is written ‘After ye have eaten and are 
filled”” Hence the Teaching immediately brings m the mention of the Holy 
Name’. 

The last chapter of the Teaching is also Judaic in matter and manner: 
it seems to be based upon predictions of events which were to occur in the 
days preceding the advent of Messiah: and there are not a few Talmudic 
passages of similar structure to it. For example in the tract Sota® we are 
told that “in the last days (literally, in the heel of the Messiah) shamelessness* 
will be increased...The vine will put forth her fruit but nevertheless wine 
will be dear. The supreme power in the world will be overwhelmed with 
worthless opinions....Synagogues will be turned into houses of ill-fame, the 
borders of Judea will be laid waste, &c.” The similarity of structure between 
this and the xvith chapter of the Teaching is apparent. Very nearly the 
same language is found in the tract Sanhedrin*®, which adds further that “the 
son of David will not come until traitors are multiplied.” Compare this with 
the “false prophets and corrupters shall be multiplied” of the Teaching. 

It is superfluous after so many instances of Hebraism in the matter of 
the Teaching to draw attention to those which occur in its style, and it is 
sufficient to remark that they are often patent even to the reader of an 
English translation of the Teaching, while to one who should attempt to 
translate the tract into Hebrew, they would be met at every point. 


INTEGRITY OF THE TEACHING. 


The two directions in which the integrity of the Teaching as a document 
has been chiefly brought under suspicion are as follows: (i.) It is suspected 
that the doctrine of the Two Ways is a separate document probably Jewish 
in origin, to which there has been appended in its Christian form the rules 


1 Haggada Shel Pesach, ]72Y ΠΥ 13 Me. 

2 There is therefore no need with Dr Taylor to refer to the Chagigah, or feast before Passover. 
3 Sota ix. 16. 

4 ΝΟΥ. Is this the ἀνομία of the Teaching? 

5 Sanhedrin xi. 27, 28. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 91 


of baptism, love-feast and prophecy, together with the doctrine of the Last 
Things. This separates the first five chapters (Harnack adds a scrap of the 
_ Sixth) from the rest of the book. (ii) In these chapters there is one great 
interpolation (i. 3—ii 1) which disturbs the continuity and is not found 
in a group of the earliest authorities for the Teaching. 

Let us examine these points carefully. If the preceding investigations as 
to possible Jewish sources for the ideas and regulations of the Teaching be 
worth anything, they shew that the Jewish character of the book is just 
as marked in the middle as at the beginning, and just as marked at the 
end as in the middle. Every rule is capable of being tested in the Rabbinic 
manner by an underlying passage from the Old Testament, and the methods 
of exegesis are throughout of the fanciful character by which we learn to 
recognize the Jewish interpreter. That an apostle must not ask for money 
would of itself be inconclusive, for the Christian custom is originally even 
stronger than the Jewish on such a point: but the idea of giving him a 
piece of bread to suffice until he reach his next lodging is the very method 
of treatment for wandering mendicants which we find in the Talmud. That 
a prophet should not eat of his own love-feast was at first sight a precaution 
employed against persons who maintained themselves in luxury off the new 
communities; closer examination shews a precept in Ezekiel which forbids 
the shepherds any longer to feed themselves. No one but a Rabbi would 
have used the precept for the purpose to which the Teaching applies it. 
The Cosmic Mystery is an actual Jewish term. The description of the 
salvation from the Curse by the Curse, though it has largely coloured the 
whole of the early Christian theology, is so thoroughly Jewish that it furnishes 
one of the stock objections to Christianity on the part of the Jews in the 
shape of a demand to shew how the blessing comes by the way of the Curse. 
The Teaching, then, is Jewish all through: and not necessarily only in the 
“Two Ways” section. Further, the more closely we examine the early attestation 
of the Teaching the more difficult is it to restrict it to one part of the tract. 
Barnabas, at first glance, seemed only to use the first five chapters, but 
then it appeared that he had elsewhere quoted the sixteenth chapter and 
there were other suggestions of knowledge on his part outside of these limits. 

The epistle of Jude has been shewn to have knowledge of an Apostolic 
Teaching, and there are no grounds for assuming it to be any shorter than ours, 
since it must have contained the precepts in ii. 7 and the section on prophecy 
Of ic. ἘΠ 

Clement of Alexandria refers to the doctrine of the Two Ways and quotes 
the precepts of the decalogue in the dress which they wear in the Teaching, 
but then he has suspicious allusions to the blood of David's vine, which recall 
the ninth chapter of the Teaching, so that his text-book cannot be restricted 
to the Two Ways. And the same thing is true of a number of other writers. 

12—2 


The unity of 
the Teaching 
has been 
denied, 


and a large 
interpolation 
has been 
asserted, 


but the 
Hebraistic 
character of 
the book is 
maintained 
throughout. 


Early writers 
do not con- 
fine their 
quotations to 
the “Two 
Ways.” 


The internal 
evidence for 
the interpo- 
lation can be 
vot rid of, 


but not so 
easily the 
external. 


92 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


It seems then most reasonable to assume the Teaching to be an integer. 
If it has a Jewish written original behind it, this may very well have covered 
the same ground as the Teaching (Ethics, Baptism of proselytes, Passover, 
Day of Atonement, Signs of Messiah), while the divergencies of the Teaching 
from the original document must have been more marked in one part than in 
another. This conclusion is not meant to exclude the idea that there were 
various recensions of the primitive Christian Teaching current, and that 
precepts might be omitted in some which were current in others. 

The next point is the great interpolation (i, 83—1. 1). This section is 
omitted by Barnabas, the Ecclesiastical Canons, the Latin Version and the 
Syntagma Doctrinae, and no doubt this omission can be eeae ones by 
reference to such authorities as quote the precepts οὐ μοιχεύσεις, ov 
φονεύσεις directly after the Golden Rule. Thus the Clementine Homilies 
would be in evidence on the point, and perhaps some other writers. It 
is said further that the imserted passage breaks the continuity of the ideas: 
that it contains counsels of perfection rather than elementary discipline, 
and certainly these, if a part of the text, should be led up to through 
the minor morality. Omit the passage and we run smoothly enough; “of 
these words (i.e. the golden rule in a negative form) this is the Teaching. 
Thou shalt not murder, &e., &e.” 

It must be admitted that there is a great deal of force in these ob- 


jections: we have almost a right to expect negative commandments in - 


exposition of a negative precept. And if the commandments of the deca- 
logue have prefixed to them the description “Second Commandment of the 
Teaching,” the previous section being on the first commandment ought to 
have to do with God and not with man. 

But I should like to suggest that these exceptions arise partly from 
a misunderstanding; the first and second commandments of the Teaching 
mean nothing more than the first and second Talmudic gloss to the same 
passage of expounded text. They both refer to the passage “Secondly thy 
neighbour as thyself, and what thou wouldst not, &e” This precept 
divides itself at once into a positive and a negative precept, and is 
accompanied by a group of (1.) positive precepts, (ii.) negative precepts. The 
separation of the two is thoroughly Talmudic. The apparent fall in the 
treatment of the subject would thus be a natural consequence of the pre- 
cedence of the positive precepts over the negative. Viewed in this light, 
the continuity of the subject is restored. 

But what shall we say with regard to the silence of writers quoting 
the Teaching, but not this section? Here the argument for interpolation 
reaches its strength. We may perhaps say that arguments from silence are 
peculiarly treacherous in the case of writers who are obviously making 
extracts: we may point out the dependence of the Canons upon Barnabas 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 93 


and so reduce the evidence: the evidence of the passage from the Cle- 
mentine Homilies might be explained by shewing, as above, that the 
. precepts quoted really belonged together in the mind of the writer of the 
Teaching. But then Barnabas and the Latin Version would still hold the 
field on the other side, and so, unless further evidence is forthcoming, it 
seems that the extract in question can hardly be a part of the first edition 
of the Teaching. This theory is confirmed by the fact that the ἔση τέλειος 
of the interpolator appears again in the passage which, of all others, bears 
the marks of having been re-written: viz. vi. 2. 

Funk maintains the contrary, and regards all existing authorities as Genealogical 
descendants of a single copy, three of them (Barnabas, the Latin, and the ee 
Canons) having an internal nexus by acquaintance on the part of two of fe according 
them with the third (Barnabas). 

Warfield and Harnack, proceeding on the ground of interpolation, pro- 
ceed to recover the genealogical relations of the authorities for the text 
of the Teaching. Dr Warfield’ presents two different recensions, one of Warfield, 
which he calls the Egyptian version, the other the Syrian. : 

From the former proceed the texts of Barnabas, the Canons, and the 
Latin version. From the latter the text of the Constitutions and the 
Jerusalem Codex. This would be represented by 


“The Two Ways” (not a Jewish book). 


Egyptian Teaching Syrian Teaching 
re — oe eS eee 
elit area aa) Ap. Const. Jerusalem Cod. 
Latin version Barn..... 


Ap. Canons, 
To which he has added something® by placing in the left-hand group the 
copy of the Teaching from which is derived the text of the Syntagma Doctrinae 
and of the Faith of the Nicene Fathers. 
Harnack’s table is different: he gives and Harnack, 


“The Two Ways” (a Jewish book current in various forms). 
γ-- τ τ + ——_ — 
Barnabas 
First recension 


of the Teaching 


———— - τς ---- --τ-- ----- - τὸ νὰ 
Latin Ap. Canons Second Recension 
--.-.ὅ. --α-Ἡ.--.-.-.ς-ς-ς-ς--- 
Ap. Const. Jerusalem 
Cod. 


1 Bibliotheca Sacra, 1886; Andover Review, vi. 88. 
2 Journal of Biblical Literature and Exegesis for June, 1886, pp. 86... 


of which 
Warfield’s 
stands criti- 
cism best. 


Chronological 
and geogra- 
phical distri- 
bution of the 
attestation to 
the Teaching. 


94 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


In this scheme the parallelisms between Barnabas and the Latin and 
Canons are explained by an acquaintance on the part of Barnabas with the 
first recension of the Teaching’. But this is not sufficient: we have shewn 
that the Canons borrow from Barnabas outside the matter of the Teaching; 
in fact steal his proém and his epilogue. The Harnack scheme must therefore 
be abandoned. As to Dr Warfield’s I prefer to suspend my final judgment ; 
it offers the best hypothesis in some respects that has yet been proposed and 
stands investigation well; but, as I said above, being based largely upon 
textual omissions, it invites suspicion, and in any case there is a safety in 
not going further into speculation than we are obliged. We must wait 
for further developments before we can with a sufficient degree of assurance 
assert the correctness of Dr Warfield’s genealogy. We may, however, before 
long find it fully confirmed. As to the terms “Egyptian” and “Syrian” 
which Warfield applies to his two recensions, they are not to be taken too 
literally. They open up the very interesting question of the geographical 
distribution of the attestation to the Teaching. If my statement with 
regard to the use of the Teaching by Jude be correct, we have an addition 
to Dr Warfield’s theory. Jude is first known amongst the Fathers in 
Alexandria (excepting only the note in the Muratorian Canon) and always 
best known there, and it is interesting that the Teaching which he used con- 
tained the passage ods δὲ ἐλέγξεις, ods δὲ ἐλεήσεις as in the Apost. Canons. 
This is perfectly consistent and puts Jude’s Teaching under Warfield’s Egyptian 
branch. 

The geographical distribution of the Teaching cannot, however, easily be 
restricted to one or two countries, nor does Dr Warfield intend to do so. The 
book is current in the second century in Rome, Ephesus, Corinth, Alexandria, 
and indeed it is more wide-spread than almost any other early document that 
can be compared with it. 

The following table will furnish a conspectus of the evidence on this point 
(no allowance being made for mere speculations). 


| Cent. | Place, Acquainted with 
Ascensio Isaiae end of i. | c. XV. 
Jude end of i, ? Alexandria ? Ὁ. 11, Ὁ: XL, 6: XVI. 
Barnabas saec. 11. | Alexandria | c. i—v.,c. Χ.7, 6. xi,2, 6. xvi. 
Hermas | saec, 11. Rome Ὁ ib, δ᾽ tly, Gs VW 
Justin | saec. 11. | Ephesus Ὁ πν, 6 ΧΙ Ὁ: ΣΤ 
2 Clem, saec. 1]. Corinth Ὁ: (WU ks Ὁ. ven Ὁ Μ|. δ σ᾿ 


1 Die Apostellehre, p, 32, note, 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 95 


IS THE TEACHING MONTANISTIC? 


Harnack records with much amusement the various attempts which have 
been made to identify the writer of the Teaching with the exponents or 
opponents of some special heresy of the Early Church. Judging from the 
variety of opinions which he is reckoned to represent, he must have been 
a universal-heretic if we may imitate the language of the Teaching: but then 
for every writer who has proved him Ebionitic or Montanistic or the like, 
there is another who has demonstrated his perfect orthodoxy and his opponency 
of the very same views. So that the writer must have been also a universal- 
orthodox. The only case that calls for the least examination is the supposed 
Montanism of our recension of the Teaching, which Hilgenfeld contends for 
and which Bryennios holds the writer to oppose. 

Τὸ is hardly fair to cut the knot of such a conflict by asserting roundly 
the earlier date of the Teaching, especially since we have seen that there 
is some ground for believing our form of the Teaching to be the second 
recension of the original document. And indeed if we adopted this method 
we should miss the great advantage of observing the relations between the 
Montanistic churches and the earlier societies. 

Hilgenfeld’s view involves the re-handling of the original Teaching for 
Montanistic ends: the prophets of the Teaching are thus the Montanistic 
illuminati; the eschatology is the well-known chiliasm of the Phrygian churches. 
But we have shewn that the doctrine of prophecy is based immediately upon 
Jewish views, and can be illustrated from Jewish sources, and that similar 
statements can be made with regard to the doctrine of the Last Things. So 
that any parallels between the Teaching and Montanism are more valid for 
the demonstration of the antiquity of the latter than for the corruption of the 
former for private ends. And indeed this is what comes out of the investigation, 
a verification or at least a strong confirmation of the theory which maintains 
that the discipline and the doctrine of the early Church were conserved amongst 
the Montanists. In a sense we may say that Hilgenfeld and Bryennios were 
both right. Nor must we be altogether surprised even if exactly opposite 
views are capable of maintenance with regard to detailed points in the Teaching. 
For the truth is that the Teaching often speaks in two voices, and this is a 
mark of its Jewish origin. Given two texts in the Old Testament which are of 
an opposite tenor on any given subject, we have to reconcile them, or to assert 
them both: as, for imstance, in the case quoted on p. 99 with regard to the 
confession of the sin and the two apparently opposite verses, “He that 
covereth his sin ἄς," “Blessed is the man whose transgression is forgiven 
and whose sin is covered.” So in the Teaching we have the two rules 
that a prophet must not feed himself off the flock, and that the flock is to 
bring him first-fruits of everything. The contradiction may of course be 


The Teaching 
has been 
diligently 
searched for 


heresy 


and for 
orthodoxy ; 


the only plau- 
sible charge 
being that of 
Montanism, 


96 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


diminished by shewing that the prophet receives these things as the almoner 
of the community, but it cannot be wholly got rid of. And while it exists, 
it will be easy to maintain that the Teaching is Montanistic or anti-Montanistic 
on the subject of gifts to the prophets, according as we lay stress on one point 
or the other of the opposition in the text. 
but this arises Return, however, to the question of the existence of prophecy, which is 
from the eles antecedent to that of payment or non-payment. I see that Professor Funk’ 
eee admits that if the Teaching was not written before the middle of the second 
tive Church, century then what is there said with regard to Apostles, Prophets and Teachers 
must be referred to the Montanists. It follows without any difficulty that if 
the Teaching existed at an earlier date than Montanism, then the orders which 
are found in the organisation of Montanism must be capable of reference by 
paralielism to the disciplme of the primitive communities. And in fact 
the New Testament, read in the light of the Teaching, says this very thing: it 
comes down to meet Montanism by shewing the sense that is to be attached 
to the primitive apostolate and prophetic order, and their non-limitation to 
a circle of twelve persons for the one office or to an occasional ecstatic for 
the other. We are, therefore, able to make the parallel complete from the 
critical side of the subject, while leaving its ecclesiastical interpretation to 
those who may be most interested therein: the evidence for the identification 
is as follows: 


Church at Antioch. Church at Corinth. Church at Ephesus. 

Acts xii. 1. 1 Cor. xii. 28. Eph. iv. 11, cf. 11. 20, iii. 5. 

Apostles Apostles 
Prophets Prophets Prophets 
Teachers Teachers Evangelists 
Powers , Pastors and Teachers 
Gifts of Healing 
&e. 

Church of the Teaching. Churches of the Montanists’. 
Apostles Patriarchs (= Apostles) 
Prophets Cenones (Kowvwvor) (= Prophets) 
Bishops Bishops 

Presbyters 
Deacons Deacons 


1 Doctrina, p. xl. 

2 Corp. Jur, Civ. i. 5. 20, τῶν καλουμένων αὐτῶν πατριαρχῶν καὶ κοινωνῶν ἢ ἐπισκόπων ἢ πρεσ- 
βυτέρων ἢ διακόνων ἢ ἄλλων κλὴρικῶν, 

Hier. ep. 41 ad Marcellum. ‘ Apud nos apostolorum locum episcopi tenent, apud eos episcopus 
est tertius. Habent enim primos de Pepuza Phrygiae patriarchas, secundos quos appellant cenones, 
atque ita in tertium id est pene ultimum locum episcopi devolvuntur.” 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 97 


ADDITIONAL NOTES ON THE TEACHING. 


Title. The compiler of Ap. Const. vii. seems to have had the long title 
in his copy: οὗ c. 27 ἄλλην διδαχὴν κηρύσσῃ παρ᾽ ἣν ὑμῖν παρέδωκεν ὁ 
Χριστὸς δι’ ἡμῶν. It was, perhaps, known to the writer of the so-called 
2 ep. of Clement and to Ps.-Ignatius who wrote the epistle to the Antio- 
chenes: for both of these writers make remarks about the Gentiles in connexion 
with the sentiments found in the early part of the Teaching: see pp. 35, 49. 

The author of the Ascensio Isaiae uses the shorter title, but this does 
not prove anything against the longer. 

Prof. Warfield thinks the δώδεκα an insertion, chiefly on account of its 
omission in the Latin and some Patristic allusions. And it is certain that 
the writer did not confine the term Apostle to the Twelve. But on the 
other hand note that the Ascensio Isaiae has the “twelve.” 

The doctrine of the Two Ways appears in its Scriptural form, “life and 
death”: see Deut. xxx. 15 and Targum in loc.: Jer. xxi. 8; Matt. vii. 13, 
&e. But the ethical opposition must have existed in numerous forms, and 
goes back on the Greek side to Pythagoras. 

These various forms are responsible for having influenced the recensions 
of the Teaching; and when we find that the later Pythagoreans established 
the following syzygies in their treatment of the first principles of philosophy, 


Limit — Unlimited Right — Left Light — Darkness 
Odd — Even Quiet — Moving Good — Evil 
One — Many Straight — Curved Square — Oblong 


we may suspect that the change made in Barnabas to the way of light 
and the way of darkness, as well as his description of the way of death 
as crooked, is a quasi-philosophical correction. 

The Pythagoreans, following their master, illustrated their doctrine of 
Two Ways by the letter y: but then we must make a correction to the 
form of the letter, which in archaic Greek would consist of a single vertical 
line from which the second limb diverges on the left in a curved line. 
Thus the division into “straight” and “crooked” is earlier than that into 
“right” and “left.” From the fact that our Lord used the same word 
ἀπάγουσα for both roads, we may infer that his teaching is based on the 
later form of the y. When Barnabas speaks of the left-hand road as σκολιὰ 
we have a touch of antiquity which is much more forcible than the πονηρὰ 
of the Teaching: but then it must be noted that the latter part of the 
Teaching is based on an opposition between “right” and “left” which seems 
to result from holding the doctrine of the Two Ways as illustrated by 

H. 13 


See Aristotle, 
Ethics, 


98 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


the later form of the y. Lactantius finds fault with the y doctrine as not 
being sufficiently opposed in its two parts. The difference between the Two 
Ways did not seem to him to be great enough: the moral angle between 
them was wider, so to speak, than the acute angle of the letter by which 
they were denoted. The passage is an interesting one inasmuch as Lactantius 
collects therein a number of ethical antitheses which were current for the 
Two Ways, as east and west, virtue and vice, light and darkness, truth 
and lying, life and death, and implies that an appointed guide stands over 
each path’. 

1. 2. There is a memory of the Teaching in Caspari <Anecdota i. 197. 
The passage is taken from a homily to the baptized and is found in a 
Montpelier MS. It says that our Lord taught his disciples to warn men 
“ut recederent a vitiis diaboli id est ab homicidio a furto a perjurio a 
fornicatione ab ebrietate et ab omni vitio malo, et quod sibi non velint, 
alii non faciant.” 

1. 4 Harnack has pointed out that the order of the Gospel sentences 
here is the same as in the Diatessaron of Tatian. And such a coincidence 
can hardly be accidental. If the text of the Teaching is uninterpolated 
this furnishes a terminus ad quem for the Teaching: unfortunately the 
coincidence occurs precisely at the point where interpolation is suspected: 
and if that supposition can be verified we have either a terminus ad quem 
for the revised Teaching or a terminus a quo for the date of the interpolator. 

The negative form of the Golden Rule is found in Tobit, Philo, &e., it 
is referred by the Jews to Hillel: for other references see Funk’s note in 
loc. The most important Christian instance of its use is its insertion after 
Acts xv. 20 and 29 by Codex Bezae and 11 cursives with the Thebaic 
and Ethiopic versions, and the support of Irenaeus and Cyprian. 

The motive for the insertion is evident; the letter sent by the Apostles 
was in effect a part of their authorised Teaching, and nothing was more 
inviting than to insert with the other dogmata the most striking sentence 
which was supposed to emanate from them. The use of ἕτερος for ἄλλος 
has already been suggested (see p. 79) as a possible earlier form, sub- 
stituted for ἑταίρῳ. 

1. 5. oval τῷ λαμβάνοντι) For according to Kethuvoth 68a, “He 
that receiveth alms without needing the same shall come to want before 
he dies,” 


A comparison with Matt. v. 25 shews that we must translate “and 


1 Lact. Divin. Instit. vi. 8, “Forma quoque ipsarum viarum non ita est, ut illi putaverunt. 
Quid enim opus est y littera in rebus contrariis atque diversis? Sed altera illa melior conversa 
est ad solis ortum, altera illa deterior, ad occasum: quoniam qui veritatem ac justitiam 
sequitur, is, accepto immortalitatis praemio, perenni luee potietur: qui autem ab illo malo 


duce illectus praetulerit vitia yirtutibus, mendacium veritati, necesse est ad occasum et tenebras 
deferatur.”” 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 99 


when he is in prison he shall be examined, &ec.” But one is tempted to 
believe that it may have originally stood, before the Christian gloss was 
_ added, “and when he is im want he shall be questioned concerning his 
deeds.” Rabbi Judah the Holy transferred the Woe of the receiver to 
himself: “Woe is me, said he, I have given my bread to one of the 
vulgar’.” 

iii. 2. μὴ γίνου ὀργίλος] Cf. Tert. De Orat. xi., “Quomodo placabit patrem 
iratus in fratrem cum omnis ira ab initio interdicta sit nobis? Nam et Joseph 
dimittens fratres suos ad perducandum patrem, Et ne, inquit, irascimini in 
via; nos scilicet monuit. Alias enim via cognominatur disciplina nostra.” 

ii. 3. It is noticeable that the apostle in 1 Cor. x. 6—11 follows closely 
the sentiments given here: εἰς τὸ μὴ εἶναι ἡμᾶς ἐπιθυμητὰς κακῶν καθὼς 
κἀκεῖνοι... μηδὲ εἰδωλολάτραι γίνεσθε... μηδὲ πορνεύωμεν... μηδὲ γογγύζξετε... 

ui. 10. Cf. Berachoth f. 60 b, “whatever is done by the merciful is for 
good”: and Sirach i. 4, πᾶν ὃ ἐὰν ἐπαχθῇ σοι δέξαι. 

iv. 1. Cf Pirge Avoth iv. 17. “Let the fear of thy Rabbi be as ὑπὸ 
fear of Heaven.” 

2. Cf. Pirge Avoth i. 4. “Powder thyself in the dust of the wise and 
drink their words with thirstiness.” 

iv.8. οὐκ ἐρεῖς ἴδια εἶναι] Cf. Pirge Avoth v.16. “There are four characters 
in men: he that saith, mine is mine and thine is thine, is an indifferent 
character: but some say, it is the character of Sodom: he that saith, mine 
is thine and thine is mine, is ‘am-ha-areg’: mine and thine are thine, pious : 
thine and mine are mine, wicked.” 

Cf. also Evagrius Ponticus (Migne, Patr. Gr. xl. 1283). “Ne dicas, 
meum hoe, et tuum illud, in Christo enim Jesu omnia communia.” 

iv. 10. τὸν ἐπ᾽ ἀμφοτέροις θεόν] Cf. Lactantius Epit. 64. “Non sit asper 
in filium neque in servum: meminerit quod et ipse patrem habet et dominum.” 

iv. 14. ἐν ἐκκλησίᾳ) The public confession of sin is a Jewish doctrine 
and practice, with a single reservation. Sins between man and man are 
confessed publicly: sins between man and God are not to be confessed. The 
reason of this lies in the fact that two contrary verses on the subject were 
adduced from the Scripture: one Proy. xxviii. 13, “He that covereth his 
sins shall not prosper”; the other Ps. xxxii. 1, “Blessed is the man whose 
sin is covered.” Naturally these texts came to the front early in connexion 
with the day of atonement (or covering). Hence in the Mishna, Yoma e. 8, 
“Rab Zutra the son of Tobias said, The latter refers to transgressions between 
man and God; and the other relates to transgressions between man and 
his fellow,’ and Maimonides* expands the sentiment as follows: “It is also 
very commendable in the penitent to confess before a multitude of persons 


1 Τ΄ B. Bava Bathra, f. 8 a. 
2 Yad hachazakah, Hilkoth Teschuva 2. 


13—2 


σις 


100 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


and to make known before them his transgression, also to reveal to others 
the offences between himself and his fellow: for it is said &e. (Proy. xxviii. 13), 
but with regard to transgressions between man and God, he ought not to 
render himself notorious...for it is said &c. (Ps. xxxii. 1).” 

καὶ ov προσελεύσῃ] Cf. Berachoth ec. 5, “they will not rise to pray except 
with a mind at rest,” and 2 Clem. xvi. προσευχὴ δὲ ἐκ καλῆς συνειδήσεως 
ἐκ θανάτου ῥύεται. 

vi. 8. ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ εἰδωλοθύτου] The question of the lawfulness of idol- 
meats was a burning one both in Jewish and Christian circles. For the former 
note that Rabbi Akiba’ maintained that meat which was about to be brought 
into heathen worship was lawful, but that which comes from it is forbidden 
because it is like the sacrifices of the dead’. Amongst the Christians it 
was one of the early dividing lines between party and party, as we see from 
Justin and still more from Apoc, 1. 14, where those persons are attacked 
who have what is called the διδαχὴ Βαλαάμ and who teach people to eat 
meat offered to idols. Was this a book or merely a doctrine®? 

vii. 4. This rule probably suggested Tertullian’s statement that even 
Cornelius who was so suddenly received into fellowship had fasted before 
his baptism. “Granted that upon the centurion Cornelius, even before baptism, 
the honourable gift of the Holy Ghost, together with the gift of prophecy 
besides, had hastened to descend, we see that his fasts had been heard.” 

vil. 1. Opposition to the details of surrounding religions is a notice- 
able feature of Eastern religious movements. Sale in his preface to the 
Koran, § 4, notes as follows: “Al Kazwini relates that when Mohammed 
came to Medina and found the Jews there fasted on the day of Ashtira 
(=day of atonement) he asked them the reason of it: and they told him 
it was because on that day Pharaoh and his people were drowned, Moses 
and those who were with him escaping: whereupon he said that he bore 
a nearer relation to Moses than they and ordered his followers to fast on 
that day. However it seems afterwards he was not so well pleased in 
having imitated the Jews herem: and therefore declared that, if he lived 
another year, he would alter the day, and fast on the ninth, abhorring so 
near an agreement with them.” And Bosworth Smith thinks that it was 

1 Avoda Sara, ii. 3. 

2 Ps. evi. 28. 

3 The subject certainly suggests something like a book: but there is a salutary warning 
given by Stieren, in a note on the first Pfaff fragment of Irenaeus, which I am not deterred 
from repeating by the thought that I may have sinned against it myself. ‘Nec enim eam in 
opinionem descendimus quod ubicunque apud vyeteres διδασκαλία ἀποστολική, τάξις, διατάξεις, δια- 
rayal, διατάγματα τῶν ἀποστόλων, ἐντολαί, προστάγματα, παράδοσις, παραδόσεις ἀποστολικαί, διατάξεις 
εὐαγγελικαί, παράδοσις εὐαγγελική, εὐαγγελικὸν κήρυγμα, κήρυγμα τῶν ἀποστύλων, ἐκκλησιαστικὴ 
διδασκαλία, κανὼν τῆς ἀληθείας, κανὼν τῆς πίστεως, κανὼν τῆς λειτουργίας, νόμιμα τοῦ δεσπότου, 


παραγγέλματα τῶν ἀποστόλων, διδαχαὶ et quae alia sunt, memorentur, certi quidam libri sunt in- 
telligendi ad quos respiciatur.” 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 101 


a similar antagonism that led Mohammed to forbid the use of wine, 
because it was a sacred Christian symbol. 

The terms “they fast on the second and fifth days” are the exact 
equivalent of WDM) Δ of the Mishna (Taanith ii. 9). 

The early Fathers deduce the authority of the weekly fasts from the 
words of our Lord: “Days will come that the bridegroom shall be taken 
from them...then shall they fast in those days,” viz. the day of the 
betrayal and the day of the crucifixion. Cf. Epiphanius and Tertullian 
De Abst. 2. Wednesday and Friday are joy-days with the Rabbis, since 
they appoint the first for the wedding-day of virgins, the second for that of 
widows. 

viii. 3. The Jews prove the threefold prayer by an acrostic use of 
the Shema: thus 


52.) ova ww’ 
m3? sb au 
mos? am msn’ 


Bingham remarks (Antig. i. 661): “Cyprian indeed recommends these 
hours of prayer, but he does not as much as once suggest that the Church 
had then by any rule made these the stated hours of public devotion”! 
It is true that the Teaching does not specify the hours; probably there 
was already when the Teaching was written a traditional sanctity attached 
to the third, sixth and ninth hours. Tertullian almost says as much in 
De Abstinentia c. 8, “The third hour is demonstrated as an hour of prayer, 
about which hour it was that they who had received the initiatory gift 
of the Holy Spirit were held for drunkards, and the sixth at which Peter 
went up on the roof: the ninth at which he entered the temple: why 
should we not understand that with absolutely perfect indifference we 
must pray always everywhere and at every time? Yet still these three 
hours, as being more marked in things human, which divide the day, which 
distinguish businesses, which re-echo the public ear, have likewise ever 
been of special solemnity in divine prayers.” 

ix. 2. We shall shew under xi, 9 that the writer of the Teaching 
formulates a rule based on Ezek. xxxiy. 2, 8. There are traces of the 
use of this chapter in the thanksgiving of the Agape. “My servant David” 
is an expression for the. Messiah in this chapter, and should be compared 
with “the holy vine of David thy servant.” As to the holy vine itself 
that is the “plant of renown” mentioned at the close of the chapter; 
the connexion made by early Christian commentators may be seen by 
Theodoret’s note on this passage: ᾿Λναστήσω αὐτοῖς φυτὸν εἰρήνης εἰς 
ὄνομα. τοῦτο Kal ὁ προφήτης Ἡσαΐας λέγει, ᾿Ιξελεύσεται ῥάβδος ἐκ τῆς 


102 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


ῥίζης ᾿Ιεσσαὶ καὶ ἄνθος ἐκ τῆς ῥίζης ἀναβήσεται καὶ ἐπαναπαύσεται ἐπ᾽ 
αὐτὸν πνεῦμα τοῦ θεοῦ...τοῦτο ἑρμηνεύων ὁ κύριος ἔφη, ᾿Εγώ εἰμι ἄμπελος 
ἡ ἀληθινὴ κτὲ. 

ix. 4. Here again we have an oblique reference to Ezekiel, according 
to whom the Lord’s sheep have been scattered “on every mountain,” ἐν 
παντὶ ὄρει, and on every high hill; and a promise is given that they 
shall be gathered together again under one Shepherd. This is the basis 
of the words “gathered together from the ends of the earth” in the 
Teaching. And one is inclined to believe that the origimal form of the 
prayer must have been, “As thy sheep were scattered on the mountains, 
so may they be gathered from the ends of the earth.” A happy change 
would then have given us the most beautiful sentence in the Teaching, 
only I still think, in spite of Dr Taylor's reference to the “spread of 
corn in the top of the mountains” that “bread scattered on the mountains” 
is a little harsh. 

ix. 5. μηδεὶς δὲ φαγέτω] corresponds exactly to the Levitical regulation 
that no person must eat of the passover except the circumcised. 

τοῖς κυσί]͵ Cf. Tert. de praescr. haer. c. xli. “Also the heathen, if they 
come in, they will cast that which is holy to the dogs.” The interpretation 
must have lingered long in the Church, however unnatural it may be; 
there is a curious catacomb epitaph on one Tharsicius who was martyred 
while running off with the elements of the eucharist; 


“Tpse animam potius voluit dimittere caesus 
Prodere quam canibus rabidis caelestia membra.” 


x. 2. Cf. Psalms of Solomon, vii. 5, ἐν τῷ κατασκηνοῦν τὸ ὄνομα ἐν 
μέσῳ ἡμῶν ἐλεηθησόμεθα. 

x. 6. τῷ θεῷ Δαβίδ] It has been already stated that there is no reason 
for deserting the text of the MS. τῶ θεῷ Δαβίδ. To vindicate it, it is only 
necessary to shew that it is not a Japsus calamz. And this will be apparent 
when we shew that Barnabas defends the doxology as we have it in the 
Teaching. They evidently derive their reasoning from the verse “If David 
call him Lord, how is he his Son?” and from similar passages in which 
the word κύριος is used in the Old Testament of Christ, κύριος being 
regarded as the equivalent of θεός. Thus Barnabas says c. xu. “When 
they are about to say that Christ is the Son of David, David himself 
prophesies in fear and in understanding of the error of the sinners, ‘The 
Lord said unto my Lord, &c.—Ye see how David calls him Lord, and 
does not call him Son.” We must not of course assume that there is any 
direct reference to the doxology in the Teaching, but we may be almost 
sure that if Barnabas had a copy of the Teaching the text would have 
stood as it does in the Jerusalem Codex. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 103 


For similar reasoning see Justin, Dial. 83. 

x. 6, 7. ᾿Ὡσαννὰ...᾿Αμήν] Plumptre makes the following remark in 
- Smith’s Dictionary of Christian Antiquities: “The agreement of the four 
great families of liturgies implies the substratum of a common order. To 
that order may well have belonged the Hebrew words Hallelujah, Amen, 
Hosanna, Lord of Sabaoth.” An interesting prediction when viewed in the 
light of the Teaching. 

The Hallelujah was suggested by the singing of the so-called Hallel- 
Psalms at the Passover. For the eucharistic Amen cf. 1 Cor. xiv. 16, πῶς 
ἐρεῖ τὸ ᾿Αμὴν ἐπὶ τῇ σῇ εὐχαριστίᾳ; but it was not confined among the 
Jews to the Passover service, nor amongst the Christians to the Agape. 
The Rabbis declared that the reward of him that said the Amen was 
greater than that of him that recited the prayer. 

The Hosanna of the primitive service is taken directly from the exviiith 
Psalm, which was sung at the Passover Table. For Lord of Sabaoth 
we have δέσποτα παντόκρατορ in ec. x. 3. For this is the common rendering 
of the Hebraism in the text of the LXX. 

xi. 3. The Greek Church preserves the memory of this extended 
apostolate by adding in the Menology the title of apostle to nearly every 
sub-apostolic name in the New Testament. 

xi. 6. Cf. T. B. Bava Bathra 9a. “A poor man who is tramping from place 
to place is to be supplied with a loaf of a pundion (in value) when four measures 
of wheat are to be had for a shekel”: and 2 Cor. vi. 10 ὡς πτωχοί, πολλοὺς δὲ 
πλουτίζοντες. The rule in the text is probably proved from Is. i. 23, part of 
which is quoted in the table of sins: at all events this is what Justin uses to 
prove it by. Dial. 82, “We are eager to discourse on the Scriptures but not 
from love of money or praise or pleasure. We stand convicted on none of these 
heads. We would not live as your rulers whom God reproaches in Isaiah i. 23.” 

xi. Cf. Justin, Dial. 82. “Even to the present time there are amongst us 
prophetic charismata: from which fact even you ought to understand that 
what anciently existed among your people has been transferred to ours.” 

ΧΙ. 9. οὐ φάγεται ἀπ᾽ αὐτῆς] Dr Taylor notes that “the history of the 
Agape throws light...wpon the imperfectly understood passage of 2 Pet. ii. 13.” 
The passage referred to is as follows: “Spots and blemishes are they, revelling 
in THEIR love-feasts (read ἀγάπαις not ἀπάταις), feasting themselves along with 
you,” which they ought not to do, the love-feast being of their own appointing. 
The passage which corresponds to this in Jude is in one respect not so striking, 
inasmuch as it has omitted the difficult “their” before “love-feasts.” Hence 
Dr Taylor thinks “2 Peter has every appearance of priority.”. The text of Jude 
has in some copies been changed from ὑμῶν to αὐτῶν; but we must not make 
too much of this, for if Jude has apparently dropped something, he has also 
added words which throw light on the subject, “feeding themselves fearlessly.” 


104 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


Now this word “themselves” is just as important as the word “their” in 2 Pet., 
for it indicates the point of the offence. And it does more than this: it 
indicates the origin of the prohibition, namely the well-known 34th chapter 
in Ezekiel’, The shepherds are feeding themselves when they ought to be 
feeding the flock. Every rule in the Teaching is based on some Old Testament 
prohibition. We must not assume a necessary acquaintance on the part of 
either 2 Peter or Jude with our Teaching: for (1) the rule might be an 
oral one, (2) it might be, and probably was, a Jewish regulation as well as 
a Christian one. But let it stand for a suspicion and see whether we can put 
another suspicion with it. It has been pointed out that the words ois δὲ 
ἐλεήσεις are added in the Apostolical Canons after ods δὲ ἐχέγξεις in c. 1. 7 
of the Teaching: and the words would so easily have been omitted by a 
transeriber, that they might more easily have fallen out than have been 
inserted. Funk accordingly adds them in brackets and notes the reference to 
Jude; but he does not note that there are MSS. of Jude which read ods 
μὲν ἐλέγχετε διακρινομένους, ods δὲ ἐλεῶτε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες. How did 
these two ideas come here in this conjunction, running so parallel to the 
Teaching? Are the words ods μὲν ἐλέγχετε only a scribe’s addition from the 
Teaching? but in that case we have manuscripts of Jude quoting the Teaching 
while at the same time manuscripts of the Canons, which is much the same 
as saying the Teaching, are quoting Jude. This is, to say the least, unlikely, 
and when we recall the fact that Jude dwells upon a rule whieh is certainly 
found in the Teaching concerning prophets who feed themselves, is there 
any solution more natural than to suppose that the MSS. referred to have 
preserved the correct reading in Jude, that the epistle of Jude is quoting the 
Teaching in a recension, which contained chapters ii. and xi. of our form, 
or at least very similar matter?? And is not this view supported by the 
17th verse in which Jude bids his readers remember the words which were 
spoken aforetime by the Apostles of the Lord; how they said that in the 
last time, ἕο. The Teaching which Jude employed was then a Teaching 
of the Apostles and contained matter corresponding to our chapters ii. xi. 
and xvi. This conclusion helps to raise the date of the Teaching and even 
more to depress the date of Jude. The earliest quotations of the epistle of 


1 Plumptre’s note on this is near the solution, though not literal enough. ‘These teachers 
ceeded came in like the false shepherds of Ezek. xxxiv. to feed themselves, i.e. to indulge their 
own lusts in defiance of authority.” But the authority was not, as he suggested, the authority 
of the true pastors of the Church, but a modest treatise on the Christian religion. 

2 Dr Hort prints the text of Codex B in his Greek Testament καὶ οὖς μὲν ἐλεᾶτε διακρινο- 
μένους σώζετε ἐκ πυρὸς ἁρπάζοντες, ods δὲ ἐλεᾶτε ἐν φόβῳ. His note on the passage is felicitous 
in the suspicion that there is a primitive corruption in the text, and that the weak spot is in 
the first ἐλεᾶτε of the passage as given by ὃὲ and B. But his criticism on the édéyxere which 
is found in A C* 13 Vulg. Memph. Arm. Aeth. is unfortunate. ‘‘ The smooth reading of A and C 
has every appearance of being a correction to the difficult double ἐλεᾶτε of δὲ and B.” 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 105 


Jude are African and Alexandrian, which should be noted as regards the 
Teaching. That the epistle should have copied the Teaching is not sur- 
prising when we remember that it uses freely both the book of Enoch and 
- the Ascension of Moses. 

xi. 10. ὃς δ᾽ ἂν εἴπῃ} A curious illustration of these points will be 
found in the respect still paid in the East to wandering religionists. An 
English writer upon Russia notes as follows: “These (eremites) they take 
as prophets and men of. great holiness, giving them a liberty to speak 
what they list without any controlment...... and if any of them take some 
piece of sale-ware from any man’s shop as he passeth by, to give where 
he list, he thinketh himself much beloved of God, and much beholden to 
the holy man for taking it in that sort.” Fletcher, Russian Commonwealths, 
p. 119, quoted in Stanley, Hastern Church, p. 439. 

xii. 3. τεχνίτης ὧν] It is well known that every Jewish Rabbi learned 
a trade. The Midrash on Kccles. ix. 9 paraphrases as follows, “Behold 
thy life with the wife whom thou lovest; ie. look out for a trade along 
with the Divine study that thou lovest.” 

xii. 5. χριστέμπορος] It should be pointed out that this word is in- 
troduced as a contrast to Χριστιανός: that no idle person may live with 
you as a Christian, “and if he will not do this, he is ἃ Christmonger.” 
Hence we may quote Ps-Ignat. ad Trall. ο. 6, εἰσὶ yap Tives...... ov Χρι- 
στιανοί, ἀλλὰ χριστέμποροι, with some confidence that the writer was 
acquainted with the Teaching. 

xii 5. ἐὰν σιτίαν ποιῇς κτὲ 7 Cf. Philo ii, 233, κελεύεε γὰρ τοὺς 
σιτοποιοῦντας ἀπὸ παντὸς στέατός τε καὶ φυράματος ἄρτον ἀφαιρεῖν ἀπαρχὴν 
εἰς ἱερέων χρῆσιν προνοούμενος ἅμα καὶ τῆς εἰς εὐσέβειαν ἀγούσης ὁδοῦ 
νομίμῳ διδασκαλίᾳ. δεύτερον δὲ προστάττει καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς ἄλλης ἁπάσης κτή- 
σεως ἀπάρχεσθαι καθ᾽ ἑκάστην μὲν ληνὸν οἶνον καθ᾽ ἑκάστην δὲ ἅλωνα 
σῖτόν τε καὶ κριθήν: ὁμοίως δὲ ἐξ ἐλαιῶν ἔλαιον κτέ. 

Id. ii. 3384. ὡς γοῦν ἡγεμόσι φόρους ἀπὸ παντὸς μέρους κτήσεως δίδοσθαι 
κελεύει. 

κατὰ τὴν ἐντολή) Cf. Sir. xxix. 9, χάριν ἐντολῆς ἀντιλαβοῦ 
πένητος. 

xiv. 1. Dr Taylor connects this κυριακὴ κυρίου “ΤΟΥ 5 lord’s-day” with 
σάββατον κυρίου of the Old Testament. 

This would imply that a substitute had been found for the Sabbath 
as well as for the weekly fasts by the law of antagonism. And there is 
some evidence to point this way. But I am inclined to suspect that the 
matter is not quite so simple, and that the genesis of the κυριακὴ is in 
another direction. 

We have abundant evidence in the Teaching and in the Scripture to 
shew the link between the Passover and the Agape. What has become of 


Η. 14 


106 THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 


another Jewish service which surpasses this in solemnity? did the early 
Christians drop the Day of Atonement at once on grounds indicated in 
the epistle to the Hebrews? or did it linger as an annual solemnity amongst 
those Christians who stood nearest to the earlier belief? And even if it 
was at once discarded as a Christian fast on the ground that Christ had 
once suffered, was there nothing put in its place? It seems to me that 
there are some things which seem to suggest that the memory of the 
Day of Atonement survives in the κυριακή of the Teaching and the 
Apocalypse. 

In the first place note that in Apoc. i. 10 our Lord appears in the high- 
priestly dress (ποδήρης) which as well as the language concerning redemp- 
tion “through his own blood” suggests the Day of Atonement. Barnabas 
c. vil. confirms this when, in allegorizing on the Day of Atonement and 
the two goats, he says “They shall see him in that day wearing the 
ποδήρης. We may therefore render the passage in the Apocalypse “I was 
in the Spirit on the day of atonement” without doing violence to the 
sense. If some would prefer to see in the words a reference to the day 
of judgment, even this is not excluded by our interpretation, since the 
Day of Atonement is a rehearsal of the day of judgment and is so called 
by the Jews. Its name in the Talmud is simply Yoma, “The Day” of 
the year as distinguished from all other days: and it is counted as a great 
sabbath. 

Now the principal feature of the Day of Atonement beyond the sacrifices 
and prayers is the necessity of personal reconciliation between man and 
man: without this the Day of Atonement does not atone’. And this is 
precisely what is so emphatically required in the Teaching, “Let no 
man who has a controversy with his fellow meet with you, until they be 
reconciled.” 

The injunction to meet and break bread is perhaps an antagonistic 
development, on the principle of not fasting with the hypocrites; for Yom 
Kippur is the most solemn fast of the Jewish year. 

While I would not go so far, then, as to maintain positively that 
κυριακὴ κυρίου in the Teaching stands for the Day of Atonement, it 
seems to me that there is much in the latter that throws light on the 
former. 

xiv. 2. The sacrifice here spoken of is prayer: so expressly Ps.-Cypr. 
de aleat., “Ne impediatur oratio vestra,” which is a quotation either from 
our Teaching or a similar one: and Tertullian Apol. 30, “that costly and 
noble sacrifice of prayer,” also adv. Maretonem iv. 1 with especial refer- 
ence to Malachi i. 11:. “Quoniam a solis ortu usque ad occasum glori- 


1“ Transgression between man and his fellow the Day of Atonement did not expiate, until 
his fellow be reconeiled.” Mishna, Yoma, viii. 9. 


THE TEACHING OF THE APOSTLES. 107 


ficatum est in nationibus nomen meum οἱ in 


nomine meo offertur et sacrificium mundum 
conscientia pura.” 


omni loco saerificium 
scilicet simplex oratio de 


xvi. 8. ἐπάνω τῶν νεφελῶν] Cf. Justin Dial. 120, ἐλήλυθε τοιγαροῦν 


€ A -" a. 
ws καὶ ἐν πολλοῖς ἐπεδείξαμεν, καὶ προσδοκᾶται πάλιν παρέσεσθαι ἐπάνω 
τῶν νεφελῶν ᾿Ιησοῦς. 


CAMBRIDGE: PRINTED BY C, J. CLAY, M.A. AND SONS, AT THE UNIVERSITY PRESS, 


pan ΠΤ wy 


7 8 
ἌΣ δ 
iri 


ὟΙ Ἢ ᾿ 


᾿ il ΤΣ Σ 


, ἔν 


‘ee, 


- wiper. taphthes > Ace Ais 
Dye Nea ἡκωινωζον ΟΣ ee a 
| ἐν ΣΟ ΤΩΣ: “μά, 


“ a ἙΝ aly 


PLATE I. Fol. 76a 


τω 


Ἂν 1 ὧν Ὁ" ΄ ns 4 
be ΤΑΝ oed νι a 


: Θ τ΄ στονν oor eo ὴ χε gH 
δ Load Beate τ γύν ἀν κῦνον, py eps το τῷ, 
“+t Ν ΄ 
ZONE Frey ANDY “δὴν Ἀρβν ὐῖνῳ ἜΘΗ ΤΙ PE Re 
wa vot pests Se 


pan ὦ τπδο ody hd ety ee nu alice 
SNS 


eae rele apt porno op 
> ole te ty 4 
4a Pas « ττὰ berm τὸ curd rrore vey, fey A acwarre Fase 


Gena) 
rics Sah eee τον βκι κεν νοερὰ 
“Gat oo Se pemor fo VG ier aforetacy an aire. 

BSF yap dar of at nN ia sen 


SAC ; 
Neca pets ad at λυποῦν δάμλαδα, 
ono arre 2 stil ah a Si 2 τῷ ae, > aey rey nie 
By Sov eas nrg orton pe ΑΝ βιό ap oh ah 
Dae Aka icorp 19 sie κατα ym Bt wo ps om - 

| a Dre mere Ὡς τιν ‘ eae ὲ 


to sain ha neste 
ἔστ τὸ ἐμ στον γάρνοανόν ἔσο σέ) πιὼν frp «ϑενον 
τὰν aa. 
δια eK fem, gel tna Ne ἀχωλκο dpa’ 
aaa τὰς το ᾿δλφυκθαεσον πὴ 
“ΩΣ τούτην ἔ" ΠῚ Ὥ; “aes \ ) ia σὰ “fe 
τχῆέσο σον Seirsn yy prince: MAG a) Ev by rer" & , . σιν / 
δοογάς ov Aro| δ᾽ οὐ re De-bop σ᾽ οὐ περι dar 7 a ἐν 
bye oss: οὐ} tate Sat open von Y $ 
Ὁ 
; eas ον κι εϑυμν δ΄ τὰς ore oF aw. 
$ 


| "S$ ͵ ες Κ.« 
te Kw σὴν οἱ ον -[ϑ; τισί ἴα ἊΝ ᾿καιολοτέ nk . 


ΕΝ ΦΧ Τὶ 
AUD δ. 


7 


PLATE Il. Fol. 76b 


sifadypin sip W ir rye pe bert Nagas ΠΡ 
si UENCE. ovkdow 


can upher- pap mig: τ ὩΣ Ε Sn kek ονσῦπο-- ay Calpe 
‘pam sincekenostarpla lyre tel See Pea 


\ ALT pak ’ Ν λυ ; 

a 2 δὰ ἀνα Ψ 7 Oe c (Sr< ᾿ 4 
ἄγον ae υσ AL Gr <r )τδμτπρο . Ὁ «τεῦς : 

ee fu ae Me Paes aN a < ‘tele ig. x 

τ σ΄ oper ἌΣ ro nnp & Sdorvag es ur” 


«J \ ΄ \\le 


ΑΕ pes dyjrnty πῇ τὶ τὰν ΕΑ ose Me say Ee 
elon δίων" aaa it’ Het yowayy ink 
“ean ΟΣ Gotan pny page 
rey: ΟΣ Sept time eatin 
Aovopstsacy nt siemekor ἵν τας Enmore 4 
sas) (rata οὗ, sity aber asc ao farted any ENE 
dre one bk yap Int onan Dons reo tan “ἴων 
τὺ nde. τὰν ‘Sym Tatton ferns 
DAP YF aed yxenele Sica σθ στ ΤΌΝ yop. 
TH man Hy ye Ny fo wep oe ἦν 
ἐπ νας: nar us Gna pnw ae 
preteen) jo82 mp lrg cop a frromgeweale 
Toh pet eae κ 
Vos Yat: orp tan λυ Bearer? 0 ἐν το aghast 


yi ΝΑ δα aX, 5H yes aed 
—ofaur\T ον. ἐνβάθῳ ἀβέδτ. wt 9. 2 Ἢ t £; 4 a 


Ἐ . 


PLATE III. Fol. ΤΊ ἃ 


\ 
ὺς 
on Paws 3 Toren ἔλα terry nih gs Saat 


ts. δὰ ε oth 
# on PK? ΣΥΝ perf ιν 05 suns Hi . ἐκ: pret Amag 
τ 4 $s\ ’ “¢4 / Arr *+7 Ἷ 


ΧΡ Seka c νον αννςς ge γον 


/ ras = 
eu Kam  κρ δ σετὸ ἐν δοιίμένεν. σιγκοῖ p bw σ᾽) παρ τῶι 
552 ; 
Nad ce Kear oincee | Nagra GX PE etapa kop, ; 
μοὶ ἅττ, woe oS ed le si ΡΣ ἡρονά δον , 
ΝΣ οὐδὸν ae = p σον: ehaior sew’ we borer tier 


rat ΩΣ e ὑκίον τς δεύλ ον; πδΥσκοτε τ ΩΝ ἐς 
“a én ce un Gil epic tea Wife οὐ μὲ hare bem 


Eraahe- or bpore von Κ᾿ πρόσωπο SXa4 a 


ae FE Meret Lotion eng δι ‘Dre vino [gx ch °6 bferc 
cGy © Fy a ΄ ’ Α AC ¢ 

καὶ S TUR τὸν fia ‘ean 6 ht γάρ cae pe orn 
se = = cr “S¢ 
Key 7 ‘tau ep de π΄ = Le peer Ἢ YEN ANKED a 


7 


“rap ase a Fab t aah aap anor tt nud 
HDG YW σαττα oe TITS κυταζον. muons ton doce 


, \ 


oe’ Suave gases ek a. ἝΩ “ὕω: Si 


- 


c Al 
tobe tir nny erry f a fadlenra an 


PLATE IV. Fol. 77b 


7 dar 


£1 TRAE, PAS Ge 


ei ast ἡ" 4 ων 


π΄. ᾿ 
7 i 
Β "ῇ Xe 
ΠῚ aA 
i os Oe a 
‘ Ὶ 
i, ' A 
ἡ ἐν J 
« 
f 


' 
7 
; 
y 
- Γ 
_ 
᾿ 
4 
‘ 
ἢ 


paler. ᾧ ο" ar Ahr yd et: Graefes πορ»4- De i ᾿ 
waite an: ἀρῶν ΡΩΝ Ἡριτσιο | 
Oriour: πονοῦν, DN: ase sperm: heser: "alot 
ὌΝ t ore Rererver Spacur: of ar op 
oF, PE mrtg tf life ἤρα μὴ 
τς (eer οὐ Κοῦν «ὦ «Ὡονἀψανθῶ. ΤΟΣ Sev ume 
iad gal aX fereronmp\ “δεαιφομτπραῦσα πολ 
aaa τ ραν , Nan an Tal aN οὐ κόνφς me 
οὐσπον τ 6ι πον ne) ἐς ΟΝ dap’ 
Lac ayes taf arent 45 «meh ον Sor SG Niganbolsial 
REESE Casey aN 
Kerrss “πον tacop [et e rosa ie mom τσὶ 
ἐς ἢ ΑΝ μοβφρναληρίθβρ Ν PNT 
Bort {few rk ae SY ys 70 vi ὩΦΘΩΝ | 
yak Scen Gove ποῖ 17> Funeria, 5, 
Ree Aare Pte 


Ye a fd aml, Me: Ν ἘΣ 
Eater rot Be 
ere i et peta grep Sree ida adeeb 


᾿ δ πρίων aca Κρ.» pinta » easel adores 


PLATE V. Fol. 78a 


nf tps 2 ie ze aye Soret δ pede 


μρπενν agin serena Sil 


“ ΠΝ λα 
Bie i Ae ae 
ae ‘oul ΝΣ 4 cen ea 
+k ᾿ δ᾿ ~ 


ἊΝ iG 
ee Ὁ. en τῷ ὦ ων πεν, " ape fn Tae te | ae atinw Ὁ 
ee. : IN een 


' / \ i 
ν Ἢ 4.5 ἊΝ ae, ws" τὸ να ate δον ον ih 4 


bag 


7 ᾿ j 7 goa Ν 
Ma ae ¥ WS Pda ft ae ᾿ 
Pepe tet hd iden haa ἢ lg ᾧ ἐν 15) ne i PS σον ὃν ἀν 
eta -ς, ι oe Rice Fae tet heel J 
Ν hiv f My ἡ he wy i "5 2 Υν W . vs me if er 
oe. ἀδικὰ δον ee + Ma ἡ εἰ has τὶ 
πὸ ον. ὺ ἡ ye " 
Bry " Ltn ? “Z0% j 
4 id q ὟΣ Δ ἡ ' a 4 
ὶ ε Me» ‘ ᾿ χω ty το ἢ ea) 
πὰ Gh Dah ee νυν ἢ bee) 
ny / ἢ 
ἵ ᾿ , δὴ 
" 7 ar fj j ᾿ 
bot gel rit 4 ' ἤν we eh ‘> 
orate ἢ Ra Ὁ ὁ ae: yt ὮΝ igen? ἢ i hy ΠΝ ΝΜ ΨΥ : 
SR gr yh 2: ἐκ , ‘eh 
f es a ‘ ᾿ ! ΤῊ 
5ι, ὁ ᾿ νον Ὁ ; a a ι 
a ; ᾿ Ἵ » Ὧν 1 th BJ 
ji τ» pce A Aa re § Oc ἡ ΤΥ Ph eer gS ae preys a 2 sx oe 
Ἐν! ἈΠῸ ὟΝ ᾽ aes . 
pas {8.9 ᾿ τ oN aoe 
Sp tnt ‘he rw cats ce lewplesiine 
Ds tn, ὧδε hw μὲν AE HP a ΜΠ" nn PD Ra ΚΑ Σ 
“s Fa ‘ ‘Th { 
hl Ὰ . » Pr. i 
Bae ae arg di Mh \ se hd ERE Se 
4 4 
: me Ὁ JF 
‘i La Ki t ὶ ee 
4 4 \ i ῃ wy 
1 i ; 2 al % » 4 
ῖ, ᾿ δὴ ὁ 
’ ΓΤ D sf Υ ἡ ὥς ὦ 
? re ve 
‘ L 
kh. ἐν δ 1 
Fe Bi 
Ὁ Β = A . 
. ὴ pr Kn, ὯΝ ἢ, 4 
ἔ ΕῚ 
ν 
i 
Vy rhe ' - J 
rant i ἃ ὶ 
7 
4 as 
Ὺ “J 
we a 
ὴ , 
\ 
~ 
' 
1 
Ste a! ~ ee 
ΓΝ 
ἱ ὧν. 
᾿ ῃ fs ; 


\ 
again 
κὰν. wip nn pani Bees ure boys ely 8 


_ Mertp re Sor emt Eten eterarre eg Nap 
Potter 08 yomenr Se ΣΙ ine Gc AES be ; 
Payton dur Sie arp 0 σάχάϑε; 776 « Mee Ce ας τ a]rady 
_. SSS τάν μενδος eel ν 
jade Pid qavtee Widigiea sapere ste 


pene Ge wie tots\ aap 2 vai darecronnpYo eof 


aie ΄ γι ‘ ͵ ae oa ἢ 
gow ἄτην Κα δα Kou κα ὰ D four Sapte Fe alg A 
, ~ 20, ee ee? / εὶ 
We ° Ω λῶν, twtour τιαπστυτε.- he ὶ 
“a ΄ συ": > 
Fi Rueegl ga ἀχαρυκοῦ ας wore Saath m ζηδρ τὲ een ἡ 
χσχΥ. 


SERIE epicure saad 
BS § Cie δ get Sere 
ἕ a EN aie ire wo-Yyerre Kin Naty em We 
ἊΝ «εἴς ὦ ir Sacre 
ῷ των ἰός, 
ine | 
meer τος i 
INF Tamrac 75} 
Fe Seen ue eer 2 | 
a te gr he xcs Asn ὁ τε πο [τ᾿ Kut 
Ps ἐπα ταν ἀχηζανντς, 


Ἦν ον ἘΠῚ τ σονσψον ἘΦ Noo 
E “Gaet feptyeen x une rT ype: E \¢-97 WE ee 


PLATE VI. Fol. 78b 


Se ΄ Vio ENON nh eee 
Fe Gye: Fated jy ¥ iepwity sero aa 


3 \ ΤᾺ \! 
BS oy on: ΩΣ townie ro πεοφηνοποτὸὶς | 


ο΄ Nera .- 
Boobs ΓΝ: aa σχ IPO TY hoaplesicton ie) 


ἈμωΣ οὶ: AY aw €f 0 ae wr Lin oD ot RE Fee etty 


SZ ¥ 
wpe \c TEATS adi wu: 
p rorgep hr ame 7-7 Pp ἊΣ 75 yor 
tee ena ον Ὁ οὐ γε σοι 
\ ¢ 
ol. ER ae νι aldara 
=> — 


Be tacic ve. On thew £5. ἐνερ ουθατο keene Gan 
»ἀξρῶ ND frre ye Semin gb 1 ee 


—* ΤΑ ΜΝ ek eb ark caper Bore ft Gre ees 
ON Faery 

we ye AEA 0 rT: οἷ (Oo aH ο ὦ GA Hp OUT ep Tk 

cratorg  fornéy aoe a ἔαρεον ἡ τον 


δωκεν κ νζ Poor kprer aay “ὦ dur ἀξ. ΧΑ 


noes DG yh yeGon nd pire KE: πἀνάδ μα δ᾽ 


κρῖ δὶ \ yt 
F chee wo ~ “pe Ὁ Gs thea re} Layers ovr 
_ Ὁ a ὦ Α pS 2 
fe pao ew Se ΡΣ Pr Rieti a Min 


Cu By Fits 
ane Pid, "αν. σ - 
Μὴ pa ean nef τῇ wee’ Deanengn 


eee Beads IK εμον ἡ 
ace 5 apa\aueav: +04: eon ep pp) ai orn "ἰκλοτρο 
Ὁ ἢ: TON) i στο ἐγ nese bo 0 ong alee 


re 


“av Vafey wgere. rare ap inp τα τρλόδηγας «ὑλῶν 


΄ 


PLATE VII. Fol. 79a 


Be git SAT ean ὧν 

“ar tomy pute 2 Mer ‘wera δ δ 
Ἂ 7, ‘ice ri cy Fie J ᾿ as 
ee ata od 


: " a ‘ > 
ν᾿ aR pele ree 


ἀν 


ae 
nee ais 
τ 


ie ee as f 
BoA Nia ay 


e 


ἐδ Se, 


a ? ἊΣ hi ; 


TUNE stein iy Se μὰν eat a ὃ ae ety Se hy ht 


ee ; ery "ἋΣ ot 
eee Sree 7 SR raged δία Gaal ty 
: δ “ἢ ᾿ Ἶ * ᾿ z ξ ean | r ἣν d {i \ ot δ ν 
2 μὴ a > a, wy ᾿ . ᾿ 
εχ τ ee eee et τς τ οὐ ΩΝ ver aie ἀν 
4 f } rd 7 ἐξ." ᾿ 4, (ss Ῥ (Ae ee 
she i Sar ie bias sew ea gl aes a 
en een αὶ 
ty ‘ Pe rt ae alias ἐν ne) 
᾿ ἌΝ δ Ὃν Dy ps 
i τ ib rae eee oe) Late ons ΕὟ νανοῖῳ 
" es x 
‘ ie ᾿ " 2 
sy ne aa nn 
ee 
ane 


ae 


ἐ: ikipericers ΟΡ δ ΚΑ ge fot dep Saif 
Ἶ τὴ = schon foie 
KOS τῆ προ Sis See ἐγυνὸ Bailes purer 

Fen ee RY oe: 
i iecepunnatay dakar PS aire: 

Ὥρα dines Sane a rome feelin: 

any \ \ 

Araoybp Xr thy Fel Foran eae et nema Ghat aie 
Se τ aceees 
ries = ener aE Cob epacevory ofr Bre) " 

ἀράν ae 7 πως κοι Lest δ λων 


ἐακόρῥτ Gc ier ὅθ, BiGgye mthbyind Σ 
χαρά ρορ τω: ‘longa ranches carr ἐν sot. poured. we 
x κ᾿ ray kes l Op fae rrp over deps ABN ULL 
or SE CT ERAR ES SAS ance 
kp fans Ch te τον θα pei ots 
scteeh γε pei) ah ἤτοι dap egy meng 
rere ΡΟ ΧΟ ΔΩ Ἰμγατ χρί τὴν. Ὑδέσόχω, 
recto gee ken wee ee en iP pied Fe 
oF ectri ΣΟ ΣΩ = α-- 20 «ὦ ves νιν 
τς ἐάντε "πρός yor εν. 
saad Tae fp pn γῶν phoresdin Anprowrw te wade fe) 
BAS εἷς cack nade dee rude get προδητωσ. αὐτο pp get 
oie fe τὴς baccarat rt σὸν r3 
aon tae omar ha hora Χαὶ DE νοι "ὦ 


PLATE VIII. Fol. 79 Ὁ 


τὴν ΚΣ. ἧς, \ iy 
στωτ κ PNM Le tira ad NS οὶ 


‘ ae tye? ὅκα ater gt Ket att Nea OP 
wrt rep χορ cr eo yo Svir κατὰ τίω ἐμ τοδί 
. wr κιοισκὸ:» Xen NE rasrtig hag ct 
rere saa ne re enh rr A Ra \ 
tapas es *? sop hab ant ala Emi 
ἀντόνν tae cra Na fa whew “Slap j 
PY es ὙΠ 
peda beat ai cae A β" ἴσα τὸ κόρ ττντε σε 
“haze πο af eats keane “ὅκα 
Se ΣΤ. te eDrake ps an a 
dod Forpege Gabi Nap yep aera cress 
μὰν» Ἃ ? οφζ» 
% Oe a Seen tone ie 
το εἰς; AUTH οἰντάνακαα 
ΔΊ ΣΝ et ΡΨ 
erey: ΚΡ του και Saco SLANG 
mpcnenll τον i AACN , 
BA 


Kndce A thor sped Deal foie Ry, 
mr) wow aye rh242 « ht mene oy rea fagyny 2 ιν : 


PLATE IX. Fol. 80a 


ont? eel ἡ νον & 4 


ΕἸ ῥ 
- , δ ᾿ ἢ 
᾿ . ae ee ἢ Ἡ ‘wa | ne 
. s Ὁ να fae He SS eas | μὴν , Ὁ τ Ἦ - Ae αὑτὸ wer nee Ἧ 
Ἂ ᾿ ν 4 ; 


Ἢ . 1 i, ‘4 Ν 4: alt 
x 7 ᾿" 4 i . aP 
een τὰ , aaa we τὴν δῖ Vi ARE aut 
᾿ ' ἵ 


Ὁ νῷ “y ᾿ ba γ» ὡς “ 
« “ls @ 4 . ων = 
Ἃ = sin, oak Kieu oe yt ἂν δ. PO Rei δ arin yi 
ἊΣ ets OX " 3 i ' * ἃ 
᾽ } χὰ ) 
ὅς Ὁ Ν Σιν. ἡ νον oF - "" es ar 
ν ᾿ ῳ “ὟΣ ὼ Ἢ 7 ὡς Ψ' 
Ξ tes Σ . * 4 (as νῶν τὰν ae τὺ ry ᾽ν 
᾿ Be > x Ὁ Se | ΝᾺ ' τε ᾿ 
᾿ 5 ai 
ἵ ws ᾿ 


F : ¢ ; ᾿ 4 f 
a ‘ pure ‘ »Ἔ ge Ἃ ἔδυ ΨΥ" ἀν Sees weeny Kale , 
5 Ν δὼ ᾿ ‘I ἐδ . 
re ot ten δ 


Πα ee Soe  πι 


- a1 
? Ἰ ΡΠ 
ὶ ; Per) si why Oy 
\ 
Aue 
ἢ 
b 
is . 7 
; Ἶ 
vf ἡ ἮΝ 
᾿ )ς 
Ν ἐπ 
' = ὶ 
~ 5 
i 
ΕΣ -- 


Sad papas o> ͵ Cate ΄' am \ \ ἐν 
nae {ἀπο πχοο bi Ahn λα aan Cun 
mee ἢ τόλ4--θ πε: yp Ἂς ἐν: wt anbp a ae 


teu trove fests Do πος Ξε ὶ dbp gone wees 
᾿ anFpene ater ie nye ato} eh 


ἀν ΩΝ 


ee ait o+ oe vo wove Rowe ko Neh ον 


\ re 


ear κα τ Πα σον “τὸ γ΄ aieh sie rea eine ) 
Event ssc Ss hedre Skies wae ΝΣ: “πθν-είνάτιζε . 
aepeoal IE eR As paran 
caked 1" Hee: τ πρίν τὴ Fra Nr ΙΝ: 
DearS nevi πολὺ kag dard τοῦ or) mean ere 
fier esecg wr: onal σομ to iat Cae 
porns τοκχαστ Αγ Rei ate ipl onal 2\ esc -niaae’ ᾿ 
τε Teor Ww Ne Obert” ἀτός νι 
acer KE: ou πάντ δρλιὺσ ἔρρεε ny Gen κέ 
th τ: ΕΞ δ Naser ea emia ἡ 


 . «-.-: 
aa A Roads sy AS da 


PLATE X. Fol. 80b 


Date Due 


nny 


uu i 


